Vauxhall - Vectra - Owners Manual - (2007)

Owner’s Manual VECTRA Operation, Safety and Maintenance Reproduction or translation, in whole or in parts, is not permitted without prior written consent from Vauxhall Motors Ltd. All rights as understood under the copyright laws are explicitly reserved by Vauxhall Motors Ltd. All information, illustrations and specifications contained in this manual are based on the latest production information available at the time of publication. The right is reserved to make changes at any time without notice. Edition: July 2007. TS 1557-A-08 VECTRA ©Copyright by Vauxhall Motors Ltd., England. VAUXHALL Vectra Operation, Safety, Maintenance Data specific to your vehicle Please enter your vehicle’s data here to keep it ea sily accessible. This information is available under the section "Technical da ta " as well as on the identification plate and in the Serv ice Booklet. Fuel De signation Engine oil Grade Viscosity Tyre pressure Tyre size with up to 3 pe ople with full load Summer tyres Front Rear Front Rear Winter tyres Front Rear Front Rear Weights Pe rmissible Gross Vehicle Weight – EC ke rbweight = L oading Your Vectra is an intelligent c om bina tion of forwardlooking technology, impressiv e safety , env ironmenta l friendliness a nd economy. It now lies with you to drive your vehicle safely and ensure that it perform s perfectly. This O wner’s Manual provides you with all the necessary information to that end. Make sure y our pa ssengers a re awa re of the p ossible risk of accid ent and injury which may result from im proper use of the vehic le. You m ust alway s comply w ith the sp ecific laws of the c ountry that y ou are travelling through. These laws ma y differ from the inform ation in this Ow ner’s Manual. When instructed to consult a w ork shop, we recomm end that y ou consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. All Vauxhall Authorised Repairers provide first-class service at rea sonable prices. Make use of the Owner’s Manual: z The "In brief" section will give you an initial overv iew. z The table of c ontents at the beginning of the Owner’ s M anual and within the individual chapters will show y ou where every thing is. z Its index will help you find what you want. z It w ill fa miliarise you with the sophisticated technology. z It w ill increase y our pleasure in your vehicle. z It w ill help you to handle your vehic le expertly . The O wner’s Manual is designed to be clearly laid-out and easily understood. This symbol signifies: 6 Continue read ing on next pa ge. 3 The asterisk signifies equipment not fitted to all v ehicles (model variants, engine op tions, models specific to one country, optional equipment, Genuine Vauxhall Parts and Acc essories). 9 Warn ing Text marked 9 Warning provides information on risk of accident or injury. Disregard of the instructions may lead to injuries or endanger life. Inform your passeng ers accordingly. Y ellow arrows in the illustrations serve as points of reference or indicate some action to be performed. Black arrows in the illustrations indicate a reaction or a second action to be performed. You will receiv e q uick , reliab le and individual service. Direc tional da ta, e.g. left or right, or front or back, in the descriptions alway s relate to the direction of travel. Ex perienced mechanics, trained by Vauxhall, work a ccord ing to specific Vauxhall instructions. Thank y ou for choosing a Vaux hall. We wish you many hours of plea surable driving. The Owner’ s Manual should always be k ept in the v ehicle: Rea dy to hand in the glove compartment. Your V auxhall Team Contents Comm itment to c ustomer satisfaction: Our ai m: to k eep you happy with your vehicle. All Vauxhall Authorised Repairers offer first-class serv ice a t competitiv e prices. Experienced, factory-trained technicians w ork according to factory instructions. Y our Authorised Repa irer can supply you with GEN UINE VAU XHALLAPPRO VED PARTS , which hav e und ergone stringent quality and precision chec ks, and of course useful and a ttrac tiv e VAUXHALL-APPROVED AC CESSO RIES. Our nam e i s your guara ntee! For d eta ils of the Va uxhall Authorised Rep airer Netw ork, please r ing this number; 0845 090 2044 In b rief .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... . 2 K eys, doors, w indows, sunroof ... ..... .... .. 26 S eats, interior ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 50 Instrum ents, controls . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 98 Lighting ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 128 Infotainment system . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 137 C lim ate c ontrol .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 140 Driving and op eration ... .... ..... .... ..... .... 168 S elf-help, vehicle care .... .... ..... .... ..... .... 228 S ervice, maintena nce ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 268 Technical data .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 282 Index . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 314 2 In brief In brief To unlock and open vehicle: Press bu tton q , pull door handle 6 Door locks, child safety locks – see p age 41, key s – see page 26, electronic im mobiliser – see pag e 27, remote control – see page 28, central locking – see p age 30, mechanical a nti-theft locking system 3 – see p age 30, Vauxhall a la rm system 3 – see pag e 38. To unlock an d open the luggage com partment: Press button q on remote con trol, press button o n boot lid/tailgate and fo r Estate, pull catch under handle 6 Remote control – see page 28, central loc king – see page 30, Vauxhall alarm system 3 – see page 38, electrically op erated tailgate 3 – see page 35. In brief To adjust front seats: Pull han dle, slide seat, release handle To adjust front seat backrests: Turn handwheel 6 Seats – see page 50, seat p osition – see page 52, electrically a djustable front sea ts – see page 52. Do not lean on seat b ackrest whilst adjusting it. 9 Warning Important: Do not sit nearer than 10 inches (25 cm ) from the steering wheel, to permit sa fe airbag deployment. Move seat backrest to suit seating position. 6 Seats – see pag e 50, seat position – see page 52, folding d ow n front passenger’ s seat backrest – see page 66, electrica lly adjusta ble front seats – see p age 52. 3 To adjust fron t seat height 3 : Operate lever on outboard side of seat Pump a ction of lever Upwa rds: Seat higher Downwards: Seat lower 6 Seats – see page 50, seat position –see page 52, electrically adjustable front seats – see page 52. 4 In brief Adjusting fron t seat inc lination 3: Operate fro nt lever on outboard side of seat Electric seat adjustment 3 : Operate switch o n outboard side of seat Pump action of lever Upwards: S eat steeper Downwards: S eat flatter 1 Adjusting the longitudinal position 2 3 Adjusting the inclination Heig ht adjustment 6 Seats – see page 50, seat p osition – see page 52, electrically a djustable front sea ts – see page 52. 4 5 Seat back rest adjustment Lum bar supp ort 3 6 Seats – see pag e 52, seat position – see page 52, electrica lly adjusta ble front seats – see p age 52. To adjust head restraint height 3 of front and o utboard rear seats: Press button to release, adjust height, engage in position 6 Head restraints – see page 55, hea d restraint position – see p age 56, rear head restra ints – see p age 55. In brief To adjust head restraint angle 3 of front and outboard rear seats: Swivel bottom edge of head restraint forwards or backwards 6 Head restra ints – see p age 55, head restraint position – see pag e 56, rea r head restraints – see pag e 55. To apply seat belt: Pull o ut seat belt smoothly from inertia reel, guide it over the shou lder and engage in the belt buckle The seat b elt must not be twisted at any point. The lap belt m ust lie snugly a gainst the body. The bac krests m ust not be tilted back too far (recommended m aximum tilting a ngle approx . 25°). To relea se belt, press red button on belt buckle. 6 Three-point seat belts – see page 72, airbag systems 3 – see page 81, seat position – see page 52. 5 Adjusting interior mirror: Swivel mirror hou sing S wivel lever on underside of m irror housing to reduce d azzle at night. 6 Mirror – see page 44, automatic a nti-daz zle interior m irror 3 – see page 44. 6 In brief To adjust exterior mirrors: Four-way switch in driver’s do or If the outer m irror switch (1) is pressed, the four-wa y switch operates the driver’s and front passenger’s mirrors 3 , a nd if the inner mirror switch (2) is pressed, it only operates the front passenger’s m irror. 6 Mirrors – see pa ge 43, aspherical exterior m irrors 3 – see pa ge 43, automatic anti-dazz le exterior m irrors 3 – see page 43, heated exterior m irrors – see pag e 13, electric seat adjustment 3 – see p age 54. Steering column lock and ignition : Turn key to position 1. Mo ve steering wheel slightly to release steering column loc k Positions: 0 = Ig nition off 1 = S teering free, ignition off 2 = Ig nition on, for diesel engines: Preheating 3 = S tarting 6 Starting – see page 15, electronic im mobiliser – see pag e 27, parking the v ehicle – see page 16. Steerin g wh eel adjustment 3 : Move lever down , adjust height and distance, move lever up, engage Adjust steering wheel only when vehicle is stationary and steering colum n loc k is released. 6 Airb ag systems 3 – see page 81. In brief Turn light 7 = 8 = 9 = AUTO = switch: Off Parking lights Dipped or main beam Automatic dipped beam activation 3 Press button: > = Front fog lights 3 r = Fog tail light 6 Lighting – see pa ge 128, head lig ht control indicator – see pages 100, 126, 128. Headlight flash, main beam and dipped beam: Headlight = Pull stalk flash towards steering wheel Main beam = Push stalk forwards Dipped beam = Push stalk forwards again or pull towards steering wheel 6 Main beam, headlight flash – see p age 129. Switch on tu rn signal lights: Right = Stalk up Left = Stalk down 6 Turn signal lights – see page 130. 7 8 In brief In brief 1 Page Side air v ents ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 142 2 Front pa ssenger’s airbag . .... ..... .... . 81 3 Centre air v ents .... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 142 4 Infotainm ent system 3 . .... .... ..... ... 137 5 Central information display for time, date, outside temperature, Infotainm ent system 3, check control 3, trip computer 3, Electronic Climate Control 3 . ..... ... 108 6 Turn signal lights... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 7 Headlight flash, dipped beam a nd main beam . .... .... 7 Door-to-door lighting 3 .... .... ..... .... 133 Parking lights ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 134 Cruise control 3 .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 200 7 Steering wheel remote c ontrol 3 .. 137 8 Instruments .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 98 9 Horn .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 11 Driver’ s airb ag . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... . 81 10 11 Pa ge Windscreen wiper, wind screen wash system, headlight wash system 3 and rear window w ash system 3 .... ..... .. 11 Pa rk ing lights, dipped beam ... ..... 128 Instrument illumination ... ..... .... ..... 134 Fog tail lig ht .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 131 Front fog lights 3 ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 130 Head lig ht range adjustment 3 ..... 131 9 Page 19 Ashtray s ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 94 20 S towa ge c om partment with AUX input 3 .... .... ..... .... ..... .... 138 21 C igarette lighter 3 or socket ... .... .. 93 22 C lim ate c ontrol .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 163 23 Heated seat (left) 3 .... ..... .... ..... .... 144 Haz ard warning lights .... .... ..... .... 131 Parking distance sensors 3 . ..... .... 202 12 Unlock ing the bonnet ... .... ..... .... .... 228 24 Glove compartment ... ..... .... ... 95, 135 13 Starter switch with steering colum n lock ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... ... 6 25 Fusebox . ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 246 14 Ac celera tor pedal .... .... .... ..... .... .... 184 15 Brake peda l ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... 185, 208 16 Steering wheel adjustm ent .. .... ..... ... 6 17 Clutch ped al 3 . .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 185 18 Heated seat (right) 3 and seat climate control 3 . .... ..... .... ..... 144 Vauxhall a la rm system 3 ..... .... ..... . 38 Rear w indow blind 3 ... .... ..... .... ..... . 49 and Electronic S tability Programme 3 196 SPORT mode 3 ... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 198 10 In brief Control indicato rs O Turn signal l ights, see pages 7, 98, 130. I Eng ine oi l pressure, see page 98. R Brak e system , clut ch system, see pages 99, 209, 276. p Alternat or, see page 99. v Airb ag systems 3 , belt t ensioners 3, see pages 74, 86. W Coola nt temperat ure, see pages 100, 106. 8 Exterior l ights, see pages 100, 128. 1 SPO RT mode of autom atic tra nsm ission 3, see pages 100, 178, 179. T Winter progr amm e of autom atic transmission 3 or Easytronic 3, see pages 100, 172, 180. ( Door open 3, see page 100. j Easytronic 3, start ing the eng ine 3, see pages 100, 169. t Bulb replac em ent 3, see p ages 100, 252. u Anti -lock Bra ke Syst em (A BS ), see page 210. s Open lugg age comp artment, see p ages 34, 101. p > Front fog lights 3 , see p ages 101, 130. Electro-hyd raulic p ower assisted steer ing, see page 103. v C Main beam , see p ages 7, 101, 128. Electronic S tabil ity Prog ramm e (ES P® P lu s ) 3 , see pages 103, 196. r Fog t ail li ght, see p ages 101, 131. y Seat occupancy recogniti on 3, see pages 87, 103. r Pa rking distance sensors 3, see p ages 101, 202. S Engine oil level 3 , see pages 103, 272. u Continuous Dam ping Control 3 , SPORT m ode, see p ages 101, 198. m C ruise cont rol 3, see page 200. Y Fuel lev el, see pages 103, 106, 228. Z Exhaust g ases 3, see pages 104, 192. w Tyre p ressure monitori ng system 3, see pages 104, 204. B Ad aptiv e Forwa rd Lighting (AFL) 3, see pages 104, 132. X Seat belt 3, see p age 101. A Engine electronic s, transmission elect ronics 3, diesel fuel fi lter 3 , immob iliser, see p ages 27, 101, 192. ! Pr eheating for diesel engines 3, diesel p artic le fi lter 3, see p ages 102, 194. H Coolant lev el , see p ages 102, 275. In brief Hazard warning lights: On = Press ¨ Off = Press ¨ again 6 Hazard w arning lights – see pa ge 131. Activate horn: Press j in c entre of steering wh eel 6 Airbag system s 3 – see pag e 81, remote control on steering wheel 3 – see p age 137. 11 Win dscreen wiper: Gently push stalk upwards § = Off $ = Adjustable timed interval wipe % = Slow & = Fast Press the stalk down from position §: S ingle swipe. 6 Windscreen wiper – see page 126, adjustable wiper interva l 3 – see pa ge 126, wiper blades – see pages 277, 278, vehicle c are – see page 264. 12 In brief Automatic wiping with rain sen sor 3: Gently push stalk upwards § = Off $ = Automatic wipin g with rain senso r Autom atic wiping $ : Low sensitivity : Move adjuster wheel to the left High sensitivity: Move adjuster wheel to the right 6 Windscreen wiper – see page 126, wiper blades – see pages 277, 278, vehic le care – see p age 264. Operating windscreen and headlight wash systems 3 : Pull stalk towards steering wheel 6 Windscreen wa sh system and headlight wash system 3 – see page 127, further information – see pag es 264, 278. Operating rear window wiper 3 and wash systems 3 : Wiper on = Push stalk forwards Wiper off = Push stalk forwards again Wash = Hold stalk in fully forwards positio n 6 Rear window wiper 3 and rear window wash 3 systems – see page 127, further inform ation – see pages 264, 277, 278. In brief Heated rear window, heated exterior mirrors: On = Press Ü Off = Press Ü again To demist or defrost windows: Set air distribution to l, turn rotary knob for temperature and airflo w clockwise; 6 Air c onditioning 3 – see page 140, heated rear window, heated exterior mirrors – see page 143. Air con ditioning system 3: Press bu ttons n and V ; Automatic air conditioning system 3: Press bu ttons n and V , turn rotary knob for temperature clockwise, airflow to A; Electronic Climate Control 3: Press bu tton V 6 C lim ate control – see pa ge 140. 13 Setting auto matic m ode of Electronic Climate Control 3: Press AUTO button, set temperature for driver’s and front passenger’s sides using left and right rotary knobs 6 Electronic C limate Control 3 – see page 156. 14 In brief Manual transmission: Reverse gear: with vehicle sta tionary, pull the ring up three seconds after depressing clutch ped al and engage gear. If the gear does not engag e, set the lever in neutral, release the clutch pedal and depress again; then repeat gear selection. Easytronic 3 : N = Idling o = D rive positio n + = Higher gear = Lower gear A/M = Switch between Automatic and Man ual mode R = Reverse gear (with selector lever lock) The selector lever must alway s be mov ed in the appropriate direction as far as it will go. Upon release, it autom atically returns to the centre position. Pay heed to the gear/mode ind icator in the transm ission display . The footb rake must b e depressed when starting. 6 Easytronic 3 – see page 168. Automatic transmissio n 3 : P = Park position R = Reverse gear N = Neutral position (idling) D = Au tomatic gear selection Selector lever in D to the left: Man ual mo de + = Higher gear - = Lower gear P or N must b e engaged when starting . In brief In order to leav e P, switch on ignition, depress footbrake and press b utton on selector lever. Before starting-o ff, check: To engag e P or R, press button on selector lev er. P Only with vehicle stationary, apply ha nd brake beforehand. R Only if vehicle is stationary. z Engine oil level and fluid levels in engine compa rtm ent – see p ages 271 to 279. 6 Automatic transmission 3 – see page 176. 15 z Tyre pressure and condition – see pages 204, 211, 299. z All windows, mirrors, ex terior lighting and number plates a re free from dirt, snow and ice and are operational. z No objec ts are placed in front of the rear window, on the instrument p anel or in the area in w hich the airbags infla te. z Seats, seat b elts and mirrors are correctly adjusted. z Brake opera tion. To start engine: Operate clutch and brake pedals, automatic transmission 3 in P or N, Easytronic 3: D epress brake, do no t accelerate, Petrol engines: Turn key to 3; Diesel engines: Turn key to 2, when control indicator ! goes out1) , tu rn key to 3; release key once engine is running To restart or switch off the engine, turn key bac k to 0. To switch on the ignition, only turn the key to 2. 6 Electronic im mobiliser – see pag e 27, diesel fuel system – see page 228. 1) Preh eatin g system sw itches on o nly if outside tem perature is low . 16 In brief Parking the vehic le z Always ap ply the ha nd brake firmly without pressing the release button; to do this, fold up the armrest 3. Apply handbrake as fully as possible on an uphill or downhill incline. To red uce the amount of force required to activa te the handbrake, depress the footbrake at the same time. Releasing th e handbrake: Raise lever slightly, press release button, lower lever fully 6 Handbrake – see pag e 209. z Sw itch off the engine; to do this, turn the ignition key to 0. Remov e the ignition k ey and turn the steering wheel until the steering colum n lock (anti-theft protection) enga ges. In v ehicles with automatic transmission 3, the key ca n only be removed when the selector lev er is in P. z If the vehicle is parked on a flat surfa ce or an uphill incline, engage first gear before switching off the ignition if y ou have manual transmission or Easy tronic 3 ; if the vehicle has automatic transmission 3, place the selector lever in P. O n an uphill incline, also turn the front wheels away from the kerb. If the vehicle is on a downhill incline, eng age reverse gear before switching off the ig nition if you have ma nual transm ission or Easytronic 3; if the vehicle has automatic transmission 3, place the selector lever in P. Also turn the front wheels towards the kerb. z Lock the doors and luggage compartment and ac tiv ate the Vauxhall alarm sy stem 3 by pressing button p on the remote control. To activate the mechanical anti-theft loc king sy stem 3 , press button p a gain no more than 15 seconds after locking. Advice when parking: z Do not park vehicle on easily ignitable surfaces, since the hot exhaust system temperatures could cause the surfa ce to ignite. z On v ehicles with Easy tronic 3 , control ind ic ator R fla shes for a few seconds after the ignition is switched off if the ha nd brake ha s not been a pplied – see page 174. z Close windows and sunroof 3 . z The eng ine cooling fans m ay run after the eng ine has been switched off – see page 271. 6 Remote control – see page 28, central loc king – see pag e 30, Vauxhall alarm system 3 – see page 38, vehicle d ecommissioning – see page 281. In brief 17 That was a brief overview of the most important in formation for your first drive in your vehicle. The other pages o f this chapter con tain a summary of the interesting fun ction s in your vehicle. The remain ing ch apters of the Owner’s Manual contain impo rtant information on operatio n, safety and maintenance as well as a com plete in dex. 18 In brief Airbag system The a irb ag system c onsists of several separate systems. Front airb ag system The front airbag system will be triggered in the event of a serious ac cident involving a frontal impact and forms safety cushions for the driver and front passenger. The forward movem ent of the d riv er and front passenger is check ed a nd the risk of injuries to the upper body a nd head are thereby substantially reduced. Side airb ag system 3 The side a irb ag system triggers when a side-on collision occurs a nd provides a safety barrier for the driver and/or front passenger in the respective front door area. This reduc es the risk of injury to the up per body considera bly, in the event of a side-impact. C ur tain ai rbag syst em 3 The curtain a irba g system triggers in the event of a side-on collision and provides a safety barrier in the head area on the respective side of the v ehicle. This red uces the risk of injury to the head considera bly in the event of a side-on collision. 6 Airb ag systems 3 – see page 81. In brief Active head restraints 3 at front seats Operating menus in th e information display 3 S elec tion using multi-function knob: Rotate and press multi-function knob. In the event of a rear-im pact, the active head restraints tilt forwards a little. The head is more effectively supported by the head restraint and the d ang er of injuries caused by whiplash in the neck area is red uced. Menu options are selected using menus and using the buttons/four-way button or the multi-function knob of the Infotainment sy stem 3 or the left-hand adjuster wheel 3 on the steering wheel. The respective menu options a re show n on the display. To exit a m enu, turn the m ulti-func tion knob left or right to Return or Mai n and select. Active head restraints are id entified by the lettering ACTIVE on the head restraint guide sleev es. 6 Head restra ints – see p age 55. To select w ith four-way button: Press the four-way button up, down, right or left. 19 20 In brief Ü Board Computer BC 1 BC 2 Timer 1 257.0 Ø 40 8 7.0 Ø 31.0 Tyres Selection using left-ha nd adjuster wheel on steering wheel: Rotate and press adjuster wheel. 6 Information display – see page 108. 19,5° 19:36 All values miles Coolant level mph ch eck gal. miles/ gal. Trip computer 3 The trip computer provides information on driving data, which is continually recorded and ev alua ted electronically. Functions: z Range, z Instanta neous consum ption, z Distanc e travelled, z Average speed, z Effective consumption, z Average consumption, z Stop watch, z Tyre pressure 3. 6 Trip comp uter 3 – see pages 114, 120. OK Check control 3 The check control softwa re monitors: z Fluid levels, z Tyre pressures 3 , z Remote control battery, z Vauxhall alarm system 3, z Important ex terior lights, inc luding cables and fuses. 6 Check control 3 – see pa ge 124. In brief Remote control on steering wheel 3 The functions of the Infotainm ent system 3 and the information display can be opera ted with the buttons and ad juster wheels on the steering wheel. Further information is available in the Infotainm ent system operating instructions. 6 Remote control on steering wheel 3 – see page 137, Infotainm ent system – see page 137. Twin Audio 3 Tw in Audio p rov id es rear seat occupants with the opportunity to listen to a different audio source tha n the one selected by the driver on the Infotainment sy stem 3 . FlexOrganizer 3 Only a n audio source tha t is not currently active on the Infotainm ent system c an be controlled using Twin Audio. The sy stem consists of: z Variable partition net, z Variable partition wall, z Partition rod, z Mesh pockets for the side walls, z Hooks. Tw o headp hone connections are a vailable, with separate volum e c ontrols. Further inform ation is av ailable in the Infotainment sy stem opera ting instructions. 6 Twin Audio 3 – see page 138. The side walls contain retaining strips, where va rious components can be attached to divide the lugg age compa rtm ent or fasten loads. 6 FlexO rg aniz er 3 – see page 69. 21 22 In brief C ur ve lighti ng The Xenon light b eam pivots based on steering wheel position and vehicle speed, from app rox . 6 mph (10 km/h). The headlights shine at an angle of up to 15° to the right or left of the direction of travel. Turn lig hting An add itional light illuminates at certain steering w heel settings (a fter approx. 90°), turn signal settings and speeds up to app rox . 25 mph (40 k m/h). Travel Assistant 3 The Trav el Assistant contains: z Arm rest, z Stowage compartments, z Waste container, z Drink holders, z Acc essory sockets, z Connection console e.g. for DVD p la yer 3, z Elec tric cool box, z Foldaway tables, z Tw in Audio (rear audio module) 3 or stowage compartm ent. The Trav el Assistant is installed on a console above the c entre seat in the rear. 6 Trav el Assistant 3 – see page 58. Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL) 3 On vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlights, AFL improves illumination of: z C urves (curv e lighting), z Intersec tions and tight turns (turn lighting). The lig ht beam projects at a 90° angle to the left or right of the v ehicle up to a distance of a pprox. 30 metres. Mot or way lighti ng At higher speeds and continuous straight ahead travel, the dipped bea m automatically raises slightly, thereby increa sing hea dlight rang e. 6 Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL) 3 – see page 132. In brief 23 Ü Board Computer BC 1 BC 2 Timer Tyres Parking distance senso rs 3 When rev erse gear is selected, the pa rk ing distance sensors switch on automatically. The p arking dista nce sensors ca n also be activated at speeds of less than 15 m ph (25 k m/h) by pressing the r button on the instrum ent panel. If the vehicle approaches a n ob stacle to the front or rea r, a series of signals is audible in the vehicle interior. The interval between the signals becomes shorter a s the d istance is reduced. If the dista nce is less than 30 cm , the signal will b e continuous. 6 Park ing distance sensors 3 – see page 202. SPORT mode 3 To activ ate Press the SPORT button. The LED in the button illuminates. SPORT mode is used to cha ng e damping 3 , steering 3, throttle application and the shifting tim es and shifting p oints for Easytronic 3 and automatic tra nsmission 3 whilst driving. Tyre pressure monitoring system 3 The tyre p ressure monitoring system continuously monitors the pressure of all four tyres while the vehicle is being driven. A pressure sensor is insta lled in ea ch wheel. The tyre p ressures of the indiv idua l tyres are transmitted to a controller, where they are compared. Damping and steering 3 b ecome more direct and provide better contac t with the road surface. The engine reacts more quic kly to ac celera tor m ovem ents. The current tyre pressures ca n be displayed on the Gra phic al Inform ation Display or the Colour Inform ation Display 3. With automatic transmission 3, the shift tim es are reduced and g ear changes occur at higher eng ine speeds (not w hen cruise control 3 is a ctive). Deviating tyre pressures are displayed in the form of messages on the information display whilst driving. 6 SPO RT mode 3 – see page 198. 6 Tyre pressure monitoring system 3 – see page 204. 24 In brief z To close: – Hold down the r button on the rem ote control until the tailgate is closed. - or – When the key is inserted in the starter switch and the handbrake is applied , hold down the x button in the driver’ s door until the ta ilg ate is shut. - or – Press the F button in the tailgate. Electrically operated tailgate, Estate 3 z To op en: – Hold down remote control button r (see page 35, Fig. 17548 J) for a pprox. 1 second. - or – When the k ey is inserted in the starter switch and the handbrak e is app lied, hold down the x button in the driver’s door for approx. 1 second . - or – Unlock the tailgate and open by pulling the ca tch beneath the handle. 6 Electrically operated tailgate 3 – see p age 35. Towing equipment with pivoting cou pling ball bar 3 The relea se lev er is in the left stowag e compa rtm ent in the lugga ge compa rtm ent. O pen cover. z Pull release lever downwards. – The LED on the lev er is illuminated w hile the coupling b all bar is not engaged. – In ad dition, a warning buzzer sounds and the coupling ball bar pivots downwards. z Piv ot the coupling ball b ar backw ards until it engages. – LED m ust extinguish, – Warning buzzer must cease, – O therwise, repea t the procedure. 6 Tow ing equipment with pivoting coupling ball b ar 3 – see page 222. In brief Diesel particle filter 3 The d iesel pa rticle filter system removes polluting soot particles out of the engine exhaust ga ses. The system includes a self-cleaning function that op erates automatically whilst driving. The filter is cleaned by burning the trapped soot particles at a high temperature. There ma y be an increase in fuel consumption, exhaust smell, and engine cooling fan opera tion 3 during the self-clea ning opera tion. The self-cleaning function cannot operate automatically during c ertain driving situations where the engine does not reach its norma l operating tempera ture. An ex ample of this would b e driv ing only short distances in cold weather. If the filter needs cleaning and rec ent driving situa tions did not allow the function to autom atically operate, then control indica tor ! will flash. If this occurs, then you may continue to drive the vehicle normally . The vehicle will not be damaged and does not req uire service. The self-cleaning function will autom atic ally operate whilst driving after the engine has reached its norma l op erating temperature. Control indica tor ! will continue to flash until the self-c leaning operation is complete. This may ta ke up to 20 minutes of driving. The time will be shorter at higher vehicle speeds. 6 Diesel particle filter 3 – see page 194. 25 26 Keys, doors, windows, sunroof Keys, doors, windows, sunroof Replacem ent keys ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Loc k cylinders . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Ca r Pass 3 ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Key with foldaw ay key section 3 . ..... . Electronic immobiliser... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Store and activate personal vehicle settings using the remote control ... . Remote control .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Central locking system . .... ..... .... .... ..... . Fault when locking or unlocking... ..... . Lug gage compartment .... ..... .... .... ..... . Vauxhall alarm system 3. ..... .... .... ..... . Child safety locks . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Universal remote c ontrol in mirror housing 3.. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Ex terior mirrors..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Interior mirror .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Electric windows 3 ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Wind ow s in rear doors . .... ..... .... .... ..... . Sunroof 3 .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Electrically operated rear window blind 3 .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Sunblinds for rear door windows 3 ... . 26 26 26 26 27 28 28 30 33 34 38 41 41 43 44 45 47 47 49 49 Replacement keys The key number is specified in the vehic le docum ents and in the C ar Pass 3. The key is a c onstituent of the electronic immobiliser. Ordering keys from a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer g uarantees problem free op eration of the electronic immobiliser. Keep the sp are k ey in a safe plac e. Locks - see pa ge 266. Loc k cylinders Designed to free-wheel if they are forcefully rotated without the correct k ey or if the correct key is not fully inserted. To reset, turn cy linder with the c orrect key until its slot is vertica l, remove key and then re-insert it. If the cylinder still free-wheels, turn the key through 180° and rep eat op eration. Car Pass 3 The Ca r Pass contains a ll of the vehicle’s data and should therefore not be k ept in the vehicle. Have your Ca r Pa ss to hand when consulting a Vaux hall Authorised Repairer. Key with foldaway key section 3 Press button to extend. Press button to retrac t and audibly engage key sec tion. Keys, doors, windows, sunroof 27 If c ontrol indicator A illuminates a fter the engine is started, there is a fault in the engine elec tronics or transmission electronics 3 (see pages 101, 174, 182, 192) or there is water in the diesel fuel filter 3 (see page 274). Not e The immobiliser does not lock the doors. Therefore, after leaving the v ehicle a lways lock it and switch on the Vaux hall alarm system 3 – see p ages 30, 38. Electronic immo biliser The sy stem checks whether the vehicle m ay be sta rted using the key that has been inserted. If the k ey is recognised as "authorised" the vehicle can be started. The c heck is carried out via a transponder in the k ey. The electronic imm ob iliser activates automatically when the k ey is removed from the starter switch. The c od e number of the electronic immobiliser is giv en in the C ar Pass. Control i nd icator for imm obiliser Control indica tor A illuminates briefly when the ig nition is sw itched on. If the control indicator flashes w hen the ignition is on, there is a fault in the sy stem; the engine cannot be started. S witc h off the ignition and then rep eat the start attempt. If the control indicator A continues to flash, try to start the engine using the spare key and conta ct a workshop for assistance. 28 Keys, doors, windows, sunroof The remote control has a range of approx . 5 metres. This rang e ca n be a ffected by outside influences. Aim the rem ote control at the vehicle to operate. Store and activate person al vehicle settings using th e remote control The last settings selec ted for: z Instrument illumination, Handle the remote control with care, protec t it from moisture and high temperatures a nd avoid unnecessary operation. z Central locking, z Memory function 3 for driver’s seat and mirror, The ha zard warning lights illuminate to indicate that the remote c ontrol is operational. z Elec tronic C limate Control 3 are automatically stored depending on the vehic le key used . Different settings are stored for each rem ote control. Use of a remote control will activate the settings associa ted with it. The settings for five remote controls can be stored. C entra l lock ing system, see page 30. Remote co ntro l The remote control is integrated in the key. Used to operate: z C entral locking system, z Mechanic al anti-theft locking system 3 , z Vauxhall alarm system 3, z Electrically operated tailgate, Estate 3. In a ddition, electric windows 3 and electric sunroof 3 can be closed using the remote control. Mechanic al anti -theft locki ng system 3 , see page 30. Boot l id or ta ilgat e, see page 34. Vauxhall ala rm system 3, see page 38. Electric w indows 3 , see page 45. Electrica lly op era ted sunr oof 3, see page 47. Keys, doors, windows, sunroof Fault If the central locking system cannot be opera ted with the remote control, it m ay b e due to the following : Mak e sure that you dispose of old batteries in accordance with env ironmental protec tion regulations. Remot e cont rol synchronisati on After a battery change, unlock door with key in lock - see page 33. Inserting the key into the lock sy nc hronises the remote control. z The range of the rem ote control has been ex ceeded. z Remote control b attery v olta ge is too low. Battery replac ement - see next column. z Freq uent, rep eated opera tion of the remote control outside the reception ra nge of the vehicle (e.g. too far from vehicle, rem ote control is then no longer recognised). Remote control synchronisation – see end column. z If the centra l loc king sy stem is ov erloaded as a result of repeated op eration at short interv als. The power supply is c ut off for a b rief period. z Interference from higher-power radio waves from other sources. To elim inate the cause of a fault, we recom mend contacting a workshop for assistance. Manual unlocking and locking using the vehic le key - see page 33. 29 Rem ote control b attery rep lacement Replace the battery as soon as the range of the rem ote control becom es reduced. Extending the key – see page 26. Open the remote c ontrol. Replace the battery (b attery ty pe – see page 307), noting insta lla tion position. Close the remote control. 30 Keys, doors, windows, sunroof Cen tral locking system For doors, b oot lid/tailgate and tank flap. To unlock Press button q on rem ote control. To lock Press button p on remote control. Mechanic al anti -theft locki ng system 3 9 Warnin g Do not use the system if there are people in the vehicle. The doors cannot b e unlocked from inside. All doors must be c losed . Press button p on rem ote control again no more tha n 15 seconds after locking. Lock buttons on all doors are positioned such tha t doors ca nnot be opened. If the ignition wa s on, the driver’s door must be opened and closed once so that the vehicle can be secured . Keys, doors, windows, sunroof Program ming unloc king m ode 3 When the vehicle is delivered from the factory, the remote c ontrol is preset so that a single press of the q button op ens all of the d oors and the luggage compartment. The unit c an be config ured so that a single press of the q button unlocks the entire vehic le or just the driver’s door. Change to presetting: Hold b utton q on the remote control and button m in the driv er’s door depressed simulta neously until a double buzzer sounds. Afterwa rd s, only the driver’s door will be unlocked when b utton q is pressed once. The entire vehicle is then unlocked by pressing button q on the remote control twice. To restore the origina l settings, hold button q on the remote control and button m in the driv er’s door depressed simulta neously until a buz zer sound s. The current setting is stored for the remote control - see page 28. 31 Autom atic locking 3 The central locking ca n be set to lock automatically at a certain sp eed. To activate the function, hold button p on the remote control and button m in the driver’s door dep ressed simultaneously until a double buzzer sounds. Central l oc king sw itch for loc king a nd unl ocking the d oors from inside the vehicle Press button m in the driver’ s door: Doors and luggag e comp artment are lock ed. Press button ) in the driver’ s d oor: Doors and luggag e comp artment are unlocked. In the Estate with electrically operated tailg ate 3, the doors and lugga ge compartment are locked and unlocked with button m. When the mechanical anti-theft locking sy stem is active 3 (see p age 30), the doors cannot b e unlocked with this b utton. If the v ehicle is locked using the remote control, b uttons m and ) in the driv er’s door are inopera ble. The doors and lugga ge c om partment a re unlocked by switching off the ignition or by pressing button ) or, for Estate with electrically op erated tailgate 3, b y pressing button m in the driv er’s door. Individ ual doors can b e unlocked by pulling the lock button. To deactivate the function, hold button p on the remote control and button m in the driver’s door dep ressed simultaneously until a buzzer sounds. The current setting is stored for the rem ote control - see page 28. 32 Keys, doors, windows, sunroof The electric windows 3 can be closed from outside: hold d own button p on the remote control until all windows are closed. Note z If the driv er’s door is not closed properly , the central lock ing sy stem will unlock again immediately after locking. The sunroof 3 can be c losed from outside: hold down button p on the remote control until the roof is fully closed. z 30 seconds after unlocking using the remote control, the doors automa tic ally lock again 3 if neither a door nor the lugga ge c om partment has been op ened. Vehicle with electrically retrac ta ble exterior mirrors 3: When closing the windows using the remote control, the ex terior mirrors will also be retracted. The mirrors w ill be folded bac k out when the vehicle is unlocked using the remote control. z To lock the doors from within (e.g. to prevent undesired acc ess from outside), press the central lock ing button m. z If they are locked, the doors and the lugga ge c om partment unlock automa tic ally in the event of an a ccident of a certain sev erity (to permit outside assistance). Prerequisite: Ignition must not be switched off. Closing the wi ndows 3 a nd sunroof 3 from outside using the remote contr ol 9 Warning Take care when operating the electric windows 3 a nd the sunroof 3. Risk of injury , particularly to c hildren. Vehicle passeng ers must be informed accordingly. K eep a close watch on the windows and sunroof when c losing them. Ensure that nothing becomes trapped in them a s they move. If the mirrors a re retracted using the button in the driver’s door, they remain in this position w hen the doors are unlocked. Keys, doors, windows, sunroof Autom atic closing 3 If the mec hanical anti-theft lock ing system 3 is activated , the elec tric windows 3 and sunroof 3 are automatically closed and the electric ally retractab le exterior m irrors 3 are automatically retracted as soon as the rain sensor 3 detects water on the windscreen. Ma lfunction in centra l locki ng system To unlock: Insert key into driver’s door lock and turn towards front of v ehicle a s far as it will go. Turn key back to a v ertical position a nd remove. The other d oors can b e unlocked by pulling the interior lock b utton (unless the mechanical anti-theft locking sy stem 3 has been ena bled). The luggage compa rtm ent and the tank flap remain locked . To safeguard the battery from discha rge by the rain sensor 3, after four hours the electric windows 3 a nd sunroof 3 are automatically closed and the electric ally retractab le exterior m irrors 3 a re automatically retracted . For further information on electric windows 3 and the sunroof 3 – see pages 47, 49. Fault If the central locking system cannot be opera ted with the remote control, it m ay b e due to the following : z The c entral lock ing system is ov erloaded as a result of repeated operation a t short intervals. The power sup ply is cut off for a brief p eriod. z Defective fuse in fusebox – see pa ge 246. Seek the assistanc e of a workshop to rectify the ca use of the fa ult. To open the driver’s door with the k ey - see the following section. 33 Fault when lockin g or unlocking Rem ote control fa ul t To unlock: Insert key into lock in driver’s door and turn tow ards front of vehicle as far as it will go. Turn key b ack to v ertical position a nd remove from lock. Unloc k d riv er’s d oor with central locking switch - see page 31. The mechanical anti-theft lock ing sy stem 3 is d eactivated when the key is inserted in the starter switch. To lock : Open front p assenger’s door, close driver’s door, lock vehicle using central locking switch (see page 31), close front passenger’s door. To lock: Lock front pa ssenger’s door and rear doors by pressing the interior lock b utton. Lock driver’s door with key in lock. Turn key towards rea r of vehicle as far as it will go, turn key to a vertical position and remove. The unlocked tank flap and the lugga ge compa rtm ent cannot be locked . 34 Keys, doors, windows, sunroof Luggage compartment To unlock Press button q on rem ote control. To op en The luggage compartment of the S aloon / Hatch is opened by pressing the button, and the luggag e com partment of the Estate is opened by pulling the ca tc h beneath the handle. Illum ination of control ind icator s indica tes that the b oot lid/tailgate is open. For notes on open boot lid /tailgate see p age 37. Elec trica lly operated tailgate, Estate 3 – see next pag e. To close There is a handle on the inside of the boot lid/tailgate for closing the luggag e compa rtm ent. With the Estate, do not operate the catch beneath the ha ndle when closing, otherwise the luggage compartment will be unloc ked again. Keys, doors, windows, sunroof 35 Electri cally operated t ailgat e, Estat e 3 In Estate vehicles w ith a n elec trica lly op erated tailgate, the tailga te can b e electrica lly opened and c losed after unlocking. 9 Warning Mak e sure there is more tha n 2 m etres clearance b efore operating the electric tailgate. O bserve the pivoting z one of the tailgate during operation and d o not enter the p iv oting zone. To lock Press button p on the remote control – or – Press central locking b utton m in d riv er’s door when the doors are closed. To op en: Unlock the vehic le by pressing button q on the rem ote control; the tailga te is opened electrica lly by pulling the catch beneath the handle. – or – Briefly press button r on the remote control to unlock the tailgate (the doors remain locked .) The tailga te is opened electrically by pulling the catch beneath the ha ndle. – or – Hold down button r on the rem ote control for more tha n 1 second (the doors remain locked); the tailgate is unlocked and opens electrically – or – 6 36 Keys, doors, windows, sunroof With the key in the starter sw itc h and the handbrake applied, hold button x in the d riv er’s door depressed for app rox . 1 second; the tailgate opens electrically. To close: Hold d ow n button r on the remote control until the tailgate is closed. – or – Hold down button x in the driver’s door when the k ey is inserted in the starter switch until the tailga te is closed. – or – Press button F in the tailgate; the tailgate closes electrically. To lock, press button p on the remote control. Tailgate opening and closing is indicated by the rea r turn sig na l lig hts flashing three times. If the luggage compartment is not closed within 20 minutes of opening, the button in the tailgate is deactivated. Keys, doors, windows, sunroof Interruption of tailgate op ening/closing proced ure The opening or closing p rocess is immediately interrupted by: briefly pressing button x in the driver’ s door, – or – button r on the remote control, – or – the external button beneath the hand le, – or – button F in the ta ilg ate. Safety function The tailgate has an obstruction detection fa cility . If the tailgate encounters resistance during the automatic closing movem ent, the closing procedure is stopped imm ediately and the tailgate is slowly op ened again. The tailga te remains in this position for 10 second s a nd then slowly reopens. Fault in electrically op erated tailgate If the electronic drive should fail, the tailg ate c an be op ened and closed manually, although more force is required to close the tailgate. Vehicles with towing equipment 3: When tow ing a carava n/trailer, the tailg ate c annot be opera ted using button r on the rem ote control or button x in the driver’ s d oor. Opening the tailgate when the doors a re lock ed via the central locking system If the doors are loc ked via the central lock ing system, the tailgate can be op ened by pressing button r on the rem ote control and pulling the catch beneath the handle. 37 O pen boot lid , open tail gate 9 Warnin g Do not drive with the boot lid or tailgate open or ajar, e.g . when transporting bulky objects, since toxic exhaust gas could penetra te the interior. Also, the num ber p late of the Estate cannot be clearly read unless the lug gage compartment is closed. Fitting accessories to the boot lid/tailgate will increase its weight. If it becom es too hea vy, the boot lid/tailgate w ill then not stay open. 38 Keys, doors, windows, sunroof Vauxhall alarm system 3 Monitors: z Doors, luggage compa rtm ent, bonnet, z Passenger compartment, z Vehicle tilt, e.g. if it is raised, z Ignition. To activ ate All doors, w indows, the sunroof 3 and the bonnet must b e closed. Press button p on the rem ote control. Act ivat ion without monitoring of pa ssenger comp artment a nd vehicle ti lt Activate e.g. when animals are left in the vehicle. If the ignition wa s switched on, the driver’s door m ust be opened and closed ag ain so that the anti-theft alarm system can be activated again. 1. Close boot lid/tailgate and bonnet. 2. Press b utton Ä; LED in button flashes (maximum of 10 seconds). 3. Close doors. 4. Switch on anti-theft alarm system . LED illuminates. After a pprox. 10 seconds, the sy stem is activated without monitoring of the passenger compartment or vehicle tilt. LED fla shes until system is switched off. Keys, doors, windows, sunroof 39 After the first 10 seconds of anti-theft alarm system activation: z LED flashes = slow ly z LED illuminates = for approx. 1 second System switched on. Switch-off function. If a system fa ult occ urs, contact a work shop for assistance. Light emit ting d iode (LED) During the first 10 seconds of anti-theft alarm system activation: z LED illuminates z LED flashes quick ly = Test, switch-on d elay. = Door, luggag e com partment or bonnet op en, or system fault. To deact ivat e Press button q on the remote control – or – turn on the ignition. If there is a fault in the remote control, unlock vehicle as describ ed on p age 33. If the alarm is triggered w hen the driv er’s door is opened, d eactivate the anti-theft alarm sy stem by sw itc hing on the ignition. 40 Keys, doors, windows, sunroof 3. After the luggage compartment is closed, monitoring of the passeng er compa rtm ent, luggage comp artm ent and v ehicle tilt is reactivated after a 5 minute d elay and the tailga te is locked. To override the delay, p ress button p on the rem ote control. Note z C hanges to the vehicle interior, such as the use of ex tra seat covers, could imp air the function of passeng er comp artm ent monitoring. Est ate with electri cally operated tai lgate 3 : To open and close the lugga ge compartment when the anti-theft alarm system is active: 1. Briefly press button r on the remote control – lugg age compartment is unlocked (see page 34), and monitoring of the passenger c om partment and vehicle tilt is d isabled. 2. Open lug gage compartment – see pa ge 34. z Disable passenger compartm ent monitoring if the vehicle interior is being hea ted. Alarm An alarm can be triggered w hilst the a ntitheft alarm system is active, indicated by: z an acoustic sig nal (horn) and z a v isual signal (hazard w arning lights). The number of alarms and the d uration thereof are stipulated by law. The alarm can be silenc ed b y pressing a button on the remote control or by switching on the ig nition. The anti-theft alarm system is d eactivated at the same tim e. Ala rm siren wit h integrated b attery 3 The alarm siren monitors the on-board voltage network and triggers an ala rm if this network is manipulated (e.g . if the vehicle’s ba ttery is disconnected by unauthorised persons). The alarm siren ha s its own power supply and is therefore not dependent on the vehicle’s battery. If the vehicle’s battery is to be disconnected (e.g. for maintenance w ork ), the alarm siren must be dea ctivated as follows: sw itch the ignition on then off, disconnect the vehicle’s battery within 15 seconds. To swit ch off alarm siren: S witc h ignition on then off. Keys, doors, windows, sunroof 41 The p rogram med universal remote control can replace the individual remote control units of the sy stems to be operated . Three buttons on the und ersid e of the mirror housing ca n be used to operate various systems. C onsult y our Vauxhall Authorised Rep airer for details on comp atible system s. 9 Warnin g Child safety lo cks 9 Warning Use the child safety locks whenever children are oc cup ying the rear seats. Disreg ard may lead to injuries or endanger life. Vehicle passengers must be informed accordingly. Turn rotary knob nea r rear door lock from the v ertical position using key; door cannot be opened from inside. Universal remote co ntro l in mirror housing 3 To op erate up to 3 different remotely op erated systems (e.g . garage door, domestic alarm sy stem, dom estic ex terior lig hting). Ensure that no persons, animals or objects are in the movement zone of the sy stem to be opera ted (e.g. a garage door). Vehicle pa ssengers m ust be informed of the haz ards. Basic program ming of t he univ er sa l remot e cont rol system 1. Switch on ignition. 2. When programming for the first time, press both outer buttons on the m irror housing , until the control ind ic ator along side the b uttons fla shes rapidly (after approx. 20 seconds). 3. Hold the ma nual remote control unit at a distance of 0 to 30 c m from the control button area of the mirror housing. 42 Keys, doors, windows, sunroof 4. Press the button on the manual remote control unit while pressing and holding the desired button of the univ ersal remote control. Prog ramm ing the universal remot e control system for vari able code systems 1. Perform b asic prog ra mming – see prev ious pag e. 5. The control indica tor in the mirror housing will flash slowly at first. As soon as it flashes rapidly , release b oth buttons. The universal remote control system is now programmed for the chosen system . 2. Activate synchronisation m ode of system (see system manufac turer’s opera ting manual) and briefly press the pre-prog ra mmed button on the universal remote control three times within 30 sec onds. 6. To prog ra mme other buttons with other system s, repeat steps 3 to 5. 3. The universal remote control system is now programm ed for v ariable c od e systems. To program me other sy stems for variable codes, repeat steps 1 and 2 for the other buttons on the universal rem ote control. Button setting s ca n only be erased all at once. It is not possible to erase ind iv idual button setting s. Buttons can, however, be individually reprogrammed - see "Reprogramming indiv idua l button settings". Usi ng t he universal remote control system With the ignition on, press the required universal remote control b utton and the control indicator in the mirror housing will illuminate. The pre-programm ed system can now be operated using the universal remote control system . In order to erase the programm ing of all 3 buttons, press both outer buttons and release a s soon as the LED begins to flash (after approx. 20 seconds). All button settings have now been clea red and can be programm ed a new at any time. If a sy stem cannot be operated after rep eated programming, and the control indicator flashes ra pidly for a short time after the relevant button has been pressed and then illuminates for 2 seconds, the receiver may be equipped with a variable code sy stem - see next column. Reprog ramm ing indiv idual button settings If a button that has already b een programm ed is to b e used for a different system, repeat steps 3 to 5 of the ba sic programm ing procedure described previously. C lea ring all progra mmed but ton sett ings Before selling the vehicle, it is a good id ea to erase button setting s. Keys, doors, windows, sunroof 43 Note Keep replac ed m anual tra nsmitters for possible reprogram ming. The manua l transm itters can also continue to be used. If, after repeated a ttempts at execution of the a bove steps, a system cannot b e actuated with the universal remote control, seek the assistance of a workshop. During programming, the vehicle should be within the range of the receiver. Under no circumstanc es should the vehicle be in the movement zone of a system (e.g . garage door). Do not programme a system without an automatic safety stop (m anufactured before April 1982). Take note of the sy stem manufacturer’s safety instruc tions for drives and manual rem ote control units. Exterior mirrors Adjusting exterior mir rors 3 Ad justment using the four-way switch in the driver’s door: If the outer mirror sw itch (1) is p ressed, the four-way switch opera tes the driver’s and front passenger’s mirrors 3. If the inner mirror switch (2) is pressed, it only operates the front passenger’s mirror. The glass of the mirror is adjusted in the relev ant direction in accordance with the op eration of the four-way switch. Elec trica l seat adjustment with Memory function 3: If the inner m irror switch (2) is pressed, the front passenger-side ex terior mirror is pointed automatically at the rear tyres after rev erse g ear is eng aged, in order to assist parking (not if tow ing a carav an/ tra iler) 3. Sw inging i n exterior mi rror Manually: The exterior mirrors can be folded in by gently pressing the outer edge of the housing. Electrically 3 (both mirror sw itches must not be latched into position): Push four-way switch to the right: outside rear view mirrors swivel in. Push four-way switch to the left: outside rear view mirrors swivel out. Return the mirrors to the driving position before starting-off. The mirrors can b e retra cted from the outside: Press button p on the remote control approx. 1 second . The m irrors will be extended the next time the vehicle is unlocked. S wivelling only a llowed at speeds of up to 4 mph (7 km /h). 44 Keys, doors, windows, sunroof Automat ic anti- dazzle ext eri or mirror 3 on the d river’s side Dazzle from following v ehicles at night is autom atic ally reduc ed. The mirror does not reduc e da zzle when: z the ig nition is sw itc hed off, z rev erse gear is eng aged or selector lever set to R, z the interior lights are on, z a d oor is open. For the safety of pedestrians, the exterior mirrors will swing out of their normal mounting p osition if they are bumped with sufficient force. Reposition the m irror by apply ing slight pressure to the mirror housing. Aspherical exterior mi rror 3 The asp herical m irror g lass m akes the blind angle smaller. The curva ture mak es objects look smaller, making it more difficult to estimate how far away follow ing vehicles are. Interio r mirror To adjust, swivel mirror housing . S wivel lever on underside of m irror housing to reduce dazzle from following v ehicles at night. Keys, doors, windows, sunroof 45 Electric win dows 3 9 Warning Take care when operating the electric windows. Risk of injury , especially for children. Vehic le occupants should be inform ed according ly . If there are children on the rear seat, switch on the child safety sy stem 3 for the elec tric wind ow s. Autom atic a nti-dazzle interior mir ror 3 Dazzle from following vehicles at night is automatically reduced . The sensor is located at the bottom of the housing. In the c ase of vehic les with a p osition memory for electrically opera ted front seats 3 or a universal remote control 3, the sensor is located at the top right of the m irror g la ss. The m irror d oes not reduce dazzle when: z the ignition is switched off, z reverse gear is engaged or selector lever set to R, z the interior lights a re on, z a door is open. K eep a close watch on the windows when closing them. Ensure that nothing becomes trapped in them as they move. The electric windows can be used: z with ignition on, z within 10 m inutes of switching ignition off, z within 10 m inutes of opening or closing the driver’s door, z within 10 m inutes of inserting or rem oving the ignition key. Readiness for operation stops when the vehicle is lock ed. O peration via 2 rock er buttons in the driver’s door. Additional rocker buttons in the front passenger’ s d oor a nd the rear doors 3. To operate window in stages, tap switch. For autom atic opening or closing, keep switch pressed for slightly longer; to stop window m ovement, tap switch ag ain. 46 Keys, doors, windows, sunroof Vehicles with rea r electric wind ow s 3 have a slide switch b etween the buttons in the driver’s door z Up: The front w indows ca n be operated using the b uttons. z Down: The rear wind ows can be operated using the buttons. Safety function If the window glass encounters resistance above the middle of the window during automatic closing , it is immediately stop ped and the window op ened again. If the windows do not move easily (e.g. on account of frost), keep pressing the switc h for the window in question until the window has been closed in stages. Child sa fety system for r ear window s 3 Switch z in the driver’s door z Press (switch z illuminates in red): rear windows cannot be operated using the buttons in the rear d oors, z press again (switch z no longer illuminates in red ): rear w indows ca n be opera ted using the buttons in the rea r doors. C losi ng window s from outside using the remot e cont rol 3 The wind ow s c an be closed from outside using the rem ote control: Depress the p button until the wind ow s are closed. Keys, doors, windows, sunroof Autom atic c losi ng 3 See page 33. Su nro of 3 9 Warnin g O verload If the wind ow s are rep eatedly operated at short interv als, the power supp ly is briefly cut off. Caution when opera ting the sunroof. Risk of injury, particula rly to children. Vehicle passeng ers must be informed accordingly. The system is protected by fuses in the fusebox – see page 246. Keep a close watch on the sliding roof when closing it. Ensure that nothing becom es trapped as it moves. Fault If the windows cannot be opened a nd closed automatically , activate the w indow electronic s as follows: 1. Close doors. 2. Switch on ignition. 3. Window com pletely open. 47 The electric sunroof can be operated Windo ws in rear doors Turn crank 3 towards the front or rear. z with ignition on, z within 10 minutes of sw itc hing ignition off, 4. Close window and press on button for at least 3 seconds. z within 10 minutes of opening or closing the driver’s door, 5. Repeat for eac h wind ow . z within 10 minutes of inserting or removing the ignition k ey. Readiness for operation stops when the vehicle is locked. 48 Keys, doors, windows, sunroof To raise Turn the rotary switc h to any position between d and e. The sunroof w ill autom atic ally m ov e to the d esired position. When the rotary switch is in position e, the sunroof is fully raised. To lower Turn rotary switch to d. Posit ion memory After the ignition has been switched on, the sunroof c an be autom atic ally returned to its last position b y briefly pressing the rotary sw itc h. O perated using rotary switch in the overhead control panel. To open Turn the rotary switch to any position between d a nd ü. The sunroof will automatically move to the desired position. When the switch is in position ü , the sunroof is fully opened . Com fort positi on Set rotary switch to position f. With the roof in this position, w ind noise is reduc ed. To close: Turn rotary sw itc h to d. Safety func tion If the sunroof encounters resistance during autom atic closing, it is im med ia tely stopped and opened again, as long as the vehicle is stationary. 9 Warning If when the vehicle is being driven the sunroof encounters resistance during automatic closing, because of the higher closing forces inv olv ed the protectiv e func tion ca nnot be guaranteed, a nd there is a risk of injury. If the sunroof mov ement is stiff, e.g. due to frost, turn rota ry switch to d a nd keep it pressed until the sunroof is closed. C losi ng sunr oof from outside To close the sunroof from outside with the remote control: Press button p until the sunroof is closed. If the electric windows 3 are to be closed from outside the vehicle, but the sunroof is to be left op en, briefly press the rotary switch before sw itc hing off the ignition. Autom atic closing 3 S ee page 33. Keys, doors, windows, sunroof 49 Sunshade To red uce the sunlight in the interior with the sliding roof closed or raised. O pen or close sunshade as req uired. When the sunroof is opened, the sunshade is also op ened. O verload If the sy stem is overloaded, the power sup ply is automatically c ut off for a short time. Fault If the sunroof no longer assumes the desired position automatically , programme sunroof electronics as follow s: 1. Switch on ignition. 2. Press the rotary switch until the sunroof is shut, then k eep it pressed for a t least a further 3 seconds. 3. Turn rotary switch to ü and keep it depressed until the sunroof is open. 4. Turn rotary switch to d and keep it depressed until the sunroof is c losed . 5. Turn rotary switch to e and leave there until the sunroof is fully raised. 6. Turn rotary switch to d and keep it depressed until the sunroof is c losed . Electrically operated rear window blind 3 Su nblinds for rear door windows 3 Reduces intensity of sunlig ht shining on to rear seats. O peration w ith ignition switched on. Pull the blind upw ards using the grip and eng age it at the top in the door frame. To ra ise To low er = = Press N Press N again Do not operate blind if there are objects lying in front of the rear w indow. To reduc e sunlight a t the rear seats. 50 Seats, interior Seats, interior Manually a djustable front sea ts .. ..... . Electrically a djustable front sea ts 3 . . Head restraints .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Armrest 3 between the front sea ts... . Rear seat armrest .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Travel Assistant 3 ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Lug gage compartment extension .... . Lug gage compartment cover 3... ..... . Safety net 3, Esta te. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Lashing eyes ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Reversible carpet 3 . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . FlexO rganizer 3... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Notes on loading the vehic le .... .... ..... . Three-stage safety sy stem.... .... .... ..... . Three-point seat belts .. .... ..... .... .... ..... . Belt tensioners. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Using the seat belts. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Child restraint systems 3 . ..... .... .... ..... . Airbag system . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Ciga rette lig hter 3 ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Accessory sockets 3 ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Ashtray .... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Stowage comp artm ents... ..... .... .... ..... . Drink holders ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Sunvisors.. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 50 52 55 57 57 58 65 66 67 69 69 69 71 72 72 73 76 77 80 93 93 94 95 97 97 Manually adjustable front seats 9 Warning Never adjust seats during driving, as they can m ov e uncontrollab ly . Imp ortant: Do not sit nea rer than 10 inches (25 cm) from the steering wheel, to perm it safe airba g deploy ment. Adjust seat longi tudinally To adjust seat position, pull handle a t front of seat, move seat and then release ha ndle. Ad just ing the bac krest To adjust, turn sid e handwheel on the seat while releasing the load on the b ackrest. Move bac krest to suit sea ting position. Seats, interior Adj usti ng the seat hei ght 3 To adjust height of sea t, op erate rear lever on outb oa rd sid e of seat. Pump action of lever Upwards: S eat higher Downwards: S eat lower To adjust seat incl ine 3 Pump action of lever Upwards: Seat steeper Dow nwa rd s: Seat flatter 51 Ad just ing the lumb ar support 3 To adjust, activa te the lever on the bac krest, relieving pressure on the backrest as you d o so. Adjust lum bar sup port to suit personal requirements. 52 Seats, interior Electrically adju stable front seats 3 9 Warnin g Care must be ta ken when operating the electric ally adjustable seats. There is a risk of injury , partic ularly for children, and a danger that articles could become tra pped . Keep a close watch on the seats when adjusting them . To adj ust thigh support 3 on the sports sea ts 3 To adjust, press button in recessed grip located in the centre benea th the adjusting cushion and m ove the thigh support. Seat positi on Ad just driver’s seat such that with the driver sitting upright the steering wheel is held in the area of its upper spokes with the driver’s arm s slightly bent. Adjust thigh support to suit personal req uirements. Push front passenger’ s seat as fa r back as possible. The seat b ackrests must not be tilted too fa r back (recommend ed m aximum tilting angle ap prox . 25°). 9 Warning Failure to observe the descriptions could lead to injuries whic h could be fata l. Vehicle passeng ers must be informed accordingly before starting-off. Vehic le pa ssengers m ust be inform ed accordingly. Ad just ment The seat position can be a djusted by means of switches on the outb oa rd side of the seats. Adjusting the inclination Move switch 1 upwards/downwards at front. Seats, interior Height adjustment Move switch 1 upwards/downwards at rear Electri cally operated lumba r support 3 on driver’s seat Ad just lumbar support using four-way switch on outboard side of driver’s seat. Seat back rest adjustm ent Turn switch 2 forwards/bac kwards. Ad just lumbar support to suit p ersonal requirements. O perate switch until desired sea t position is rea ched. Seat position – see pa ge 52. Moving support up and down: press button up or down. After ad justing the seat, adjust height of seat b elt – see p age 76. Increasing and decreasing sup port: press button forwards or back wards. Adjusting the longitudinal position Move switch 1 forwards/backwards. Thi gh sup port 3 on driver’s seat See pag e 52. 53 Seat position Adjust driver’s sea t such that with the driver sitting upright the steering wheel is held in the area of its upper spokes with the driver’s arms slig htly bent. Push front passeng er’s seat as far bac k as possible. The seat back rests m ust not be tilted too far ba ck (recom mended max imum tilting angle approx. 25°). 9 Warnin g Failure to observe the descriptions could lead to injuries which could be fatal. Vehic le pa ssengers m ust be inform ed accordingly before starting-off. 54 Seats, interior Readiness for operation z With ignition on, z within 10 m inutes of switching ignition off, z within 10 m inutes of opening or closing the driver’s door, z within 10 m inutes of inserting or rem oving the ignition key. Readiness for operation stops when the vehicle is lock ed. Storing settings 1. Adjust seat. Memory function 3 for el ect ricall y adj ust able driv er’s seat and ext eri or mi rrors Three different seat a nd mirror settings can be stored (e. g. for three drivers). 2. To adjust ex terior mirror - see pages 6, 43. 3. Press m emory button M and the position button to be used (1, 2 or 3) simulta neously, and stora ge is ack nowledged by an acoustic signal. Retriev ing settings Keep position key 1, 2 or 3 pressed until the stored sea t and mirror positions have b een reached . For reasons of safety, seat adjustm ent stops immediately if the p osition button is relea sed or one of the setting buttons is op erated. Ad justments may only be performed with vehicle stationary. S tore and activ ate the setting s using the remote controls 3 When the vehicle is loc ked using the remote control the current driv er’s seat a nd exterior mirror positions are stored see page 28. The seat adjusting proc edure can be stopped immediately by operating a setting button. Front passenger-si de exterior m irror wit h m irror par king a ssistanc e 3 S ee page 43. O verload If the seat setting is electrically overloaded, the power supply is automatically cut off for a short time. The sy stem is protected by fuses in the fusebox – see page 246. Seats, interior Head restraints Adj usti ng the front sea t head restraint s and t he out board rear seat head restraints 3 To adjust height, press button on side a nd adjust height. In order to inc rease the size of the luggage compartment or if they are not being used , push rear head restraints d ow n as fa r as possible - see page 65. When the seats a re occupied, ad just the height ac cord ing to the body size of the occupant. To adjust the inc line, swivel the bottom edge of the head restraint forwards or backwards. 55 Ad just ing the rear head restraint s integra ted in the rear seat ba ckrest 3 To adjust head restra ints, pull forwards with both hands and slide up or down. To increa se the size of the luggage compa rtm ent or improve visibility, p ush hea d restraint down as far as possible if seat is unoccupied. If seat is oc cup ied, pull head restraint upwards. 56 Seats, interior Head restrai nt position The midd le of the head restraint should be at eye lev el. I f this is not possible for extremely tall persons, set to highest position, and set to lowest position for small persons. Activ e head restra ints 3 In the event of a rear-impa ct, the a ctive head restraints tilt slightly forwards. The head is more effectiv ely supported by the head restraint and the da nger of whiplash in the neck area is reduced . 9 Warning Ac tiv e hea d restra ints are identified by the lettering AC TIVE on the head restra int guid e sleeves. Disreg arding the instructions can lea d to injuries which could be fatal. Vehicle passengers must b e informed according ly before setting off. Remov ing the head restraint s Press and release the two catches. Pull and remove the hea d restraint. In order to increase the size of the luggage compa rtm ent or if they are not being used, push rear head restraints down as far as possible - see pag e 65. Not e O nly approved objects or com ponents should be attached to the head restraint of the unoccupied front passenger’s seat. Seats, interior Armrest 3 between the front seats The armrest can be pushed forwards. If the armrest is not req uired, push it back and fold it up. The armrest c ontains a stowage compartment: to open, slide a rm rest b ack, press button at front and lift. 57 Rear seat armrest The armrest can be folded down. If the rear centre seat is being used or the rear sea t ba ckrests are b eing folded down, fold armrest up wards. 58 Seats, interior Travel Assistant 3 The Trav el Assistant contains z z z z z z Arm rest Stowage compartments Waste container Drink holders Acc essory sockets. Connection console e.g. for DVD p la yer 3 z Elec tric cool box z Foldaway tables z Tw in Audio (rear audio module) 3 or stowage compartm ent. The Trav el Assistant is installed on a console above the c entre seat in the rear. Installing the Travel Assistant Swivel out retaining device on seat with strap. Insert the two rear retainers of the connecting console in the retaining device on the seat and engage. S wivel open and hold cover of front attachment points in floor in front of console. Seats, interior Swiv el connecting console downwards and enga ge in a ttac hm ent points. Swivel the locking lever downwards. Check the locking p osition of the Travel Assistant: The red mark (see Fig. 17566 J on next pa ge) must not be visib le. Otherwise, lock using the key – see page 63, Fig. 17575 J. Remove cap 3 from p lug at securing bracket. 59 To lock, insert Travel Assistant into rec esses in connecting console and slide ba ck as far as possible. 60 Seats, interior If it is correctly locked , the red m ark must no long er be visible in the window, otherwise the p rocedure must be rep eated. 9 Warning If it is not c orrectly locked, the Travel Assistant could be propelled forwards with considerab le force when hard braking occurs, risk of injury. Dr ink holder a nd accessory sock ets Open the drink holder by pressing the marking. Only a ccessories w ith maximum power consumption of 120 Watts m ust be connected to the accessory sockets. For notes – see page 93. St owage com partm ent s The lower stowage comp artment is opened by pressing the ma rk . The und ersid e of the compa rtm ent has an opening through which objects in the compartment can be raised. The up per stowage compartment is located under the armrest. To open, press the button and fold the armrest upwa rds. Seats, interior Connecting consol e for DVD pl ayer 3 When not in use, pull connecting console upwards, press button and slide downwards. Swivel up the display holder, slide DVD player display into brack et from below a nd fix in position with brack et. Maximum loa d: 1 kg. 61 Electric c ool box To open, fold open the armrest together with the stowage compa rtm ent. 62 Seats, interior Switch on the cool box as needed. Fold away tab les Fold arm rest upwards (1). S et required clearance b y adjusting longitudinal position of folda way table (4). Use recessed grip to p ull foldawa y table up wards as fa r as it will go (1), swivel foldaw ay table forwards (2) a nd fold downwards (3). S wivel a rm rest down. Seats, interior To fold away the tab le, swivel the armrest up. Push the table forwards as far as it w ill go (1). Fold the table upwards p ast the resistance point (2), swiv el it downwards and insert in the Travel Assista nt (3). Swivel armrest down. 63 Disma nt ling the Trav el Assista nt O pen catch using key , red mark appears in window. 64 Seats, interior Pull the Tra vel Assistant to the front on the connecting console and remove. Fit cap 3 to plug on securing bracket. Press the locking lev er down, press the button on the front of the connecting console a nd sw iv el the locking lev er up wards. S wivel the connecting console upwards and pull it from the retaining devic e on the seat. S wivel the retaining device back on the seat. Seats, interior Luggage co mpartment extension Fold dow n the cover behind the arm rest Fold down the a rm rest on to the seat cushion, pull the handle and tilt the cover forwards. The outer seats can continue to be used for passengers. 9 Warning The load must not obstruct operation of the pedals, handbrake and gearshift, or the freedom of movement of the driver. Do not leave unsecured objects in the interior. Note instruc tion on pag e 71. Enga ge the cover behind the centre armrest a udib ly in position. 65 Cover behind arm rest can be locked from lugg age com partment 3: turn hand le 90°: Folding d own the rear seat ba ckrests Push the rear head restraints right down. Locked Unlock ed Place the b elt buckles in storage pockets in the seat cushions. = = Ha ndle horizontal Ha ndle vertical S lid e front seat forwards slightly. Remove Travel Assistant 3 - see page 60. Unlock one or both rear sea t backrests by depressing p ushbuttons and fold down on to seat cushion. Return front seat to desired position. 66 Seats, interior Restoring ba ckrest to an up right posit ion Audibly engage the rear seat ba ckrests. There is a locking indicator on the release lev er. If the rear seat ba ckrests ha ve b een correctly locked the red indicator on the release levers must not be visib le. Fold ing down t he front passenger’s seat 3 Push head restra int on front passenger’s seat down as far as it will g o. Luggage com partment cover 3 Slide front passenger’ s seat backw ards. Pull cover from the side guides. Fold front passenger’s seat forwards by ra ising release lever. Fitting Eng age cover in side guides and fold down. Attach reta ining straps to tailgate. To restore, raise the release lever, restore the front seat back rest to an upright position and audibly engage. Notes on loading See pag e 71. 5-door Ha tch Removing Detach retaining stra ps from tailgate. Seats, interior Est ate To close Pull lug gage compartment cover toward s rea r of vehicle using handle and hook into side retainers. Do not place any heavy or sharp-edged objects on the cover. To open Remove luggag e compartment c ov er from side b ra ckets. I t rolls up automatically . Removing Open luggage compartment cover. Raise the release lever on the right of the lugg age compartment c ov er. Remove cover from the brackets by lifting first on the right, then on the left. Fitting Fit the lug gage compartment cover in the bracket on the left-hand side, fold up the relea se lever on the right-ha nd side, fit the lugg age compartment cover in the bracket on the right-hand side, engage and press the release lever closed. 67 Safety n et 3, Estate The safety net can be fitted behind the rear seats or, with the rear seat ba ckrests fold ed down, behind the front seats. Passengers must not be carried b ehind the safety net. Fitti ng behind the rear seats Remove the luggage com partment cover see left c olumn. Fit the ca ssette with rolled safety net into the side brack ets and enga ge b y twisting . 68 Seats, interior Ex tend the net from the cassette. The roof frame houses two installation op enings. Fit the net rod in the installation op ening on one side and then the other and engage by pushing forwards. Fit the luggage compa rtm ent cover. Removing Remove the lug gage compartment cover. Pull ea ch side hook from the cassette and attach it to an eye 3 in the vehicle floor. Detach the safety net rod from the brackets in the roof frame. Slide both latches inwards; push the cassette with rolled net back wards in the bracket, twist and rem ov e upw ards. Extend the net from the cassette. The roof frame houses tw o insta lla tion openings. Fit the net rod in the installation opening on one sid e and then the other and engag e by pushing forwards. Fit ting behind front seat s Fold b oth rear seat b ackrests. Place the rolled net on the floor behind the front seats in such a wa y that the c og rail in the slit on the net is to the rear. Undo the side hooks from the eyes 3 in the vehicle floor. Removing Detach the safety net rod from the brack ets in the roof frame. Seats, interior Lashing eyes In the luggage compartment, secure items being transported against slipping b y attaching lashing straps 3 or a luggage net 3. Reversible carpet 3 Fold ing floor covering with two different surfaces. When transporting objec ts in the luggage compartment, fold reversible carpet with appropriate surface on top. 69 FlexOrganizer The illustrations show some possible uses. The components are housed in a stow age compartment at the rear in the load floor see p age 96. Varia ble part ition wa ll S ee Fig. 17596 J . Press the rods of the partition w all together slightly and engage in the desired guid e rail opening s in the side walls. The rods can be eng aged in va rious positions. 3 Flexible sy stem for dividing the luggage compartment or securing load s in an Estate. The system c onsists of: z Variable partition net, z Variable partition wa ll, z Partition rod, z Mesh pock ets for the side walls, z Hooks. The components can be mounted in the two guide ra ils in the side walls of the lugg age compartment. Varia ble part ition net S ee Fig. 17597 J. Push rods of partition net together a little and insert into relev ant openings in side wall guide rails. The rods can b e engaged in various positions. The partition net ca n be installed horizontally or vertically at different heights. 70 Seats, interior Hooks and m esh pockets for the side walls See Fig. 17598 J . Enga ge the hook s in the openings of the guide rails in the sid e walls as indicated in the illustration and turn 90° . The m esh pockets ca n be hung from the hooks. Rem oving Press together the rods of the partition wall/net or the telescopic rods and rem ov e from the guide rails. Turn the hook s 90° and rem ov e. FlexOrga nizer stowa ge The Flex Organizer components are housed in a stowa ge c om partment a t the rear in the load floor. To open, raise the ha nd le and open the flap – see p age 96, Fig. 17611 J . To stow a way, pull partition rods, pa rtition net rods a nd sepa ra te telescopic rod apart in the middle and fold the tw o ha lv es together - see Fig. 17599 J . Roll up partition and p artition net and place in compa rtm ent with other com ponents. C lose lid. Seats, interior z Objects m ust not be stored in the a irb ag inflation area, because they could cause injury if the airbag inflates. Notes on loading the vehicle z Heav y objec ts in the lug gage com partment should be placed against the engaged rea r seat backrests or, if the rear seat backrests are folded down, against the front sea t backrests. If ob jects are to be stacked, the heav ier ob jects should be placed at the bottom. Unsec ured objec ts in the lug gage com partment would be thrown forwards with great force in the event of heavy braking, for example. z Secure objects with lashing straps 3 atta ched to lashing ey es – see p age 69. If heavy loads slip when the vehicle is braked heavily or driven around a bend, the hand ling of the v ehicle ma y change. z Saloon / H atch: loose objects in the lugga ge c om partment should be secured ag ainst slipping using a lugga ge net 3 – see page 69. z Estate: mount the sa fety net 3 when transporting objects in the luggag e com partment - see page 67. z Estate: Close luggage compartm ent cov er - see p age 67. z When transporting objects in the lugga ge c om partment the rear seats must be eng aged - see page 65. 71 z The load must not obstruct the operation of the pedals, the handbrak e or the gears or restrict the driver’s freedom of movement. Do not place loose objects in the interior. z Do not drive with lugga ge compa rtm ent open when tra nsporting bulky objects, for exam ple, since toxic exhaust fumes could penetra te the interior. z Do not a llow the load to protrude ab ov e the upp er edge of the rear seat back rests, or above the upper ed ge of the front seat b ackrests if the rear seat back rests a re folded down. z Weights, payload and roof loa d see page 293. z The warning triangle 3 and first-aid kit 3 must alway s b e freely a ccessib le. z Driv ing with a roof load see pages 184, 187, 218. A roof load increases the sensitivity of the vehicle to crosswinds and has a detrim ental effect on v ehicle ha nd ling ow ing to the vehicle’s hig her centre of gravity. z Do not place any objects in front of the rea r window or on the instrument pa nel. They are reflected in the glass, obstruct the driver’s view and will be thrown through the vehicle, for insta nce in the event of heavy b ra king. Failure to observe these descrip tions can lead to injuries which ma y be fatal. Vehic le pa ssengers m ust be inform ed accordingly. 9 Warnin g 72 Seats, interior Three-stage safety system Com prising: z Three-point seat belts. z Belt tensioners at the front seats. z Airbag sy stems for driver, front passenger and outboard rear seat occ upa nts 3 . The three stages are activated in sequence depending on the sev erity of the accident: z The automatic seat belt locking d evices prevent the belt strap from b eing pulled out and thus ensure that the vehicle occ upa nts are retained in their seats. z The front seat belts are pulled down at the belt buckles. This mea ns the b elts fit snugly, the occupants are d ecelerated early with the vehic le and the body load ing is reduced . z The airbag systems are also triggered in the event of serious a ccidents and form a safety cushion for the occupa nts. Depend ing on the severity of the accident, the front airbags inflate in two stages. 9 Warning The airb ag systems serve to supplement the three-point seat b elts and belt tensioners. The seat b elts must therefore alway s be w orn. Disreg ard of these instructions m ay lead to injuries or end ang er life. Vehicle p assengers must be inform ed a ccord ingly . Please read the instructions provided with the child restraint system. Three-point seat belts The vehicle is equipped with three-point seat belts with automatic retrac tors and locking d evices, allowing full freedom of body movement a lthough the spring tensioned seat belts alway s ensure a snug fit. For information on correct seating position – see pages 52, 77, 82. The seat belts lock during heavy acc eleration or deceleration. Seats, interior 9 Warning Alwa ys wea r your seat belt, and that means a lso in urban traffic a nd when you are a rear sea t passeng er. I t can save your life. Also, pregnant women must alwa ys wear a seat belt – see pa ge 76. In the event of an accident, persons not wearing seat belts endanger their fellow occupants and themselv es. Control indicator X for the seat belt – see page 101. Seat b elts are only intended for one person. They are not suitable for any one under 12 yea rs of age or under 150 cm tall. For children up to 12 yea rs of ag e, w e recom mend the Vaux hall child restraint system – see page 77. 73 Belt force limi ter s on the front seat belts reduce stresses on the body by releasing the seat belt gently during an impact. This allows the body to move slightly in a nticipation of the impact. Testing the seat b el ts Check all parts of the b elt sy stem from time to time for damage a nd to ensure function. Replace dam aged parts. Following an accident, have the seat belts and actuated belt tensioners repla ced by a work shop. Do not m ake alterations to the seat b elts, their anchora ges, their automa tic retractors and the belt buckles. Do not d amage the seat belt with sharp ob jects, and d o not g et it trapp ed. Belt tensioners The front seat belt systems are fitted with belt tensioners. The seat belts are pulled down and tensioned at the belt b uck les in the event of frontal and rear collisions, depending on the severity of the accident. This tensions the sea t belts. 74 Seats, interior Actua tion of belt t ensioners Actuation of belt tensioners is indicated by continuous illumination of control indicator v - see nex t colum n. 9 Warnin g Have the c ause of the fault elim inated immediately by a workshop. If the belt tensioners are triggered, they must be replaced by a workshop. The sy stem’s integrated self-diagnostics allows faults to b e q uick ly rem edied. Imp ortant information - see page 73. If c ontrol indicator v in the instrument cluster fails, for reasons of safety , the text AI rbAG app ears on the odometer display. Pressing the reset button will cause the text to disappear. It then reapp ears on the odometer display 10 sec onds later. Control i nd icator v for bel t tensioners The opera tion of the belt tensioners is electronically monitored together with the airbag sy stems and indicated on the instrument cluster by the control indica tor v. When the ignition is switched on, the control ind icator illuminates for approx. 4 seconds. If it does not illuminate, does not go off after 4 seconds or illuminates whilst driving, there is a fa ult in the belt tensioner sy stem or the airbag sy stems - see page 86. The belt tensioner or the airbag sy stems may not a ctiv ate if an accident oc curs. Deploym ent of the belt tensioners is indica ted b y continuous illum ination of v. Seats, interior Im portant z Do not fit ac cessories not spec ifically released for your vehicle type or store ob jects in the belt tensioner operating area (in the area of the belt b uc kles) d ue to the risk of injury in the event the belt tensioners are triggered. z Do not m ake any modifications to the com ponents of the belt tensioners, a s this will render the vehicle unroadworthy . 9 Warning Inc orrect handling (e.g. removal or fitting of seat belts or belt buckles) can trigg er the belt tensioners with risk of injury . z The belt tensioner and airbag system control electronics can be found in the centre console area . In order to avoid malfunctions, d o not store magnetic objec ts in this area. z When using the rea r seats, mak e sure that the components of the front seat belts are not damaged by shoes or other objec ts. Do not a llow dirt to enter the automatic sea t belt retractor. 75 z We recom mend that you have the front seats removed by a w orkshop in the event of actuation of the belt tensioners. z The belt tensioners trigger once only, ind ic ated b y the lighting of the control ind ic ator v. Have a work shop replace trig gered belt tensioners. z When disposing of the vehicle, the sa fety instructions given for this must be observed . Ta ke the vehicle to a recycling company for disposal. 76 Seats, interior Using the seat belts Fitting seat bel ts Pull the seat belt out of the retractor and place it across the body, mak ing sure it is not twisted. Insert the la tch plate into the buckle. The front sea t b ackrest must not be tilted back too far or the seat belt will not op erate properly . The recommended angle of inclina tion is 25° . Mak e sure that the lap belt is not twisted and that it fits snugly across the body. Tension the belt frequently whilst d riv ing by tugging the diagonal pa rt of the belt. 9 Warning O n pregna nt women in particular, the lap belt must be positioned a s low as possible across the pelvis so as not to put too much pressure on the abdomen. Bulk y clothing will impede the snug fit of the seat b elt. The seat belt must not be placed over hard or break able ob jects in the pockets of your clothing (e.g. p ens, key s, spectacles) as this may cause injury . Do not p lace any objects, such as ha ndb ags or mobile telephones, between the seat b elt and y our body. Height adjustm ent Height adjustm ent of upper anc horage point for front seat belts: 1. Pull out the seat belt slightly. 2. Front seat belts: Push the button down or push the belt g uide up. Rear sea t belts: Press the belt guide and push up or d ow n. 3. Set desired height. 4. Allow belt g uide to audibly engage. Do not adjust height whilst driving. Seats, interior 77 Child restrain t systems 3 When using a child restraint sy stem, follow the instructions for installation and use. The country in w hich y ou are trav elling ma y not perm it the use of child restraint systems on certain seats. Always comply with the loc al or national regulations. Adjust height such that the seat belt passes over the wearer’s shoulder and rests against the shoulder. It must not pass over the neck or upper arm. Rem oving t he b el t To remove the seat belt , press the red button on the catch; the seat belt retracts by itself. Selecti ng the right syst em Y our child should travel facing backw ards in the vehicle for as long as p ossible. A child has a very weak cervical spinal colum n and in the event of an accident is less likely to suffer injury in a rea r-facing, semi-lying position than if sea ted upright. 9 Warnin g Never ca rry child restraint systems on your lap, risk of fatal injury. 78 Seats, interior Permissible opti ons for fi tting a child restrai nt1) Weight and age cl ass2 ) O n front p assenger’s seat O n outboard rear seats O n centre rea r sea t Group 0: up to 10 kg or approx. 10 months B 1, + U, + U Group 0+: up to 13 kg or approx. 2 years Group I : 9 to 18 k g or approx. 8 months to 4 years Group I I: 15 t o 25 kg or approx. 3 to 7 years 2) If the child restraint sy stem is being secured using a three-point seat belt, m ove seat height adjustment 3 to upperm ost position. Move front passenger’s sea t as far back as possible and move front passenger’s seat b elt anchorage point to lowest position. B 2 = Limited, only with seat occupancy recognition and Vauxhall child restraint sy stem with transponders. B 2, + U, + U X U U Group I II: 22 t o 36 kg or approx. 6 to 12 y ears 1) B 1 = Limited, only with seat occupancy recognition and Vauxhall child restraint sy stem with transponders. For reas ons o f sa fety, w e recom mend tha t the child restraint be installed o n one of th e o utboa rd rea r seats. We reco mmen d the use of each system u ntil the child reaches the up per weight lim it. If the child restraint sy stem is being secured using a three-point seat belt, m ove seat height adjustment 3 to upperm ost position. Move front passenger’s sea t as far back as possible so that vehicle sa fety b elt runs from anchorage point towards the front. Seats, interior U = Can b e used universally in combination with a three-point seat belt. + = Vehicle sea t available with IS OFIX fixings. When using IS OFIX, only ISO FI X child restra int system s approved for the v ehicle may b e used. X = No child restraint system permitted in this weight class. Note z C hildren under 12 y ears or under 150 cm tall should only travel in an appropriate child restraint. z When transporting children, use the child restraint systems suitable for the child’s weight. z Ensure tha t the child restraint system has been correctly fitted - see instruc tions provided with child restraint system. z The covers of the Vauxhall child restraint system can be wiped clean. z Do not stic k anything on the child restraint sy stems a nd do not cover them with any other materia ls. z O nly allow the c hild to enter and exit on the side of the vehicle facing aw ay from the road . z A child restraint system whic h has been sub jected to stress in an a ccident must be rep la ced. z Secure or remove child restra int systems carried in the v ehicle when not in use. 79 Mounti ng brack ets 3 for IS OFIX child restraint systems The brackets located between the backrest and seat cushion are used for mounting IS OFIX child restraint sy stems. Plea se follow the instructions acc om panying the I SO FIX child restraint system. O nly ISO FIX child restraint sy stems app rov ed for the vehicle may be used. 80 Seats, interior Airbag system The a irb ag system c onsists of several separate systems. Front airb ag system The front airbag system will be triggered in the event of a serious ac cident involving a frontal impact and forms safety cushions for the driver and front passenger. The forward movement of the driver and front passenger is checked and the risk of injuries to the upper body a nd head are thereby substantially reduced. Side airb ag system 3 The sid e airbag is triggered in the event of a side-on c ollision to form a safety cushion for the driver or front passenger in the respective door area. This substantially reduces the risk of injury to the upp er body and pelv is. C ur tain ai rbag syst em 3 The curtain a irba g system triggers in the event of a side-on collision and provides a safety barrier in the head area on the respective side of the v ehicle. This red uces the risk of injury to the head considera bly in the event of a side-on collision. Seats, interior 81 Exception: Front p assenger’s seat with seat occupancy recognition system 3. The seat occupancy recognition sy stem dea ctivates the front and side airbags 3 on the front passenger’ s side if the front passenger’s seat is unoccupied or a Vauxhall child restraint system w ith transponders 3 has been fitted to the front passenger’s seat. S eat occupancy recognition - see pag e 87. Vauxhall child restraint system with transponders 3 - see page 78. Airbag system z seat occ upa ncy rec og nition 3, Front airb ag The front airbag system is identified by the word AI RBAG on the steering wheel and above the glov e c om partment. z the control indicator for Va ux ha ll child restraint systems y with tra nsponders 3 in the od om eter displa y. The front airbag system comprises: z an airbag with inflator in the steering wheel a nd a second one behind the trim panel ab ov e the glove compartment, z control electronics w ith im pact sensors, z control indicator for airbag systems v in instrum ent cluster, The front airb ag system will be trigg ered : z depending on the severity of the accident, z depending on the type of impact, z within the range shown in the illustration, z indep endent of side airbag a nd curta in airbag sy stem 3. Examples of events triggering the front airbag sy stem: z Impact against a non-y ielding obstacle: the front airbags are trigg ered at low vehicle speed. z Impact against a yield ing obstacle: (such as another vehicle): the front airbags are only triggered at a hig her vehicle speed. 82 Seats, interior When trigg ered , the front airbags inflate in milliseconds to form a safety cushion for the d riv er and front passenger. The forward movement of the front seat occupants is c hecked, thereby sub stantially reducing the risk of injury to the upp er body and hea d. No im pairment of view will occur, because the a irb ags inflate and deflate so quickly . 9 Warning The front airbag sy stem provides optimum p rotection when the seat, back rest a nd head restraint are correctly adjusted: Adjust the driver’s seat according to the occupant’s height suc h that with the driver sitting upright the steering wheel is held in the a rea of its upper sp ok es with the d riv er’s arms slightly bent. The front passeng er’s seat should b e as far b ack as possible, w ith the backrest upright – see p ages 3, 52. Do not place the head, b od y, hands or feet on the c ov ers of the airbag sy stems. Do not place any objects in the area in which the airb ags inflate. Im portant inform ation - see page 89. 9 Warnin g The three-point seat belt must b e correctly fitted – see pag e 76. The front airbag sy stem will not be triggered in the ev ent of: z the ignition being switched off, z minor frontal collisions, z accidents in which the vehicle overturns, z collisions involving a side or rear-imp act, tha t is to say, if it w ould not b e of b enefit to the occupants. Seats, interior 83 9 Warning Seat belts m ust therefore a lways be worn. The front a irb ag system serv es to supplement the three-point seat belts. If you do not wea r your seat belt you risk being seriously injured, or even thrown from the vehic le, in the ev ent of an accident. In the event of an a ccident the seat belt helps to keep y ou in the correct seating position, so tha t the front airbag system can provid e you with effective p rotection. In add ition, the front a irb ag system w ill not be trig gered for the front passenger’s seat in model v ariants with seat occupancy recognition 3 if: z the front passenger’ s seat is unoccupied, z there is a prop erly fitted Va ux ha ll child restraint system with transponders 3 . Seat oc cup ancy recognition – see page 87. Vauxhall child restraint system with transponders 3 – see page 77. Side airb ag 3 The side a irb ag system is identified by the word AIRBAG on the outb oa rd sides of the front seat backrests. The side airbag sy stem will be triggered: z depending on the sev erity of the accident, The side a irb ag system c om prises: z an airbag with infla tor in the back of the driver’s and front passenger’s seat respectively , z within the range shown in the illustration on the centre d oor pillar of the driver’s or front passenger’ s side, z the control electronics, z the side-impact sensors, z control indicator for airb ag sy stems v in instrument cluster, z seat occ upa ncy rec og nition 3, z the control indicator for Va ux ha ll child restraint systems y with transponders 3 in the od om eter displa y. z depending on the ty pe of im pact, z ind epend ently of the front airbag sy stem. Exception: Front p assenger’s seat with seat occupancy recognition system 3. The seat occupancy recognition sy stem dea ctivates the front and side airbags 3 on the front passenger’ s side if the front passenger’s seat is unoccupied or a Vauxhall child restraint system w ith transponders 3 has been fitted to the front passenger’s seat. S eat occupancy recognition - see pag e 87. Vauxhall child restraint system with transponders 3 - see pag e 78. 84 Seats, interior 9 Warning There must be no objects in the area in which the airb ag inflates or in the a rea between the ba ckrests and the v ehicle body . Do not place the hand s or arms on the covers of the airba g systems. Imp ortant information – see page 89. The three-point sea t b elt must a lw ays be correctly fitted – see page 76. When triggered, the side a irba g infla tes within milliseconds to form a safety cushion for the driver or front passeng er in the respective door area. This substantially red uces the risk of injury to the upper body and pelvis in the event of a side-on collision. The side airba gs will not be triggered in the event of: z the ig nition being sw itched off, z fronta l collisions, z accidents in which the v ehicle overturns, z collisions involving a rear-impact, z collisions involving a side-impact outside the passenger cell. In ad dition, the sid e airbag sy stem will not be triggered for the front pa ssenger’s seat in model variants with seat occupancy recognition 3 if: z the front pa ssenger’s seat is unoccupied, z there is a properly fitted Vauxhall child restra int system with transponders 3. S eat occup ancy recognition – see page 87. Vauxhall child restraint system with transponders 3 – see page 77. Seats, interior Curt ain airb ag 3 The c urtain airbag sy stem is identified by the w ord AIRBAG on the roof pillar trim. The curtain airbag system will be triggered: z depending on the severity of the accident, The c urtain airbag sy stem comp rises: z an airbag with inflator in the roof frame on the driver’s and front p assenger’s sid e respectively, z depending on the type of impact, z the control elec tronics, z together with the side airbag system, z the side-impa ct sensors, z the control indica tor for airba g system s v in the instrument. z within the ra ng e shown in the illustration on the c entre door p illar of the d riv er’s or front passenger’s sid e, z irrespectiv e of sea t occupancy rec og nition, z indep endently of the front airbag system. 85 When the curtain a irb ag is triggered it inflates within milliseconds and provides a safety barrier in the head area on the respective side of the v ehicle. This red uces the risk of injury to the head considera bly in the event of a side-imp act. 86 Seats, interior 9 Warning 9 Warnin g There m ust be no objects in the area in which the airbag inflates. Do not place the hands or arms on the covers of the airb ag systems. I mportant information – see pa ge 89. Have the c ause of the fault elim inated immediately by a workshop. The sy stem’s integrated self-diagnostics allows faults to b e q uick ly rem edied. The three-point seat belt m ust always be correctly fitted – see page 76. If c ontrol indicator v in the instrument cluster fails, for reasons of safety , the text AI rbAG app ears on the odometer display. The curtain airbags will not be triggered in the event of: z the ignition b eing switched off, z frontal collisions, z accidents in whic h the vehicle overturns, z collisions involving a rear-impa ct, z collisions inv olv ing a side-impa ct outside the passenger c ell. Control i nd icator v for airbag systems The opera tion of the airbag systems is electronically monitored together with the seat occupancy recognition system s 3 and the belt tensioners and indicated on the instrument cluster by the control indica tor v. When the ignition is switched on, the control ind icator illuminates for approx. 4 seconds. If it does not illuminate, does not go off after 4 seconds or illuminates whilst driving, there is a fa ult in the airbag sy stems, the sea t occupancy recognition system 3 or the b elt tensioners - see page 74. The systems may not activate if an accident occurs. Deploym ent of the airba gs is indicated by continuous illumination of v. The text is ac knowledged by pressing the reset button. It then disappears from the odometer display 10 sec onds later. Seats, interior Seat oc cupancy recognition 3 The seat occupancy recognition system deactivates the front and side airbags for the front passenger’s sea t if the front passenger’s sea t is not occupied or a Vauxhall child restraint sy stem with transponders 3 is fitted on the front passenger’s sea t. The curtain airbag system 3 rem ains activ ated. The c ontrol indicator for seat occupancy recognition y is located in the odometer display. If control indicator y illuminates for approx. 4 seconds when the ignition is switched on, the vehicle is eq uipp ed w ith seat occupancy recognition; see nex t page, Fig. S 14742. If a Vauxhall c hild restra int system with transponders 3 is fitted, the control indicator y illuminates continuously after the ig nition is switched on as soon as the system has detected the child restraint system. Only then may the child restraint system with transpond ers 3 be used on the passenger’s sea t. 87 9 Warnin g Only Vaux hall child restraint systems with tra nsponders 3 can be fitted on the front passeng er’s seat. Use of sy stems w ithout tra nsponders poses a risk of fatal injury. Vauxhall child restraint systems with transponders 3 can b e identified by a sticker. Vehicles with seat occupancy recognition can also b e identified by the stick er on the side of the instrum ent panel - see illustration a bove. Vauxhall c hild restraint system s w ith tra nsponders 3 are automatically detected if correctly fitted to the front passenger’s seat. When these child restra int system s a re being used on the front passenger’ s seat, the front and side airbag systems for the front passenger’s seat are dea ctiv ated. The curtain airbag sy stem remains ac tiv ated. Pay attention to control indicator seat y for occ upa nc y recognition 3 - see page 88. 88 Seats, interior Cont rol indica tor y for Vauxhall chi ld restraint syst em s with t ransponders 3 The p resence of a Vaux hall child restraint system w ith transponders 3 is indicated after the ignition has been switched on by continuous illumination of the c ontrol indicator y in the od om eter disp la y, as soon a s the seat occupancy recognition system has detected the child restraint system. If the control indicator flashes when the child restraint system with transponders 3 is c orrectly fitted, there is a fault with risk of injury to the c hild. Fit the child restraint system on the rear seat. Have the cause of the fa ult eliminated by a workshop. If no Vauxhall child restraint system w ith transponders 3 is fitted, the control indicator must not illum inate or flash, as the front passenger’ s a irb ag systems would not deploy. H ave the cause of the fault elim inated by a workshop. 9 Warnin g If control indicator y does not illum inate whilst driving, the front and sid e airba gs for the front p assenger’s seat are not deactiv ated a nd there is a risk of fa ta l injury to the child. Fit the child restraint sy stems on the rear seat. Have the cause of the fault eliminated by a workshop. If the child restraint system is not correc tly fitted or the transponders are defective, the control indic ator flashes. C heck that child restraint sy stem is correc tly fitted. For fitting child restraint system with tra nsponders 3 - see instructions provided with child restraint system . If the Vauxhall child restraint system with tra nsponders 3 ha s b een fitted according to the instructions, control ind ic ator y for Vauxhall c hild restra int sy stems with transponders must illuminate in the odom eter display when the ignition is switched on. If the control indica tor does not illuminate whilst driving, the front passeng er’s airbag systems are not deactivated and there is a risk of fatal injury. In this ca se fit child restraint sy stems on the rea r seat. Have the ca use of the fault eliminated by a workshop . Seats, interior Im portant z Do not fit accessories or place objects in the ex pansion zone of the airbag system s - risk of injury if a irb ags are deployed. z The airb ag systems and b elt tensioner control electronics can be found in the centre console area . In order to avoid malfunctions, d o not store magnetic objec ts in this area. z Do not p la ce a ny objects between the airb ag systems and the vehicle occ upa nts; risk of injury . z Do not stic k anything on the steering wheel, instrum ent panel, front seat back rests or roof frame in the v icinity of the airb ags, or on the front passenger’s seat cushion, or cover any of those areas with other m aterials. 9 Warning Nev er carry child restraint sy stems or other objects on your lap - risk of fatal injury. z Use the hooks in the roof frame only to hang up light articles of clothing or c oa t hangers. Do not place any objects in the pockets of the hanging items – risk of injury. z Use only a dry cloth or I nterior/ Upholstery C leaner to clean the steering wheel, instrum ent panel, front seat back rests, roof frame and seat cushion of the front passenger’s seat. Do not use any aggressiv e c leaning agents. z O nly protective covers whic h are approved for y our v ehicle with side airbag 3 ma y be fitted on the front seats. When fitting the protective covers, mak e sure that the airbag units on the outboard sides of the front seat back rests a re not covered. 89 z The airbag sy stems are triggered ind epend ently of each other based on the severity of the ac cident and the type of impa ct. The side airbag sy stem 3 and the curtain airbag system 3 a re trig gered together. See seat occupancy recognition on page 87 for excep tions. z Each a irb ag deploys once only. Have a workshop replace dep loy ed airbags immediately . z The speeds, directions of movement and deformation properties of the vehic les, and the p roperties of the obstacle conc erned, determ ine the severity of the accident and triggering of the airbags. The degree of dama ge to y our vehicle and the resulting repair costs alone are not indica tiv e that the criteria for trig gering of the airb ags were met. 90 Seats, interior z Do not p erform any a lterations on the com ponents of the airbag sy stem, as this would render the vehic le unroadworthy . 9 Warning The systems can be triggered ab ruptly and cause injury if they are handled im properly. z We recom mend hav ing the steering wheel, the instrument p anel, all panelling parts, the door seals, the hand les and the seats rem ov ed by a workshop. z When disposing of the vehicle, the safety instruc tions given for this must be ob served. Tak e the vehicle to a recycling com pany for disposa l. z Persons weighing less than 35 kg should only tra vel on the rear seats. This does not ap ply to children who are trav elling in c hild restra int system s w ith transponders 3. z In v ehicles with seat occ upa ncy rec og nition 3, do not place any heavy objec ts on the front passenger’ s seat otherwise the airbag system s for the front p assenger’s seat may b e triggered in the event of an accident. z In v ehicles with seat occ upa ncy rec og nition 3, to prev ent malfunctions do not use protective c ov ers or extra seat cushions on the front passeng er’s seat. z In order to prev ent malfunctions when using a Vaux hall child restraint sy stem with transp onders 3 on the front passenger’ s seat, no objects (e.g. plastic sheet, stick ers or heated mats) may be placed under the child restraint system. 9 Warning C hild restraint system s a s well as other objec ts m ust nev er be carried on the lap of passengers; risk of fatal injury. I f carried in this way, child restraint sy stems with transponders 3 in v ehicles with seat occupancy recognition 3 could lead to front passenger’s airbag system s not being triggered in the event of an accident. Use of child restra int systems 3 on t he front p assenger’s seat in v ehic les w ith ai rbag syst em s, but wi thout sea t occup ancy recog nition 3 Seats, interior 91 9 Warning Vehicles with front passenger’ s airbag and no side airbag 3: Child restraints facing the rear of the vehicle must not be fitted to the front passenger’s seat; risk of fatal injury. Child restraints facing the front (child restraints for weight ranges I, II and III – see page 77) are permitted on the front p assenger’s seat, providing that it is pushed back as far as possible and the backrest has been adjusted so that the la p belt fits snug ly . Vehicles with front passeng er’s airbag can be recognised by the word AI RBAG above the glove compartment and the warning sticker on the sunvisor on the front passenger’s sid e - see Fig. 17424 T on previous pag e. In some m odel variants, the warning sticker may be on the side of the instrument panel - see Fig . 17118 T. 9 Warnin g Vehic les with sid e airbag 3: No child restra int system 3 m ay be fitted on the front passenger’s seat; risk of fatal injury . A v ehicle with side airbags can b e identified by the word A IRBAG on the outboard sides of the front seat b ackrests. S eat occupancy recognition 3 – see page 87. 92 Seats, interior Use of child restrai nt systems 3 on front passenger’s seat in vehicles wit h airbag systems 3 and wit h seat occupancy recogniti on 3 9 Warning Only Vauxhall child restraint systems with transponders 3 can b e fitted on the front passenger’s seat. Use of sy stems without transponders poses a risk of fatal injury. Vehicles with seat occupancy recognition can be identified by control ind icator y in the odometer display. If the control indica tor illuminates for a pprox. 4 second s when the ignition is switc hed on, the vehicle is equipped with seat occupancy recognition - see page 87. Vehicles with seat occupancy recognition can also be id entified b y the sticker on the side of the instrument p anel see Fig. 17625 J. The seat occupa ncy recognition sy stem detects Vauxhall child restraint systems with tra nsponders 3 and sw itc hes off the front and side a irb ag sy stems for the front passenger’s seat. The curtain airbag sy stem remains a ctiv ated. S eat occupancy recognition – see page 87. Vauxhall child restraint systems with transponders 3 can b e identified by a sticker or badge - see illustration. Seats, interior Cigarette lighter 3 Accessory soc kets 3 The c ig arette lighter is in the front centre console. The soc ket in the centre console and the cigarette lighter socket can be used to connect electrical accessories. The sockets are ready for operation when the ignition is switched on. If the eng ine is not running the battery will be discharged. More acc essory sockets 3 can be found in the centre console beneath the rear air vents 3 and in the Travel Assista nt 3. Press in cigarette lighter with ignition switched on. S witches off autom atically when elem ent is glowing. Withdraw cigarette lighter. Estates have an additional accessory socket 3 to the left in the luggage compartment next to the lug gage compartment lig hting. 93 Do not dam age the soc kets by using unsuitable plugs. The maximum power c onsumption of electrical ac cessories m ust not ex ceed 120 w atts. Do not connect any current-delivering acc essories, e.g. electrical charging devices or b atteries. Electrical ac cessories connected to the socket must c om ply with the electromagnetic compatibility requirements laid down in DIN VDE 40 839, otherwise v ehicle malfunctions may oc cur. Accessory sockets in the Travel Assistant 3 – see page 60. 94 Seats, interior Ashtray To be used only for ash and not for combustible rubbish. 9 Warning Failure to observe these descriptions can lead to injuries which may be fatal. Vehicle passengers must be informed according ly . Front ashtray The a sh tray is in the front c entre console beneath a cov er. The cover opens when pressed at the point indicated . To empty , grip b oth sides of the ashtray insert a t the points illustrated and pull up wards. Rear a sht ray 3 The ash tray is in the rea r centre console. The cover op ens when pressed a t the point indicated. To empty, open the ashtray, press the spring (arrow ) and pull out the ashtray. Seats, interior Stowage c ompartmen ts Glov e com part ment To open, pull hand le upwards. At the front of the opened cover there is a pen holder. The g lov e com partment should remain closed w hilst driving. Cooled glove compartment 3 – see page 143. Centre consol e stow age comp artm ent 3 Div ision of the stowage compartment can be changed by moving the pa rtition in the side guides. 95 St owage compa rtment in the r oof lining 3 To open, press the point indicated. The maximum permitted load on the stowage compartment is 0.4 kg . The stowage com partment must be closed whilst driving. 96 Seats, interior Stow age com partm ents in t he l ug gage com partm ent To access press down b ar and open the cover. Warning triangle ¨ 3 and first-aid k it + 3 stow age – see page 234. Stowing the sp are wheel – see page 236. Jac k and v ehicle tools stow age – see page 238. Estates have an additional stowage compartment in the load comp artm ent floor. To op en, pull the release lever a nd open the flap. When opening , ensure that the hinge a t the fold is opened and that the entire floor covering is not raised. Seats, interior 97 Su nvisors Use the sunvisor to protect from glare b y pulling it d ow n and swivelling it to the side. During driving, the mirrors 3 in the sunv isors should be covered. Drink holders Drink hol ders, front 3 The d rink holder can be found between the front seats in the centre console: slid e cov er 3 open. Dr inks holders, rear 3 The drink holder can be found beneath the centre seat: pressing front edge moves drink hold er out. Drink holder in Travel Assistant 3 – see p age 60. 98 In struments, controls Instruments, controls Control indic ators The control indica tors described here are not present in all vehic les. The descriptions however, apply to all instrument versions. The control indica tor colours mean: z Red z Y ellow Danger, important rem ind er Warning , note, fault z Green z Blue O n confirmation O n confirmation O Turn sig nal lig ht s Control indica tor flashes green. Control indicators .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Instrument display ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Information display . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Warning buzzers.. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Wind screen wiper .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 98 105 108 126 126 The control indica tor flashes on the respective side. Both c ontrol indicators flash with the ha zard warning lights on. Rapid flashes: A turn sig nal lig ht or the related fuse has failed, fa ilure of turn signal lig ht on the caravan/trailer 3 . Turn signal lights – see page 130. Change bulb s - see page 252. Fuses - see page 246. I Engine oil pressure C ontrol indicator illuminates red. It illuminates w hen the ignition is switched on and extinguishes shortly after the eng ine starts. Illuminates when the eng ine is running: Eng ine lubrication m ay be interrup ted. This ma y result in damage to the engine and/or locking of the drive wheels: 1. Move out of the flow of traffic a s quickly as possible without impeding other vehicles. 2. Depress clutch. 3. Shift manual transm ission or Easytronic 3 into neutral; for a utomatic tra nsmission 3 , set selector lever to N. 4. Switch off ignition. 9 Warnin g When the eng ine is off, considerably more force is needed to brake and steer. Do not remove key until v ehicle has com e to a standstill, otherw ise the steering colum n lock could engage unexpectedly . C heck oil level before contac ting a workshop. Instru men ts, c ontrols 99 p Alt erna tor C ontrol indic ator illuminates or flashes red. It illuminates w hen the ignition is switched on and extinguishes shortly after the eng ine starts. Flashes while starting: Battery voltage too low. H ave electrica l system tested b y a work shop. R Brak e system , clut ch system Control indicator illuminates or flashes red. It illuminates when the ignition is switched on if the handbrak e is applied or if the brake and c lutch fluid level is too low. For further instructions – see pages 209, 276. For vehicles with Ea sy tronic 3 , the c ontrol indica tor flashes for a few seconds when the ig nition is turned off if the handbrak e is not a pplied. 9 Warning Illuminate if the handbrake has been released: stop vehicle and interrupt journey im mediately. Contact a workshop for assista nce. Illuminates when the eng ine is running: S top and switch engine off. Battery w ill not be charged. Eng ine cooling may be interrupted . Effec t of bra ke serv o unit may stop in vehicles with diesel engines. C heck d riv e b elt condition and tensioning before contacting a w orkshop for assistance. v Airb ag system s 3 , belt tensioners 3 C ontrol indicator illuminates red. Illuminates when the eng ine is running: Fault in the airbag sy stems, seat occupancy recognition 3 or belt tensioners - see pa ges 74, 86. 100 In struments, controls ( Door open C ontrol indicator illuminates red. It illuminates w ith the doors open. j Easytronic 3, star ting the engine C ontrol indicator illuminates yellow . W Coola nt temperat ure Control indicator illum inates red. Illuminates when the engine is running: Stop a nd turn engine off, coolant tem perature is too high. Risk of engine dam age. For coola nt temp erature display see page 106. C heck coola nt level see page 275. 8 Exterior l ights Control indicator illum inates green. It is illuminated when the exterior lighting is on – see pa ge 128. 1 SPORT mode of a ut omati c t ransmission 3 Control indica tor is illuminated in the tra nsmission display if the SPO RT mode 3 is selected . Further inform ation - see pages 178, 179. T Wi nt er program me of autom atic transmission 3 or Easyt ronic 3 Control indica tor illuminates in tra nsmission display with Winter prog ra mme engaged. Further inform ation – see pages 172, 180. It illuminates if the footbrak e is not depressed. The indicator ex ting uishes as soon as the footb ra ke is depressed. The eng ine can only b e started with the footbrake dep ressed - see page 169. t Bulb rep lacement 3 C ontrol indicator illuminates red. It illuminates if a bulb is defective. Check the lights and replace any defective bulbs. Replacing bulbs - see page 252. Instru men ts, c ontrols s r It illuminates with the lug gage compartment open, to close luggage compartment – see pa ge 34. Fault in system. Contact a work shop for help. > u O pen l uggage com partm ent Control indicator illum inates red. Front fog lig hts 3 Control indicator illum inates green. It is illuminated when the front fog lights are on – see page 130. C Pa rking distance sensors 3 Control indica tor illuminates y ellow. Pa rk ing distance sensors 3 – see page 202. Continuous Damp ing Control 3, SPO RT mode Control indica tor illuminates y ellow. Fault in system. Contact a work shop for help. Mai n bea m Control indicator illum inates blue. Further inform ation – see page 198. It is illuminated when main beam is on and during headlight flash – see pa ges 7, 128. Seat belt 3 Control indica tor illuminates red. r Fog tail light Control indicator illum inates yellow. It is illuminated when the fog tail light is on – see pa ge 131. X It illum ina tes onc e the ignition has been switched on until the seat belt is applied. A warning buzzer also sound s once the vehicle has started moving. Putting on a seat belt – see page 76. 101 A Engine el ect ronics, transmi ssion electronics 3 , diesel fuel fi lter 3, im mobil iser C ontrol indicator illuminates or flashes y ellow. It illuminates for a few sec onds when the ignition is switched on. Illuminates when the eng ine is running: Fault in engine or gearbox electronic system. Electronics have switched on emergency running programme; fuel consum ption m ay be increa sed and the vehicle’s driveability reduced see page 192. Contact a workshop imm ediately. Diesel engines 1 ) Z 19 DTL, Z 19 DT, Z 19 DTH: Hav e water drained from diesel fuel filter - see page 274. Flashes when the ig nition is on: Fault in the electronic immobiliser system ; the engine cannot be started see page 27. 1) Sales des ig nation – see p ag e 284, 285. 102 In struments, controls H C ool ant level C ontrol indicator illuminates yellow . Illuminates when the eng ine is running: C oolant fluid level too low. Stop, turn off eng ine. C heck coolant fluid level see page 275. u Anti -lock Bra ke Syst em (ABS ) C ontrol indicator illuminates red. ! Preheat ing for di esel engines 3, diesel part icle filter 3 Control indicator illum inates or flashes yellow. Illuminates: Preheating system active, switches on only if outside tem perature is low. Flashes: (in v ehicles with diesel particle filter) The driving situation is such that the diesel particle filter self-cleaning function cannot op erate autom atically. You may continue to drive the vehic le normally. The vehicle will not be d amaged and does not require service. The self-cleaning function will autom atic ally operate whilst driving after the engine has reached its norma l op erating temperature. The control indica tor ! will continue to flash until the self-clea ning operation is c om plete. This may take up to 20 minutes of driving. The time will be shorter at higher vehicle speeds. Further inform ation – see page 194. Illuminates whilst driving: Fault in Anti-lock Bra ke System see page 210. Instru men ts, c ontrols p y Fault in elec tro-hydraulic p ow er assisted steering system . The power assisted steering may hav e failed. The vehicle can be steered but considerably more force is req uired. C ontact a workshop for assistance. Illum inates: Sea t occupancy recognition has detected a child restraint system with tra nsponders. Airba g systems for the front passenger’s seat are dea ctiv ated - see page 87. Elec tro-hyd raulic pow er assisted steeri ng Control indicator illum inates red. v Elec tronic St abili ty Progra mme (ESP® P lu s) 3 Control indicator flashes or lights yellow. Flashes w hilst driving: Sy stem actively engaged - see page 196. Illuminates whilst driving: Sy stem switched off or fault in the Electronic Stability Programm e see page 196. Seat occup ancy r ecog ni tion 3 Control indica tor illuminates or flashes on the odometer display. Flashes: Fault in the sy stem or child restraints with tra nsponder fitted incorrectly see p age 87. S Engine oil l ev el 3 Control indica tor illuminates y ellow. The engine oil lev el is check ed autom atic ally. Illum inates when the engine is running: Engine oil level too low . Check engine oil level and top up engine oil if necessa ry see p age 272. 103 m C ruise cont rol 3 C ontrol indicator illuminates green. It is illuminated when the sy stem is on – see page 200. Y Fuel lev el C ontrol indicator illuminates or flashes y ellow. Illuminates: Low fuel level, fuel gauge in reserv e a rea. Flashes: Fuel supply exhausted, refuel immediately . N ever let the tank run dry. Erra tic fuel sup ply can c ause catalytic converter to overheat - see pa ge 190. Diesel engines: I f the tank is run dry, b leed the fuel sy stem as desc rib ed on pa ge 228. 104 In struments, controls B Ad aptiv e Forwa rd Lighting (AFL) 3 C ontrol indicator flashes yellow. Flashing: Fault in sy stem. C ontac t a workshop for help . Flashing for 4 seconds when the ig nition is switched on: S ystem ad justed for d riv ing abroad. AFL - see page 132. Z Exhaust ga ses 3 Control indicator illum inates or flashes yellow. It illuminates when the ignition is switched on and extinguishes shortly after the engine sta rts. Illuminates when the engine is running: Fault in emission control sy stem. The permitted emissions may be exceed ed. Contact a workshop im med ia tely. If it flashes when the engine is running : Fault that may cause dama ge to the cataly tic converter – see page 192. Contact a w orkshop for assistance im med ia tely. w Tyre pressure m oni toring system 3 Control indica tor illuminates red: Ty re p ressure difference, chec k tyre pressure at nex t opportunity. Control indica tor flashes red : Considerable pressure difference or direc t loss of pressure, stop immediately and check ty res and ty re pressure. Control indica tor illuminates y ellow: Fault in system. Contact a work shop for help. Ty re p ressure monitoring system – see p age 204. Instru men ts, c ontrols 105 O dometer Records the miles (k ilometres) counted. Display in the ev ent of airbag system ma lfunction – see page 86. Trip odometer Display of m iles (kilom etres) covered since reset. To set to z ero, hold reset knob down for app rox . 2 seconds with ignition switched on. Instrum ent display In some model v ariants the pointers of the tachometer, the speedometer, the coolant tem perature gauge and the fuel gauge briefly go to the end stop as a functionality check . Ta chometer Indicates eng ine speed. Warning zone: Max im um permissible engine speed ex ceeded; d anger to engine. Speedometer Speed d isplay . 106 In struments, controls For physical reasons, the engine temperature gauge show s the coolant temperature only if the coolant level is adeq uate. During operation the system is pressurised. The temp erature ma y therefore rise briefly to ov er 100 °C. Coola nt temperat ure d isplay Pointer in zone = Engine operating at left temperature not yet reached Fuel gauge Pointer in left zone or Y illumina ted Pointer betw een the z ones = Normal operating temperature Pointer in warning zone at right or W is illuminated = Temperature too high: Stop. S witch off engine. Risk of engine d amage. Check coolant level - see page 275. Pointer in left zone or Y flashing = Reserve area = Refuelling see page 189 N ever let the tank run dry. Diesel engines: I f the tank is run dry, b leed the fuel sy stem as desc rib ed on pa ge 228. Because of the fuel remaining in the tank, the amount of fuel required to fill the tank ma y be less than the spec ified tank cap acity. Instru men ts, c ontrols 107 For Easy tronic 3, the display flashes for a few seconds if A, M or R is selected when the engine is running but the footbrake is not d epressed. Transmission displ ay 3 Display of gear selected for automatic transm ission 3 or current gear or m od e for Ea sy tronic 3 . P Automatic transm ission park position R N Reverse gear Neutral A M Automatic mode on Ea sy tronic Manual m od e on Easy tronic D Automatic mode on automatic transm ission 1-5 Manual m od e, c urrent gear on Easy tronic 1-5 Manual m od e, selected gear on 1-6 3 automatic I nS P Service interv al displ ay 3 When InSP appea rs on the odometer display, make an ap pointment with a workshop for servicing as soon a s possible. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. S ervice, maintena nce – see page 268. 108 In struments, controls 12:01 17,0°C FM 3 90,6 MHz REG AS RDS TP 11:25 } 21 .5°C Timer Tripl e I nformati on Di sp lay Display of time, outside tempera ture and date/Infotainment sy stem 3 (w hen it is on). When the ignition is off, the time, date and outside tem perature can be presented for 15 second s b y briefly pressing one of the two buttons b elow the displa y. Display F in the display indicates a fa ult. Hav e the cause eliminated by a workshop. 19,5° 19:36 All values Board Inform ation Displ ay 3 Display of time, outside temp erature a nd date/Infotainment system 3 (when it is on). Display F in the display indica tes a fault. Have the cause elim inated by a w ork shop. 257.0 40 1 Ø 8 7.0 Ø 31.0 [ TP] 257miles Information display Board Computer BC 2 Range RDS Ü BC 1 miles mph gal. miles/ gal. Grap hical I nformat ion Disp lay 3, C olour Informa tion Display 3 Display of time, outsid e tem perature, date/ Infotainment system 3 (when it is on) and Electronic Clima te C ontrol 3. The Gra phic al Inform ation Display presents the information in monochrome. The Colour Information Display p resents the information in colour. Instru men ts, c ontrols The ty pe of information and how it is displayed depends on the equipment of the v ehicle and the I nfotainment system 3, trip comp uter 3 and Elec tronic Clim ate C ontrol 3 settings. Some inform ation appea rs on the displa y in an abb reviated form. For Infotainm ent system - see Infotainment system instructions. : 8:56 -5 ,5° C 07.04.2004 For Elec tronic C limate Control 3 see page 156. Display F in the display indicates a fa ult. Hav e the cause eliminated by a workshop. 109 Slippery road -2, 5°C OK Outside temperature A fall in temp erature is indicated immed iately and a rise in temperature after a tim e delay. If outside temp erature d rops to 3 °C , the sy mbol : illuminates in the Triple Information Display or the Board Information Display 3 as a warning for icy road surfaces. : rem ains illuminated until temperatures reach a t least 5 °C . In v ehicles with Graphical I nformation Display 3 or C olour Inform ation Display 3 , an icy road surfac e wa rning m essage app ears on the display. No m essag e is displayed if the temperature is less than -5 °C . 9 Warnin g Caution: The road surface may already be icy even though the d isplay indicates a few deg rees ab ov e 0 °C . 110 In struments, controls 8:56 5 ,5°C 07.04.2 004 Triple Information Display Set d ate and ti me Infotainm ent system off: p ress Ö and ; below the display as follows: Press Ö for ap prox . 2 seconds: Day flashes ;: Set day Ö: ;: Month flashes Set month Ö: ;: Year flashes Set year Ö: ;: Hours flash Set hours Ö: ;: Minutes flash Set minutes Ö: Clock is started . Correcting time 3 Some RDS transmitters do not send a correct time sig nal. If the incorrect time is continually displayed, deactiv ate autom atic time sy nchronisation 3 - see next column, and set the tim e m anually . The automatic setting is indicated by } in the display. Deactivating/ac tiv ating autom atic time synchronisation: Infota inm ent system off, press Ö and ; below the display: Hold down Ö for app rox . 2 sec., clock display is now in setting m ode, Press Ö twice (until year flashes). Press Ö and hold down for approx. 3 seconds until } flashes in d isplay 3 a nd text "RDS TIME" appears (yea rs flash during this tim e), Press ;; display shows: RDS TIME 0 = O ff Press ;; display shows: RDS TIME 1 = O n Press Ö three tim es. Instru men ts, c ontrols 11:25} 111 21.5°C Range 257miles Board In formation Display 3, selecting functio ns Functions and settings of some equipm ent 3 can be accessed via the Board Information Disp la y. This is done using the menus and the buttons/four-way button on the Infotainm ent system 3 or the left-hand adjuster wheel 3 on the steering wheel. The resp ective menu op tions are then shown in the following lines on the disp lay. If check control warning messages 3 are displayed, the disp la y is blocked to other displays. C onfirm the warning message. If there are several warning messages, confirm one after the other. To select w ith four-wa y but ton: Select options v ia the m enus and with the buttons/four-w ay button on the Infotainment sy stem 3. To selec t using the left adj ust er w heel 3 on the steer ing wheel S croll upw ards Prev ious menu item. S croll d ow nw ards N ext m enu item . Press S elec tion of hig hlighted item, confirmation of comm and s. S ystem settings - see page 112. Trip comp uter 3 – see page 114. 112 In struments, controls The functions are displayed in the following order: 11:25} 21.5°C System Board In formation Display 3, System settings Press the Sett ings button of the Infotainm ent system. Menu item Audio or System will app ear. Press the lower button of the four-way button to reach m enu item System . After pressing the right-hand part of the fourway button, the first function of the System menu is shown. Some inform ation appea rs on the displa y in an abb reviated form. z z z z z z z z z Time synchronisation, Time, setting hours, Time, setting minutes, Date, setting day , Date, setting month, Date, setting year, Ignition logic, Language selection, Setting units of measure. 11:25} 21.5 °C Clo ck Sync.On C orrec ting ti me 3 S om e RDS transm itters do not send a correc t time signal. I f the incorrect time is continually displayed, deactivate automatic time synchronisation 3 and set the tim e m anua lly - see nex t page. Instru men ts, c ontrols 113 The a utomatic setting is indicated by } in the d isplay . To correct time with the help of R DS, select the m enu item for time synchronisation from the Set tings menu. Make the desired setting. Setti ng date and time Select the menu item for time and da te setting from the Settings menu. 11:25 } 21 .5°C English 11:25} 21.5 °C Unit Europe- SI Make the desired setting. The setting is executed upon exit from the menu item. Ig ni tion logic 3 Adjustment - see Infotainm ent system instructions. Lang uage selecti on You can select the d isplay language for some func tions. Sett ing units of measure Y ou can select which units of mea sure are to be used. Select the menu item for language from the Settings m enu and ma ke the desired setting. S elec t the menu item for units of measure from the Settings m enu and ma ke the desired setting. 114 In struments, controls Board In formation Display 3, trip computer 3 The trip computer p rov ides information on driving data, which is continually recorded and evaluated electronically . 11:25 } 21 .5°C Access trip computer vehicle data by pressing the BC button on the Infotainment system or the left ad juster w heel 3 on the steering wheel. Inst . Consumpt. Some inform ation appea rs on the displa y in an abb reviated form. 29.6 miles/gal. O nce an audio function has been selected, the subsequent rows of the trip computer func tion are displayed. The functions are displa yed in the following order: z z z z z z z Instantaneous consumption, Av erage consump tion, Effective consump tion, Av erage speed, Distance tra velled, Rang e, Stop watch. Instantaneous consumption Display changes depending on speed: Display in gal/h Display in mpg below 8 mph (13 k m/h) above 8 mph (13 km/h) Av era ge consum ption Average consumption display. Measurement m ay be reset to zero at any time and restarted - see "Resetting the trip computer information". Effec tive consumpt ion Fuel consum ption d isplay . Measurement m ay be reset to zero at any time and restarted - see "Resetting the trip computer information". Av era ge sp eed Average speed disp lay. Measurement m ay be reset to zero at any time and restarted - see "Resetting the trip computer information". S topp ages in the journey with the ignition off are not included in the c alcula tions. Distanc e t ravelled Distanc e trav elled disp la y. Measurement m ay be reset to zero at any time and restarted - see "Resetting the trip computer information". Instru men ts, c ontrols 11:25} 21.5°C Range 257miles Range Range is calculated from current fuel tank content and instanta neous consumption. The d isplay shows average values. After refuelling, the v ehicle up dates the range autom atically after a brief delay . If less than 30 miles (50 k m) can be driven with the fuel rema ining in the tank, the warning "Range" a ppears on the d isplay . If less than 20 miles (30 k m) can be driven with the fuel rema ining in the tank, the warning "Refuel!" 3 appears on the display. Acknowled ge the menu item as desc rib ed on page 111. Resetting the trip c omputer inform ation The follow ing trip computer information can be reset (reset to zero and measurements/calculations restarted): z z z z Average consumption, Effective consumption, Average speed, Distanc e travelled. Select the desired trip computer information. Reset using the left wheel on the steering wheel or the right/left button of the fourway b utton: 11:25} 115 21.5 °C Stop Watch 01:22:32 h z Press for more than 2 seconds: C urrent value. St op wa tch O peration with the four-way button: z Press for more than 4 seconds: All values. z Press right button: Sta rt/Stop. z Press left button for more than 2 second s: Reset. O perating using the left adjuster wheel 3 on the steering wheel: z Press: Start/S top . I nt err up tion of pow er supp ly If the power supp ly has been interrupted or if the battery voltage ha s dropped too low, the values stored in the trip computer w ill be lost. 116 FM In struments, controls [TP] ��� 19,5° C Din 90.6 MHz 19: 36 Graphical Info rmatio n D isplay 3 or Colour Information Display 3 , selecting functio ns The functions and settings of some equipm ent 3 can be accessed via the Graphical Information Displa y or the Colour Information Display . Functions are selected and executed in the menu on the display using the four-way button, the m ulti-function k nob 3 on the Infotainm ent system or the left wheel 3 on the steering wheel. If check control warning messages 3 are displayed, the disp la y is blocked to other displays. C onfirm the warning message. If there are several warning messages, confirm one after the other. To select w ith four-wa y but ton: Select menu items via menus and with the buttons/four-w ay button of the Infotainment sy stem. To selec t using the mult i-function k nob : Turn Highlighting of menu options or comm ands, selection of func tion ranges, Press S elec tion of highlighted option, confirmation of commands. To exit a m enu, turn the m ulti-func tion knob left or right to Return or Mai n and select. Instru men ts, c ontrols 7 FM [TP] C Din Settings Time, Date 117 19,5° 19:36 19:36 Language ��� 90.6 MHz Units 10 . 07 . 2004 Contrast Day / Night 19,5° To sel ect usi ng the left adj uster w heel 3 on the steeri ng wheel Scroll upwards Previous menu item. Scroll downward s Next m enu item. Press Selection of highlighted item, confirmation of comma nds. 19: 36 Functi on ranges For each functional area there is a main page (Main), which is selected at the top edg e of the displa y (not with Infotainment sy stem CD 30 without the ha nds-free mobile phone system): z z z z Audio, Na vigation 3, Telephone 3 , Trip comp uter 3. For audio, nav igation 3 and telephone functions 3 - see Infotainm ent system instructions. 6 Ign. logic System settings The settings are accessed via the Setting s menu. Press the Ma in button 3 (not found on all Infotainment sy stems) on the Infotainm ent system (c all up main display). Press the S ett ings button of the Infotainment system. No m enu may be selected with Infotainment System CD 30. The Settings m enu is displa yed. 118 7 In struments, controls Time, Date Time Date 19,5° 19:36 19:36 10 . 07 . 2004 6 Synchron. clock automatical. Setti ng the date and time 3 Select menu item Time, Dat e from the Setti ng s menu. The m enu for Time, Date is displayed. Select the menu items required: Correcting time 3 For systems with GPS receiver 1 ), time and date a re automatically set up on receipt of a GPS satellite signal. If the display ed tim e does not correspond to local time, time can be m anua lly corrected in 30-m inute increments or automatically corrected via receipt of an RDS tim e signal2) 3. Some RDS tra nsmitters do not send correct tim e signals. If the incorrect time is display ed often, deactivate autom atic tim e synchronisation 3 a nd set the tim e manually. To correct tim e with the help of RDS, select menu item Synchron. clock autom atica l. from the Time, Da te menu. The box in front of Synchron. clock automat ical. will be ticked; see Fig. 17340 T. 7 Settings 19,5° 19:36 Time, Date Language English Units German Contrast Español Day / Night Nederlands 6 Ign. logic Français Languag e selection Y ou can select the display language for some functions. S elec t menu item Language from the Sett ings menu. The available languages are displayed. Make the desired setting. 1) 2) GPS = G lo ba l P os itioning System , Satellite system for wo rld-wid e pos itioning . RDS = Rad io D ata S ys tem. Instru men ts, c ontrols 7 13 Languages 19,5° 19:36 X English 7 Settings Language Español Units Nederlands Contrast F rançais Day / Night Italiano 6 Ign. logic Selections are indicated by a 6 in front of the m enu item . In systems with voice output 3, w hen the language setting of the displa y is changed the system will ask whether the announcement language should also be changed – see Infotainment system instructions. 7 Contrast 19,5° 19:36 Time, Date German Select the desired language. 19,5° 19:36 ~ | | | Europe-SI Japan 12 Great Britain USA Setting unit s of m easur e You can select which units of measure are to be used . Select menu item U ni ts from the Settings menu. The ava ilab le units are display ed. Select the desired unit. Selections are indicated by a o in front of the menu item. 119 Ad just ing contra st 3 (Graphic al Inform ation Displ ay) S elec t menu item Cont rast from the Sett ings menu. The menu for Contr ast is disp layed . C onfirm the required setting . 120 In struments, controls Setti ng displa y mod e 3 The displa y ca n be adjusted to suit the light conditions, black or coloured tex t on a light back ground or white or coloured text on a dark background. Select menu item Day / N ight from the Setti ng s menu. The options are display ed. Autom atic: adapted based on vehicle lighting . Alw ays day design: black or coloured tex t on light backg round. Alw ays night desi gn: white or coloured tex t on dark b ackground . Selections are indicated by a o in front of the m enu item . Ig ni tion logic 3 Adjustment - see Infotainm ent system instructions. Ü Board Computer BC 1 BC 2 Timer 19,5° 19:36 All values 1 257.0 Ø 40 8 7.0 Ø 31.0 Tyres Range miles mph Aver. Consump. Inst. consumpt. 257 miles 31.0 miles/gal. 29.6 miles/gal. gal. miles/ gal. Graphic al Information Display 3 or Colour Information Display 3, trip computer 3 The trip computers provide information on driving data, which is continually recorded and ev alua ted electronically. The trip computer main page (Main) prov ides inform ation about ra ng e, averag e fuel consumption 3 and instantaneous consumption. To display other trip com puter data, press the BC button on the Infotainment sy stem 3, select the trip computer menu on the display or p ress the left adjuster wheel 3 on the steering wheel. 19,5° 23° 5 Eco x 19: 36 Ra ng e Range is calculated from current fuel tank content and instantaneous consumption. The display shows av erage values. After refuelling, the vehicle updates the range automatically a fter a brief delay . Instru men ts, c ontrols Di st ance trav ell ed Distance travelled display. Measurement may be reset to zero at any tim e and restarted - see " Resetting the trip computer information" . Ü Average speed Av erage speed display. Measurement may be reset to zero at any tim e and restarted - see " Resetting the trip computer information" . Range 2 9m iles If less than 30 miles (50 k m) can be driven with the fuel rema ining in the tank, the warning "Range" a ppears on the d isplay . If less than 20 miles (30 k m) can be driven with the fuel rema ining in the tank, the warning "Please refuel! " 3 appea rs on the display. At that point "Please refuel! " 3 will also be displa yed on the trip comp uter main pa ge (Ma in) instead of "Range" . Acknowled ge the menu item as desc rib ed on page 116. Instant aneous consump tion Display changes depending on speed : Display in gal/h below 8 mph (13 km/h) Display in mp g ab ov e 8 m ph (13 km /h) Effectiv e consum ption Fuel consumption display. Measurement may be reset to zero at any tim e and restarted - see " Resetting the trip computer information" . Average consumpt ion Av erage consump tion display . Measurement may be reset to zero at any tim e and restarted - see " Resetting the trip computer information" . 19,5° 19:36 All values BC 2 Timer 257.0 40 1 Ø 8 7.0 Ø 31.0 Tyres Stoppages in the journey with the ignition off are not includ ed in the calculations. OK Board Computer BC 1 121 miles mph gal. miles/ gal. Reset ting t he tr ip comp uter informat ion The following trip com puter inform ation can b e reset (restart measurements): z z z z Distance travelled, Average speed, Effective consum ption, Average consum ption. S elec t BC 1 or BC 2 from the trip computer menu. 122 In struments, controls Ü Reset BC 1 19,5° 19:36 Ø 257.0 40 7.0 Ø 31.0 Ü Reset BC 1 19,5° 19:36 All values All values m iles m ph gal. m iles/gal. The information from both trip computers can be reset separately , mak ing it possible to evaluate d ata over different time periods. Select the desired trip computer inform ation. The v alue for the selected function will b e reset and reca lculated. Ø 257.0 40 7.0 Ø 31.0 m iles m ph gal. m iles/gal. To reset all information of a trip computer, select m enu item All v alues. If trip computer information has been selected, " - - -" is displayed after a reset. The recalculated values are displayed a fter a brief delay . I nt err up tion of pow er supp ly If the power supp ly has been interrupted or if the battery voltage ha s dropped too low, the values stored in the trip computer w ill be lost. Instru men ts, c ontrols 123 The desired stop watch display c an be selected from the Opti ons menu 3: Ü Board Computer 19,5° 19:36 BC 1 BC 2 00:00:00 Timer Tyres Start Reset Options Stop wat ch Select menu item Timer from the Board Com puter menu. The Tim er menu is displayed. Dr iving Ti me excl. S tops The time the v ehicle is in m otion is recorded . Stationary tim e is not includ ed. Dr iving Ti me incl. S tops The time the v ehicle is in m otion is recorded . The tim e the vehicle is sta tionary with the key in the starter sw itc h is included. Tr avel Time Measurement of the time from manual activation via Sta rt to manual deactivation via Reset . Ü Board Computer BC 1 BC 2 Timer Tyres Display of current tyre pressure 3 S elec t menu item Tyr es from the Board C omputer menu. To start, selec t menu item St art. The current pressure of eac h ty re is displayed. To reset, selec t menu item Reset . Further information – see page 204. 124 In struments, controls Check control 3 Check control monitors several fluid levels, the ty re pressure 3, the remote control batteries, Vauxhall alarm system 3 a nd the main vehicle lighting systems, including the cables and fuses. When towing , the carava n/trailer lighting system is also monitored. O nce the ignition has been switched on, all check control functions a re automatically verified. Warning messa ges appear on the display. If there are severa l warning m essa ges, they are disp layed one after the other. Some inform ation appea rs on the displa y in an abb reviated form. Exa mples of warning messages for the Gra phic al Inform ation Display 3 and Colour Information Display 3 are shown. On the Board Inform ation Display , messages appear in an abb reviated form. Ac know ledge warning messages as described on pages 111, 116. Una cknowledged warning messages can be re-displayed later. Coolant level ch eck Warning messages: Remote C ontrol Bat ter y check Remote c ontrol battery voltage is too low – see p age 29. OK Brakelig ht switch chec k Fault. Brake light not illum inating w hen brak ing oc curs. H ave cause of fault remedied by a workshop immediately . Safeguard chec k Fault. Sy stem fault in Vaux hall alarm system. Have the cause of the fault rectified straight away by a workshop. Instru men ts, c ontrols If there is a fault in the v ehicle lighting system, the respec tiv e location of the fault is disp layed as tex t, e. g.: Brakelight check right If brak e light is defective, the relev ant tail light takes ov er the brake light function. In vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring system 3, if tyre pressure is too low, the display indicates which tyre to check, e.g .: Tyre pressure check rear right (v alue in bar) Check ty re pressure at next opportunity using suitable gauge. Tyre pressure monitoring sy stem 3 – see page 204. Checking tyre pressure – see p age 299. In vehicles with tyre p ressure control sy stem 3, if there is m ajor loss of pressure in a tyre, the d isplay indicates the tyre at fa ult, e.g .: Att enti on! Rear left t yre pressure l oss (val ue in b ar) Stop immediately and check ty re and ty re pressure. For ty re p ressure monitoring sy stem 3 – see page 204. 125 Wa sher Fluid Lev el chec k Fluid level in windscreen wash sy stem too low. Topping up wash fluid – see page 279. Rear window wash system and headlight wash system 3 are dea ctiv ated if wash fluid lev el is low. Coolant lev el chec k Fluid level in eng ine cooling sy stem is low. C heck c oolant level immed iately – see page 274. I nt err up tion of pow er supp ly S tored warning messages appea r on the display one after the other. 126 In struments, controls Push stalk p ast resistance point and hold : the wind screen wiper stages are run throug h; an acoustic signal sound s a t position §. Warning buzzers When sta rting t he engine or whil st driv ing: z If seat belt is not fastened 3. Adjusta ble timed interv al wipe $ : Adjuster wheel right = short interv als Adjuster wheel left = long intervals z When driving with a door open or the lugga ge c om partment a ja r. z Once you have reached a certain speed if the handbrake is applied 3. Press the stalk down from position §: S ingle swipe. z If a specified max imum speed is exceed ed 3. z In the case of Easy tronic 3 if A, M or R is selected while the engine is running a nd the driver’s door is opened but the footbrake is not depressed. When t he v ehi cle is park ed and the driv er’s door is opened: z When the key is in the starter switch 3 . z With parking lig hts or dipped beam switched on. z In the case of Easytronic 3, if the handb ra ke is not applied a nd no gear is engaged when the engine is off. Windscreen wiper To activate, gently push stalk upward s. § $ % & = = = = Off Ad justable timed interval wipe Slow Fast The stalk alway s moves bac k to the starting position. To select next higher or low er stage: move stalk slig htly . Instru men ts, c ontrols Autom atic w iping with ra in sensor 3: To activate, gently push stalk upwards. § $ = = Off Autom atic wiping with rain sensor The rain sensor detects the am ount of water on the windscreen a nd automatically controls the windscreen wiper. Adjust the sensitiv ity of the system using the adjuster wheel: Adjuster wheel right = Adjuster wheel left = High sensitivity Low sensitivity Keep sensor area of rain sensor clean by opera ting the windscreen wash system . Wi nd sc reen wa sh syst em and headl ight wash system 3 To activate, pull sta lk towards steering wheel. The wiper is switched on for severa l wipe op erations. A single after-wipe occurs at speeds of up to 80 mph (130 k m/h). The head lig ht wash system 3 is rea dy for op eration when the headlights are switched on. Wash fluid is sprayed onto the headlights once. Then the head lig ht wash sy stem is disa bled for 2 m inutes. On vehicles fitted w ith ra in sensor 3, keep the sensor area c lean by operating the wash system regularly. 127 Rear w indow w iper 3 a nd rear wi nd ow w ash system s 3 Push stalk forwards to switch on. The rear window w iper swipes in timed interva l mode. The tailgate w ip er switches on automatically when the wind screen wiper is switched on and reverse gear is eng aged. Push stalk forwards aga in to switch off. The rear window w ash system will rem ain on for as long as the stalk is held in the forward position. The rear window w ash system is deactivated when the fluid level is low. 128 Ligh ting Lighting Model variants with daytim e running lights 3: Parking lig hts are on when the ignition is switched on and the light switch is set to 7 or AUTO. Dipped bea m is on when the engine is running. The day time running lights switch off when the ignition is switched off. Ex terior lights .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Main beam, headlight flash . .... .... ..... . Autom atic dipped b eam ac tiv ation 3 Turn signal lights . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Front fog lights > 3 ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Fog tail light r .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Reversing lights.... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Haza rd warning lights.. .... ..... .... .... ..... . Headlight range adjustment ? .... ..... . Adaptive Forw ard Lighting (AFL) 3 . . Door-to-door lighting 3 ... ..... .... .... ..... . Parking lights .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Instrument illum ination k, information display illumination ..... . Courtesy lig ht .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Battery discharge p rotection.... .... ..... . Light covers. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Headlights w hen driving abroad . ..... . 128 129 129 130 130 131 131 131 131 132 133 134 134 134 136 136 136 Follow the regula tions of the country in which you are driving w hen using da ytime running lig hts and front fog lights 3. Exterior lights Turn light switch: 7 8 9 = = = Off Park ing lights Dip ped or main beam In positions 8 and 9, the tail lights a nd numb er plate lights are also on. Control indica tor 8 – see page 100. If the ignition is switched off with the dipped bea m or main b eam on, the parking lights illuminate 3. The rear lights of the Estate automatically switch themselv es off after 10 minutes if the luggag e compa rtm ent is open and the vehicle is stationary . Driving ab road – see pag e 136. Lightin g 129 To activate the hea dlight fla sh, pull stalk tow ards steering wheel. Ma in beam is engaged for the d uration of activation. The blue control ind ic ator C is illuminated when main b eam or headlight flash is on. Main beam, headlight flash To switch from dipped to main b eam, press stalk forwards. To switch to dipped beam, p ush stalk forwards again or pull towards steering wheel. Automatic dipped beam activation 3 Light sw itch to AUTO: Dip ped beam switches on or off autom atically when the eng ine is running based on outside light conditions. The exterior lights are turned off by removing the ignition key. For reasons of safety , the lig ht switch should always rem ain in the AUTO position. In poor v isibility such as fog, turn the light switch to 9. 130 Ligh ting After operation, the turn signal stalk returns to its sta rting p osition. If the stalk is moved pa st the resistance point, the turn signal lig ht remains on. When the steering wheel moves ba ck tow ards the straig ht-ahead position, the turn signal light is autom atically deactiv ated. Ta p signa l: Move sta lk to resista nce point and release to activ ate three flashes from the turn signals when c ha nging lanes or the lik e. Turn signal lights To activate, press stalk up or down. Stalk up = Stalk down = R ig ht Left Move the stalk to the resistance point and hold for the turn signals to flash longer. Switch the turn signal off manually by moving the stalk slightly. Front fog lights > 3 The front fog lights can only be switched on when both the ignition and lights a re on. On = O ff = Press >, > illuminates in instrum ent cluster Press > aga in or switch off ig nition or light. Lightin g 131 Fog tail light r The fog ta il light can only be sw itc hed on when the ig nition is on and dipp ed bea m or parking lights a re on or if the light switch is in the A UTO 3 position and dipped beam is active. On = O ff = Press >, > illuminates in instrument cluster Press > again or switch off ignition or light. The fog ta il light on the vehicle is deactivated when towing a caravan/ trailer. Reversin g lights Illuminate when rev erse gear is enga ged and ignition is switched on. Hazard warning lights To ac tiv ate, p ress button ¨, to deac tiv ate press button ¨ again. To aid location of the pushb utton, the red surface is illuminated when the ignition is switched on. When the button is pressed, its control indicator flashes in time with the ha zard warning lights. The hazard warning lig hts switch on autom atic ally when the airbags are trigg ered , and the central locking unlocks all doors. Switch off hazard wa rning lights with button ¨ . Headlight range adjustment ? Ma nua l hea dlight range adj ustm ent 3 With dipped beam switched on, adjust hea dlight range in four steps to suit vehic le load. Turn wheel a gainst resistance a nd click it to the required position. C orrect adjustm ent of the headlight range reduc es dazz le for other road users. Automatic level control system 3 see page 204. 6 132 Ligh ting Vehicles without autom atic lev el control system 0 = 1 = 2 = 3 = Front seats occupied All seats occupied All seats occupied a nd lug gage compartment loa d Driv er’s seat oc cup ied and lug gage compartment loa d Vehicles with automatic level control system 3 0 = 1 = 1 = 2 = Front seats occupied All seats occupied All seats occupied a nd lug gage compartment loa d Driv er’s seat oc cup ied and lug gage compartment loa d Autom atic headlight ra ng e adj ust ment 3 O n vehicles w ith Xenon headlights, the range of the head lig hts is adjusted automatically based on vehicle load. Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL) 3 On vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlights, AFL improves illumination of: z C urves (curv e lighting), z Intersec tions and tight turns (turn lig hting). Curve lig hting The Xenon light bea m pivots based on steering wheel position a nd speed (from approx. 6 m ph / 10 km /h). The head lig hts shine at an a ngle of up to 15° to the right or left of the direction of tra vel. Turn lig hting An add itional light illuminates at certain steering w heel settings (a fter approx. 90°), turn signal settings and speeds (up to app rox . 25 mph / 40 k m/h). The lig ht shines approx. 90° to the left or right of the v ehicle and approx. 30 m etres to the front. Mot or way lighti ng At higher speeds and continuous straight ahead travel, the dipped bea m automatically raises slightly, thereby increa sing hea dlight rang e. Lightin g 133 If the d riv er’s d oor is left op en, the lights will go out after two minutes. The lig ht is switched off im media tely b y inserting the key into the ignition or pulling the turn signal stalk aga in with the driv er’s door open. Cont rol indica tor B Flashing: Fault in sy stem. The sy stem is not rea dy for opera tion. If the curv e lighting swivelling device fails, the relev ant dipped bea m is sw itc hed off. The c orresponding fog light is automatically switched on for reasons of safety. Contact a workshop. Flashing of control indicator B for approx . 4 seconds after switching on the ignition rem inds you that the head lights hav e been adjusted - see " Head lig hts when driving abroad" on page 136. Door-to-door ligh ting 3 The dipped beam a nd the reversing lights illuminate for app rox . 30 seconds after the driver has exited the vehicle and closed his door. To activ ate 1. Sw itch off ignition. 2. Remove ignition key. 3. O pen driv er’s door. 4. Pull turn signal stalk towards steering wheel. 5. C lose driver’s door. 134 Ligh ting Parking lights The front p arking lig ht and tail light of one side of the vehicle can be activ ated w hen parking: 1. Set light switch to 7 or AUTO 3 . 2. Ignition off. 3. Move turn signal sta lk all the way up (right parking light) or down (left parking lig ht). An acoustic signal sound s a nd control indicator O illuminates briefly in the instrument cluster to indica te activ ation. Remove the ignition key b efore lea ving the vehic le. To switch it off, sw itch on the ignition or move the turn signal sta lk in the opposite direc tion. In strument illumination k, information display illum ination Brig htness can be adjusted when the exterior lights are on: Press to release knob k and then turn it cloc kwise or anticlockwise and hold until the desired brightness is obtained. Display mode 3 – see page 120. Courtesy light Front courtesy l ight Illuminates automatically when the vehicle is unlocked with the remote control, when a door is opened or when the key is removed from the starter sw itch a fter the ignition is switched off. Extinguishes a utomatica lly with d elay after the doors are closed or im mediately w hen the ig nition is switched on or the doors are locked. Front courtesy l ight Manual operation from inside with doors closed: On O ff = = Press button c Press button c again Lightin g 135 Entry l ighting 3 After unlocking the v ehicle, the instrument and switch illumination as well as the courtesy lig hts illuminate for a few seconds. I lluminat ed mirror i n the sunvi sors 3 The lig hting switches on when the cover is opened. Glov e c ompar tment lig ht ing Glove compartment is illuminated when lid is open a nd ignition on. C igarette lig hter and ashtra y ill uminati on 3 Illuminates when ignition is switched on. Front reading l ights 3 Left and right reading lights are individually operable. With ignition on: On O ff = = Press button Press button a. a a gain Courtesy lig hts and rear read ing light s 3 Centre sw itc h position: The rear courtesy lig ht illum ina tes together with the front one when a d oor is opened. The rear reading lights on the left and right can be switched on separately. With ignition on: On Off = = Switch position I Switch position 0 Luggag e c ompart ment light ing 3 Illuminates when the luggage compa rtm ent/tailga te is opened. Autom atica lly reg ul ated centre console lig hting 3 S potlight in housing of interior m irror. Day lig ht-dependent, automatically regula ted centre console lighting with ignition switched on. 136 Ligh ting Vehicles w ith Adap tive For ward Light ing (AFL) 3 1. Open fusebox cover in engine compartment - see page 250. Battery discharge protectio n Headlights when driving abroad To prevent the battery from bec om ing discharged, the courtesy light, reading lights, lug gage compartment lighting a nd glove compartment lighting switch off automatically 5 minutes after the ignition is switched off. The asymm etrical dipped b eam increases the field of v ision on the p assenger sid e of the lane. This c auses glare for oncoming tra ffic if the vehicle is driven in countries where traffic drives on the opp osite side of the road. 2. Insert any fuse (max i-fuse) 3 in slot 37. Fuse a ssignment – see page 251. Light covers Do as follows to prevent glare: 4. Switch on ignition. The inside of the light covers ma y become misted up for a short period during unfa vourab le weather conditions, heavy rain or after washing the vehicle. The misting disa ppears automatically after a short time, b ut c an be speeded up by switching the lights on. Vehicles wit h halogen - headlig ht system or Xenon headlig ht system w ithout Adapt ive For ward Lig ht ing (AFL) 3 Have the workshop c onvert the headlights. 3. Close fusebox. Then the AFL control ind icator B flashes for 4 seconds whenev er the ignition is switched on. C ontrol indicator B - see pages 104, 133. Info tainment system Infotainment system 137 Radio reception 3 Vehicle radio reception differs from domestic radio reception: As the v ehicle antenna is relatively near the ground, the broadcasting compa nies cannot g uarantee the sa me quality of reception a s obtained with a d om estic ra dio using an ov erhead antenna. Radio reception 3 .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Infotainm ent system 3 . .... ..... .... .... ..... . Remote control on steering wheel 3 . . Twin Audio 3 .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . AUX input 3 .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Electronic data ac quisition at toll sy stems 3.. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Mobile telephones a nd radio equipment 3. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 137 137 137 138 138 138 139 z C hanges in distance from the transm itter, z multi-path rec eption due to reflection and z sha dowing may c ause hissing , noise, distortion or loss of reception a ltogether. In fotain men t system 3 The Infotainm ent system is operated as described in the operating instructions. Remo te control o n steering wheel 3 The functions of the Infotainment system 3 and the informa tion display can be operated w ith the adjuster wheels and buttons on the steering wheel. Further information – see pages 111, 116 and the relevant opera ting instruc tions. 138 In fotain men t system Twin Audio 3 Twin Audio provides rear seat occupa nts with the opportunity to listen to a different audio source than the one selected by the driver on the Infotainment system 3. O nly an audio source that is not currently active on the I nfotainment system can be controlled using Twin Audio. Two headphone connections are availab le, with separate volume controls. AUX inpu t 3 The AUX input is in the stowa ge compartment in the centre console. An externa l audio source such as a porta ble C D player can be connected via the AUX input using a 3.5 m m jack. Keep AUX inp ut clean and dry at all times. Further inform ation is av ailable in the Infotainment sy stem opera ting instructions. Electronic data acquisition at toll systems 3 In v ehicles with hea t-reflecting windscreen 1) 3 attach chipcard 3 for electronic da ta record ing and fee pay ment in black area of windscreen on left or righthand side behind the interior mirror see arrows in illustration. Attaching the chipcard outside this area ma y cause data record ing malfunctions. Further information is available in the Infotainm ent system operating instructions. 1) Sola r Reflect. Info tainment system Mobile telephones and radio equipment 3 The Vauxhall installa tion instructions and the operating guidelines p rov id ed by the telephone manufa cturer m ust be observed when fitting and operating a m ob ile telephone. Failure to d o so could invalida te the vehicle’s operating perm it (EU Directiv e 95/54/EG). Recommended prerequisites for fault-free opera tion: z Professionally installed exterior a ntenna to ob ta in the max imum range possible. z Maximum transmission power 10 Watt. z Installation of the telephone in a suitab le spot (see informa tion on pag e 89). O btain advice on pred eterm ined installation locations for the ex ternal antenna and equipment holder and w ays of using devices with transmission power of more tha n 10 Watts. We recommend that you consult y our Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who will ha ve brackets and various installation kits available as accessories and w ill install them in accordance with reg ulations. A hand s-free attachment without an externa l antenna in mobile phone standards GS M 900/1800/1900 and UMTS must only be operated if the ma ximum tra nsmission power of the mobile phone does not exceed 2 Watts w ith GSM 900 a nd 1 Watt in other cases. The operating regulations stipulated by the manufa cturer of the telephone and the hands-free attachment must be complied with. 139 For reasons of safety, we recommend that y ou d o not use the phone whilst driving. Even use of a hands-free set can be a distraction whilst driving. Be sure to observe any country-spec ific regulations. 9 Warnin g Mobile phones and ra dio equip ment may cause malfunctions in the vehicle electronics if they are op erated in the vehicle without the ex ternal antenna unless the above-m entioned regulations are c om plied with. Mobile p hones that do not com ply with the abov e-mentioned mobile phone standard and radio equipment must only be op erated using an antenna tha t is attached to the exterior of the v ehicle. 140 Climate c ontrol Climate control Heating and ventila tion system, air cond itioning system 3 ... ..... .... .... ..... . Autom atic air conditioning sy stem 3 Electronic Climate Control 3 . .... .... ..... . Air vents .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Cooled glove compartment 3 .. .... ..... . Heated rear window, heated ex terior mirrors ... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Heated front seats 3 .... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Heated rear seats 3 ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Driver’ s seat with climate control 3 .. . Heating and ventila tion system ... ..... . Air conditioning system 3 ..... .... .... ..... . Autom atic air conditioning sy stem 3 Electronic Climate Control 3 . .... .... ..... . Auxiliary heating /ventilation 3 .... ..... . Air intake . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Air outlet.. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Pollen filter .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Note .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Maintenance ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 140 141 141 142 143 143 144 144 144 145 148 150 156 163 166 166 166 166 167 Heating and ventilation system, air conditioning system 3 Ventilation, heating and cooling 3 a re combined into one unit that is d esigned to prov ide com fort regardless of the season, weather or outside temperature. When cooling 3 is activated, the air is cooled and dried. The heating unit heats the air a s required in all operating m od es depending on the position of the tempera ture rotary knob. The air supply ca n be adjusted to suit requirements by means of the fan. Vehicles without a n air conditioning system do not have buttons for cooling n, air recircula tion 4 or dem isting and defrosting V. Air conditioning system 3 – see page 148. Climate control 141 The set values ap pear on the information display. Electronic Clima te C ontrol 3 – see page 156. Automatic air conditioning system 3 Provides a comfortab le interior regardless of the w eather, outside temperature or season. When an interior temperature is set with the temperature control, the temperature and am ount of inflowing air are automatically regulated. A uniform, comfortable climate in the vehic le is thereby automatically obtained b ased on outside climate conditions. Autom atic air conditioning sy stem 3 – see page 150. Electronic Climate Control 3 Offers the g reatest comfort in the vehicle interior regardless of the c onditions outside. To ensure a uniform and comfortable climate in the vehic le, the tem perature of inflowing air, air-flow rate and a ir distribution are a utomatica lly adapted based on the climate cond itions outside the vehicle and the current tem perature of the vehicle interior. 142 Climate c ontrol Air vents Pleasant ventilation to the head area controlled by the position of the tem perature rotary knob. To increase the air supply, set the fan to a higher speed a nd set the a ir distribution rotary knob to M. Centre and sid e air vents (1) To open air vent: Turn vertical adjuster wheel up. Adjust the direction of airflow by turning the horiz ontal and v ertical adjuster wheels. To close the air v ents, turn the adjustm ent wheel fully downwards. Wi nd sc reen defroster nozzles (2) Air distribution rotary knob to l or J: Air flows onto windsc reen a nd door windows. Addit ional air vents Ad ditional air vents ca n be found b eneath the wind screen and the door windows, a nd also in the footwell. Rear a ir vents 3 To open air vent: Turn v ertical ad juster wheel all the way up. Adjust quantity of air by rotating the control wheel. The airflow can be directed as desired by tilting and swivelling the slats. To close the air vents turn the a djustment wheel fully downward s. If the rear seats are unoccupied close the rear noz zles to increase the air supply at the front. Climate control 143 Heating takes place with the engine running and is switched off autom atically after approximately 15 minutes. The heated rear w indow autom atically switches on if the diesel particle filter 3 is being cleaned. Cooled glove c ompartmen t 3 Cooled air is fed into the glove compartment through a noz zle. If glove compa rtm ent cooling is not needed , turn the wheel downwards. Heated rear window, heated exterio r mirrors With the ignition on, the rear w indow and exterior mirror heating is sw itched on by pressing b utton Ü: LED in the button Ü illuminated: Rear w indow and ex terior mirror heating turned on. LED in the button Ü extinguished: Rear w indow and ex terior mirror heating turned off. 144 Climate c ontrol Heated front seats 3 Heated rear seats 3 Two knurled wheels beneath the centre air vent for the left a nd right-hand seats. Tw o buttons at rear of centre console in front of the rear seats. Turn relevant wheel to set required heating lev el. When the ignition is switched on, the heating of the corresponding seat is activated by pressing the button ß. Control indica tor above adjustm ent wheel. We d o not recommend prolong ed use of the highest level for people with sensitive skin. To switch off, set wheel to 0. Seat hea ting is operational when the ignition is on. Driver’s seat with c limate con trol 3 K nurled wheel at driver’s side below centre air v ents. Move knurled wheel to required ventilation or hea ting setting as per requirements. LED in the button ß on: Seat heating on. C ontrol ind icator ab ov e adjustm ent wheel. LED in the button ß off: Seat heating off. We do not recomm end prolonged use of the highest heating lev el for people w ith sensitiv e skin. The outboard rea r seats are heated. To switch off, set wheel to 0. Function only av ailable with ignition switched on. Climate control Heatin g and ventilation system Air d istributi on Setting with the left rotary knob. L M l J K To head area via adjustable air v ents, to footw ell To head area via adjustable air v ents To w indscreen and front door w indows To windscreen, front d oor windows a nd footwell To footwell O pen the air v ents w hen the rotary knob is set to L or M. Tem per ature Setting with the central rotary knob . Airfl ow S etting with the right rotary knob . Red area Blue area Four fan speeds: = = Warm Cold x 1-4 145 Off Selected fan sp eed The ra te of airflow is determined by the fan. The fan should therefore also be switched on d uring a journey . 146 Climate c ontrol Hea ting The amount of heat is dependent on the coolant temperature and is thus not fully attained until the engine is warm. The c om fort and general well-being of the vehicle occupants are to a large extent dependent on a suitab le v entilation a nd hea ting setting. For rapid warming of the p assenger compartment: z Set a ir distrib ution rotary knob to desired position, preferab ly position J see page 145. To obtain tem perature stratification in the vehicle w ith a pleasant "cool head and warm feet" effect, mov e the rotary air distribution rotary knob to K or J , move the temperature rotary knob to the central position a nd open the centre air vents. z Turn the temperature rota ry knob clockwise as far as it will go (warm). z Set the fan to speed 3. Vent ilation z For max imum ventilation in head area: Set air distribution rota ry knob to M, op en all v ents. z For ventila tion to footwell: Set air distribution rotary knob to K. z For simultaneous ventilation to the hea d area and the footwell: set air distrib ution rotary knob to L. z Set the tem perature to the desired setting. z Switch fan on, adjust fan setting as desired. z O pen air vents. Vehicles with Quickheat 3: Depend ing on the outside tem perature and engine temp erature, the passenger compartment can be heated more quick ly by m eans of supplementary electrical heating. The auxiliary electric heater switches itself on a utoma tica lly . Climate control 147 z Turn the temp erature rotary knob clockwise as far as it w ill go (warm). z Set the fan rotary k nob to 3 or 4. z Activate heated rear w indow Ü. z Open sid e air vents as required and direct them towards the d oor w indows. Heating the foot well z Set air distribution rota ry knob to K . z Set the tem perature rotary knob to the red zone. z Switch on fan. Wi nd ow demi st ing and d efrosting 9 Warning Disregard of the instructions could lead to misting or icing of the w indows and sub sequent accidents due to imp aired visibility. Misted or icy windows, such as in dam p weather, from wet clothes or when outsid e temperatures are low : z Move air distribution rotary knob to l. z For simultaneous warming of the footwell, set air distrib ution rotary k nob to J . 148 Climate c ontrol Air conditioning system 3 As a supplement to the heating and ventilation system, the air c onditioning system c ools and dehumidifies (dries) inflowing air. If cooling or dehum id ification is not desired, switch off cooling in order to sa ve fuel. Cooling switches off autom atically at low outside tem peratures. Cooling n Operation only with engine running and fa n switched off: On = Press n Off = Press n a gain Air rec irculati on system 4 The air recirculation button 4 is used to set the ventilation system in a ir recirc ulation mode (control indica tor in the button). Control indica tor in the button. If fumes or unpleasa nt od ours penetrate from outside: temporarily switch on air recirc ulation system 4. Climate control 149 The switched -on a ir recirculation sy stem red uces air repla cement. The humidity increases and the windows may mist up. The q uality of the interior air d eteriorates over time, which may cause drowsiness. Comfort sett ing z Set cooling n as desired. z Air rec irculation system 4 off. Ma xim um cooling O pen w indows and sunroof 3 briefly so that warm air can esca pe rap idly. z Set air distribution rotary knob to M or L. z Cooling n on. z Set air distribution rotary knob to M. z Set tem perature rotary knob as desired. z Turn the temp erature rotary knob antic lock wise as far as it will go (c old). z Sw itch on fan a t desired speed z O pen air vents as required . Temperature rotary k nob in centre of adjustment range: warmer air will flow into the footwell and cooler air into the upper zone, with warm er air coming from the side air vents and cooler air from the centre air vents. z Set fa n rotary knob to 4. z Open all air v ents. The sy stem will switch automatically to a ir recirc ulation mode. 150 Climate c ontrol z C ooling n on, the air conditioning compressor autom atically switches itself off at low outsid e tempera tures (icing). z Press button V: The fan w ill automatically switch to 4, air distribution directed on to the windsc reen. z Turn the temperature rota ry knob clockwise. z O pen side air vents as required and direct them towa rd s d oor w indows. z Sw itch on heated rear window Ü. Window dem isting a nd defrosting 9 Warning Failure to follow the instructions could lead to m isted or icy windows a nd accidents stemming from impaired visibility. Misted or ic y windows, such as in damp weather, from wet clothes or w hen outside tem peratures are low: To switch off, press button V aga in; the air c onditioning w ill operate at the settings selected previously. Automatic air co nditio ning system 3 Provides a uniformly comfortab le interior regardless of the weather, outside temperature or season. To ensure a constant and com fortable climate in the vehicle, the temperature of the inflowing air and the air-flow rate are changed automatically based on clima te conditions outsid e the vehicle. Temperature changes due to ex ternal influences, such as direct sunlight, are automatically compensated . Climate control Autom atic m ode Basic setting for max imum comfort: z Set fan rotary knob to A. z Set air d istribution rota ry k nob to desired position – see nex t column. z Use rotary knob to set temperature to 22 °C (a higher or lower tem perature can be set as desired). z Air conditioning compressor activation – see pa ge 152. z All front air vents op en. If d esired, the rear air v ents also 3. Dea ctivation of the air conditioning compressor ca n reduce the level of comfort and safety – see pag e 152. Air distri bution Setting with the left rotary k nob. L To head area via adjustable air vents, to footwell M To head area via adjustable air vents l To windscreen and front d oor windows J To windsc reen, front door windows and footwell K To footw ell Intermediate settings are possible. Open the air vents w hen the air distribution rotary knob is set to L or M. 151 Temperat ur e p reset S etting with the centre rotary knob . S et the rotary knob to a value between 17 °C and 27 ° C. Intermed iate settings are possible. The selected tem perature is m ainta ined. For reasons of com fort, temperature can only be changed in small increments. There is no temperature control for setting s below 17 °C (all the way left) or above 27 °C (a ll the way right). The air conditioning sy stem works at ma ximum cooling or heating. 152 Climate c ontrol When the cooling (air conditioning compressor) is ac tiv e, the air is cooled and dehum idified. I f cooling or dehum idifica tion is not desired , switch off cooling in order to sav e fuel. C ooling switches off automatically a t low outside temperatures. Airflow Setting with the right rotary k nob. 1 - 4 M anual fan speed setting, interm ediate settings are p ossib le A Automatic fan speed c ontrol x Fan off To activ ate/dea ctiv ate air c ond itioning compressor (c ooling) n Operation only with engine running and fa n switched off: On = Press n Off = Press n again The fan sp eed regulates the rate of airflow that is needed to maintain the preselected tem perature. Control indica tor in the button. Select automatic m ode for the hig hest lev el of comfort. When the fan is off, the air conditioning compressor is also off. Climate control 153 The exchange of fresh air is reduced in air recirculation mode. The quality of the passenger compa rtm ent air deteriorates whic h may c ause the v ehicle occ upa nts to feel drow sy . In operation w ithout cooling , the air humidity increases, so the windows may mist up. Consequently, manual air recirculation should only be run for short periods of time. To deactiv ate m anual air recirculation: Press button 4 ag ain. The control indica tor in the button extinguishes. Manual air recirc ulation m ode The a ir recirculation sy stem minimises the entry of outside air and the air in the passenger com partment is circulated . Ventilati on z For m aximum v entilation in head area: set air distrib ution rotary knob to M and open all a ir vents. Press button 4 , control indica tor in button. z For v entilation to footwell: Set air distribution rota ry knob to K . z For sim ultaneous ventilation to the head area and the footwell: set a ir distribution rotary knob to L . z Set desired temperature. z Set fa n rotary knob to A. The fan can also be ma nually set: Set the rotary knob to position 1 - 4. Interm ediate settings are a lso possible. 154 Climate c ontrol Heating The a mount of heat is dependent on the coolant temp erature a nd is thus not fully attained until the engine is w arm. For ra pid warming of the passenger compartment: z Set the air distribution rotary knob to the desired p osition – see page 145. z Set the centre rotary knob to the desired temperature. We recommend a value of about 22 °C . z Set fan rotary knob to A. The fan can also be manually set: Set the rotary knob to position 1 - 4. Intermediate settings are also possible. Vehicles with Quickheat 3: Depend ing on the outside tem perature and engine temp erature, the passenger compartment can be heated more quick ly by m eans of supplementary electrical heating. The auxiliary electric heater switches itself on a utoma tica lly . The comfort and general well-b eing of the vehicle occupants a re to a large extent dependent on a suitable ventilation and heating setting. To ob ta in temperature stratification in the vehicle with a pleasa nt "cool head and warm feet" effect, move the rotary air distribution rotary knob to K or J, m ov e the rotary tempera ture rotary knob to approx. 22° and open the centre air vents. Ma xim um cooling for very hot interior O pen w indows and sunroof 3 briefly so that warm air can esca pe rap idly. z Cooling n on. z Set air distribution rotary knob to M. z Set the temperature rota ry knob to the desired temperature. z Set fa n rotary knob to A. z Open all air v ents. Climate control 155 z Press b utton V: In fan rota ry knob position A, the fan automatically switches to the highest sp eed and air is directed to the wind screen. The a utomatic air conditioning system provides max imum cooling down to the set value. At settings below 17 °C (rotary knob all the way to the left), the system continually runs with max imum cooling. When the air conditioning c om pressor is running, air recirculation is autom atically switched on. z Set temperature to m aximum heating , i.e. turn the centre rota ry knob all the way to the right (28 °C ). z Switch on heated rear window Ü. To switch off, press button V again; the automatic a ir cond itioning system w ill operate at the settings selected previously . Dem ist ing and defr ost ing the window s 9 Warning Failure to follow the instructions could lead to misted or icy windows and accidents stemming from impa ired visibility. Misted or icy windows, such as in dam p weather, from wet clothes or when outsid e temperatures are low : z C ooling n on - the AC compressor deactivates a utomatically when outside temperatures are low (icing). 156 Climate c ontrol Electronic Climate Control 3 Provides the greatest amount of comfort in the interior regardless of the weather, outside tem perature or season. FM To ensure constant and comfortable climate in the v ehicle, the tempera ture of the inflowing air, the air-flow rate a nd the air distrib ution are cha nged automatically according to clim atic conditions outside the v ehicle. The a ir is a utomatica lly regulated in accordance with the settings personally selected for the driver’ s a nd front passenger’s sides. Tem perature cha ng es due to externa l influences, such as direct sunlig ht, are automatically compensated. Data is show n on the informa tion display . Setting modifications are briefly shown in the information display, superim posed over the currently display ed menu. The display can vary ac cord ing to the type of presentation – see p age 108. Electronic Climate Control settings are stored in the vehicle key when the vehicle is locked - see "S toring c ustom vehicle settings in the vehicle key" - see page 28. [TP] ��� Different settings are stored for each remote control. Use of a remote c ontrol will activate the settings associated with it. Manua l settings e.g. operating without cooling and a ir distrib ution c an be selected using the menu - see pag e 158. When cooling (air conditioning compressor) is active, a ir is cooled and dehumidified. The pollen filter removes d ust, soot, pollen and spores from the inflowing outside air. C Din 90.6 MHz The autom atic air rec irculation system 3 has an air quality sensor 3 to detect harmful a mbient gases, in which case it will switch automatically to a ir recirculation. When set to automa tic mode, Electronic C lim ate C ontrol p rov id es the optima l settings for almost all conditions. If nec essary , Electronic Climate C ontrol settings can be modified manually. The Elec tronic C limate Control is only operational w hen the engine is running. C ooling (air conditioning compressor) switches off autom atically at low outside temperatures. Climate control The temperature c an be set higher or lower as desired. Different tem peratures can b e set for the driver’s and front passenger’ s sides. Switching off the air conditioning compressor (Eco app ears on the display) can have a detrimental effect on comfort and safety - see page 160. All air vents (ex cept the rea r air vents 3 ) are controlled automa tic ally in automatic mode. The front air vents should therefore always be open. Autom atic m ode Basic setting for max imum comfort: z Press AUTO button. z Open all front a ir vents. If d esired, the rear air v ents also 3. z Air conditioning compressor activation – see pa ge 160. z Ind ividually set temperature for the driv er’s and front passenger’s side to 22 °C using the outer knobs. 157 Autom atic air recircul ation system 3 The ventilation sy stem is set to air recirc ulation mode and interior a ir is recirc ulated. The automatic air recircula tion system has an air qua lity sensor to d etect harmful gases in the outside air, in whic h case it will switch automatically to a ir recirculation. At low outsid e temperatures and with the cooling (air conditioning c om pressor) switched off, automa tic air recirculation operation w ill be d isabled. This prev ents the wind ow s from misting up. Switch ma nually to air recirculation as necessary. Activating/deac tiv ating autom atic air recirc ulation system – see page 161. Manual air recirculation m ode – see page 162. 158 Climate c ontrol Temperature pr eset Using the outer k nobs, temperatures can be indiv id ua lly set to va lues between 16 °C and 28 °C. For reasons of comfort, tempera ture can only be changed in sm all increments. FM [TP] ��� C Din 90.6 MHz Climate Air distribut. AC Autom. blower Auto. recirc Vehicles with Q uic kheat 3 : Dep ending on the outside temperature and engine temperature, the p assenger compartment can be heated more quickly by mea ns of supplementary electrical heating. The a ux ilia ry electric hea ter switches itself on automatically. If a temperature below 16 °C is set, Lo appears on the display: the Electronic Clim ate C ontrol system runs constantly at max imum cooling power. The temperature is not regulated . If a temperature ab ov e 28 °C is set, Hi appea rs on the display : the Electronic Clim ate C ontrol runs constantly at max imum heating power. The temp erature is not regulated . Tem perature settings are stored when the ignition is switched off. Common tempera ture setting Press the knob for the driver’s sid e. The temperature for both the driver’ s and front passenger’s side can be set together using the knob on the driver’s side. Ma nua l set tings Under certain circumstances (e.g. iced or misted windows), the func tions of the Electronic Climate C ontrol can be m od ified ma nually. Individual tem perature settings Press the knob for the front passenger’s side. Tempera tures c an be set independ ently of each other using the knob s on the driver’ s and front p assenger’s sides. Electronic Clima te C ontrol system settings can b e changed via the centre knob, the buttons a nd the menus shown on the display. The tem perature on both the driver’s and front passenger’ s side are shown in the display . For reasons of comfort, the tempera tures cannot d iffer by m ore than 2 °C . Press the centre knob to call up the m enu. The menu for manual Electronic Clima te C ontrol system settings app ears on the display. Climate control Air distribut. FM [TP] ��� C Din 90.6 MHz The a irflow can be increased or decreased by turning the central k nob. To return to automatic m ode: press button V or AUTO . Heated rear w indow - see page 143. Auxiliary heating 3 - see page 163. The individ ual menu items are highlighted by rota ting the centre knob and selected by pressing it. Selecting certain menus by pressing the knob will open a submenu. To ex it a m enu, turn the centre knob left or right to Return or Ma in and select. Manual settings are stored when the ignition is switched off. Wi nd ow demi st ing and d efrosting 9 Warning Failure to follow the instructions could lead to misted or icy windows and accidents stemming from impa ired visibility. Misted or icy windows, such as in dam p weather, from wet clothes or when outsid e temperatures are low : Press button V, c ontrol indicator in button. Temperature and a ir distribution setting s are m ade autom atically, the fan runs at a high speed (fan speed is indicated on the display ) and the wind ow s a re quickly cleared of moisture and ice. 159 160 Climate c ontrol Climate Air distribut. AC Autom. blower Auto. recirc Air conditioning on / off Inflowing air is neither cooled nor dehumidified. This restricts the level of comfort provided by the Electronic C limate Control system . This may cause the wind ow s to m ist up, for exa mple. Air distribut. To activate cooling: Select m enu item AC from the manual settings menu and press to activate cooling. Acti vati ng and d eac tiva ting ai r condit ioning com pressor If no cooling or dehumidification is req uired, switch the a ir cond itioning compressor off (max im um energy sav ing s): Highlight menu item AC from the manua l settings menu and select by pressing the knob. Eco a ppears on the d isplay . Air distribut ion S elec t menu item Air d istribut. from the ma nual settings menu. Mak e the desired setting s in the Air di st ribut. menu: Up Midd le Down Air distribution towards windscreen and front door windows Air distribution to v ehicle occupants via a djustable air vents a t front Air distribution towards footwell Return to a utomatic air distribution: deactivate relevant setting or press button AUTO. Climate control FM [TP] ��� C Din 90.6 MHz Automatic blower Strong Normal Weak Climate Air distribut. AC Autom. blower Auto. recirc 161 Automatic recirculation air control at bad outside air Airflow Turn the centre rotary knob c lock wise or anticlockwise (if no menu for m anua l settings is d isplay ed). The selec ted fan lev el is indicated by x and numbers in the display. Fan c ont rol in autom atic mode 3 Fan regulation in a utomatic mode can be modified. Select menu item A ut omati c blow er from the manual settings menu a nd select the desired fan control. Sw itching autom atic air rec irculati on 3 on or off The automatic air recircula tion system has an air qua lity sensor to d etect harmful gases in the outside air, in whic h case it will switch automatically to a ir recirculation. At speed 0 both the fan a nd cooling (a ir conditioning c om pressor) are switc hed off. Depend ing on the setting, the maxim um airflow, and thereby the noise level, will increase. S elec t menu item Auto. r eci rc from the ma nual settings menu and switc h it on or off by pressing. To return to automatic mode: Press AUTO button. S witc h to manual air rec irculation as nec essary . 162 Climate c ontrol The air conditioning will operate for a limited period of tim e. Residual air conditioning on If necessa ry, the auxiliary heating 3 also automatically switches on. Observ e notes on page 163. To cancel air conditioning, press the A UTO button. Manual air recirc ulation m ode The a ir recirculation sy stem minimises the entry of outside air and the air in the passenger com partment is circulated . Press button 4 , control indica tor in button. The exchange of fresh air is reduced in air recirculation mode. The quality of the passenger com partment a ir deteriorates which may cause the vehicle occupants to feel drowsy. I n op eration without c ooling, the a ir humid ity increases, so the wind ow s may mist up. C onseq uently , m anual air recirculation should only be run for short periods of time. To deactivate manual air recirc ulation: Press button 4 again. The control indicator in the b utton exting uishes. Air condit ioning wi th the eng ine not runni ng When the vehicle is stop ped and the ignition is off, the heat or cooling power still in the sy stem can b e used to condition the passenger compa rtm ent, for example when stop ped at a level crossing. Press AUTO button with the ignition off. Resid ua l air c onditioning on will appear briefly in the disp lay. Climate control Climate Air distribut. AC Autom. blower Auto. recirc Parking heater The air is direc ted to the windsc reen a nd the front door wind ow s if the V button is pressed before switching the ignition off. 9 Warning Do not switch aux iliary heater on in filling stations or closed spaces – risk of fire or injury . 163 Parking heater Start 1 Start 2 Start 3 On Setting Auxiliary heating/ventilation 3 If the engine is switched off, the interior is heated or ventilated d epending on the values that hav e been set and the interior tem perature. Direct a ctiv ation For immediate activation with the ignition on, select menu item Par king heater and then m enu item On from the manual settings menu. The regulation is in ac corda nc e with the most recent temp erature settings in the Electronic Climate Control system – see page 158. When the sy stem is sw itched on, the temperature setting can b e v aried using the outer rotary k nobs. When the sy stem is activated, the control indicator in the AUTO button will illuminate. The sy stem switches itself off automatically after a maximum of 60 minutes, depending on the values that have been set and the interior temperature. For early dea ctiv ation, press the AUTO button or select menu item Pa rking heater and then menu item O n onc e ag ain. 164 Climate c ontrol Parking heater Setting Start 1 Start 1 Start 1 Start 2 Start 2 Start 2 Start 3 Start 3 Start 3 On On Setting Setting Parking heater Sw itching on a t a pr ogramm ed tim e Three programm ed times can be stored for switching on. For safety reasons only one program med time for switching on can b e activ e at any one time. After the heating cycle has been completed, the next req uired time for switching on m ust be activa ted a fresh. To store a programm ed time for activation, select menu item Park ing heater from the manual settings menu. After m enu item Pa rking heat er the current status will b e shown. To set a time, select menu item S et ting. Then select menu item Sta rt 1, Sta rt 2 or Start 3 a nd set the d esired time. S elec t the required time for programmed switching on. When the sy stem is activated, the control indicator in the AUTO button will illuminate. The sy stem switches itself off automatically after a ma ximum of 60 m inutes depending on the values that have been set and the interior temperature. To cancel air conditioning, press the A UTO button. To perform setting s, the Park ing heater menu can be called up within 2 hours of switching the ignition off by pressing on the central rotary knob. Climate control 165 The remote control has a ra nge of approx. 600 m. The range can be reduced by ob structions between the sender and receiver (e.g. walls) and by low power in the battery. The system switches itself off automatically after a maximum of 60 minutes depend ing on the values that hav e been set and the interior temperature. The auxiliary heating can be switched off at any time by pressing the button §. Deactivating a n activated sw itc h-on time: Remote contr ol The sy stem c an also be switched on and off direc tly using the rem ote control: On = O ff = Press button b, the control indicator in the remote control will illum ina te. Press button §, the control indicator in the remote control will illum ina te 1. Press button §. 2. Dela y of at least 3 second s. 3. Press button § again. If required , up to three add itional remote control units c an be prog rammed. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. C ha nging the remote cont rol batt ery Replace the battery imm ediately if the range of the remote control sta rts to become reduced. Insert a pointed object into the opening in the und erside of the remote control and flip open the cover. Replace batteries observing installation position. For battery typ e – see page 307. Whilst the control indicator is illum ina ted, no further signal can be sent. Alway s exchange a ll b atteries at the same time. When the system is activated, the control indicator in the AUTO button will illuminate. Mak e sure that you dispose of old batteries in accordance with env ironmental protec tion regulations. 166 Climate c ontrol Air outlet Note Do not c ov er the air outlets when storing items in the lug gage compa rtm ent storage compartments. If the windsc reen is misted due to damp weather, temporarily set the system as desc ribed under "Wind ow dem isting and defrosting" - see pa ges 147, 150, 159. Pollen filter The pollen filter cleans dust, soot, pollen and spores from the air entering from outside. The activ e ca rb on lay er 3 eliminates m ost odours and harmful ambient g ases from the air. Air intake The air intakes in front of the wind screen on the far right a nd left sides of the engine compartment must be kept clear to a llow air intak e. Rem ove any leav es, d irt or snow. Have the pollen filter repla ced b y a work shop at the rep la cement intervals specified in the Service Book let. The cooling system 3 operates most effectively with the windows and sunroof 3 closed. If the p assenger compartment has hea ted up c onsiderab ly a fter a long period in direct sunlight, briefly open the windows and sunroof 3 so that the hot air can esca pe q uick ly . Climate control When cooling 3 (air c onditioning compressor) is switched on, condensation forms, which is ex pelled from the underside of the v ehicle. At lea st one air vent must b e open while cooling 3 (air conditioning compressor) is on in order to prevent the evaporator from icing up due to lack of air movement. Cooling switches off autom atically at low outside tem peratures. When the aux iliary hea ting/auxiliary ventilation 3 is switched on, the Vauxhall alarm system monitoring of the vehicle interior 3 is deactivated. Auxiliary heating 3 consumes fuel (a pprox. 0.3 litres per heating process on average). When the aux iliary hea ting 3 is sw itched on, there may briefly be some smoke and noise. The auxiliary heating 3 only switches itself on at outside temperatures of less than approx. 20 °C and a t coolant temperatures of less than approx. 80 °C . In order to im prov e heating power and ensure that the engine operating temperature is rea ched quickly , auxiliary heating 3 also switches on automatically when driving if the outside temp erature is less than ap prox . 8 °C . This occurs irresp ective of stored auxiliary heating switch-on tim es. Aux iliary heating switches itself off automatically when the engine is switched off, while the combustion air fa n continues running for ap prox . 2 minutes (humming noise). 167 Maintenance In order to ensure consistently good operation, the air conditioning compressor 3 m ust be switched on for sev eral minutes once per m onth irrespective of the w eather or time of yea r. If the vehicle has an Electronic Climate C ontrol system, this is done automa tic ally during travel. O peration with cooling (air conditioning compressor) is not possible when outside temperatures are low . Ev ery 6 m onths, the auxiliary heating 3 should be operated for a few m inutes a t a preset temperature above 22 ° C. O n faults, c ontact a workshop. 168 Drivin g and operatio n Driving and operation Easytronic 3 The automatic Easy tronic transmission permits manual (Manua l mode) or autom atic gearshifting (Automa tic m ode), both with automa tic clutch control. 9 Warning Ea sy tronic 3 .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Autom atic transm ission 3 .... .... .... ..... . Driving hints .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Sav ing fuel, protecting the environment . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Fuels, refuelling .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Ca ta lytic converter, exhaust g ases... . Drive Control System s .. .... ..... .... .... ..... . Brake system ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Anti-lock Brake Sy stem (ABS u ).. ..... . Wheels, ty res ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Roof racks 3 .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Towing eq uipm ent 3 .... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Towing eq uipm ent with removable coup ling ball bar 3 , Sa loon / Hatch 3 . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Towing eq uipm ent with pivoting coup ling ball bar 3 .... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Ca ra van/trailer tow ing . .... ..... .... .... ..... . 168 176 184 186 188 190 196 208 210 211 218 219 219 222 223 Disregard of these instructions m ay lead to injuries or endanger life. Transmi ssion di sp lay S hows the mode or current gear. Driving and o peration 169 It is not necessary to select the neutral position before starting. If no gear is engaged, the transmission automatically shifts into neutral p osition (N) before starting the engine. This can lead to a slight delay w hen starting. Sta rting t he engine Dep ress footbrake when starting the engine. The engine ca n only be started with the footbrake depressed. "N" ap pears on the transmission display. If the footb rake is not depressed the control indicator j illuminates in the instrum ent cluster, and "N " flashes in the transmission display - the eng ine cannot be started. Also the vehic le cannot be sta rted if all brake lights ha ve fa iled. Easytronic op era tion v ia the selector lever Alway s m ove the selec tor lever in the app ropriate direc tion as far a s it w ill go. Upon release, it automatically returns to the centre position. Pay heed to the gear/m od e indicator in the tra nsmission display. Mov e selector lev er t oward s N N eutral. 170 Drivin g and operatio n It is also p ossible to start-off without depressing the footbrake if the a ccelerator pedal is operated directly after mov ing the selector lever. If there is no immediate acceleration or the footbrake is not depressed , no gear is engaged and " A" flashes. After a few seconds, the display reverts to "N". Repeat p reviously d escribed starting procedure. In Automa tic mode, selection of other gears is automatic irrespectiv e of d riv ing conditions. Sta rting-off Dep ress the footbra ke, release the handbrake, mov e the selector lever to A, + or - . Easytronic is in Automatic mode and first g ear is eng aged (second gear if the Winter programme is active). "A" appears on the transmission display. The v ehicle begins to "creep" when the footb rake is released . Move sel ect or lever towa rds A Switch between Automa tic and Manual mode. Manua l gearshifting is possib le in Manual mode. The currently engaged gear appea rs on the displa y. If the engine speed is too low the Easytronic will automatically shift to a lower g ear even in Manua l mode. This prevents the engine from stalling. Mov e selector lev er t oward s + or + Shift to a higher gear Shift to a lower gea r If a hig her gear is selected when the running speed is too low, or a lower gear when the speed is too high, no shift is effected. This p revents the engine from running at too low or too hig h revs. Gears can be sk ip ped by m ov ing the selector lever repeatedly a t short intervals. Driving and o peration If the vehicle is in Automatic mode, on movement of the selec tor lever to + or Ea sy tronic shifts to Manual m od e and changes up or d ow n. The transmission display shows the currently selected gear. Mov e selector lever tow ards R Reverse gear. Engage only when vehicle is stationary. Dep ress the footbra ke, release the handbrake and m ov e the selector lever to R. Rev erse gea r is eng aged. "R" ap pears on the transmission display. The v ehicle begins to "creep" when the footb rake is released . It is also p ossible to start-off in reverse without depressing the footbrake if the accelerator pedal is opera ted directly after moving the selector lev er. If there is no immed iate acceleration or the footbrake is not depressed, no gear is enga ged and "R" flashes. After a few seconds, the display reverts to "N". Repeat p reviously d escribed starting procedure. 171 Electronical ly cont rolled driv ing pr og ramm es z By m eans of delay ed gear cha nging (higher engine speed s) following a cold start, the opera ting temperature programme in Autom atic mode quickly and automatically brings the catalytic conv erter to the tem perature required for optim um polluta nt reduction. z Adaptive programmes autom atically adapt gearshifting in Automatic mode to suit the driving conditions, such as if the vehicle is towing a caravan/trailer, ha s a high pa yload, or is being driven on inclines. z Winter programme: Press button T – see next pa ge. 172 Drivin g and operatio n If the v ehicle is switched to Manua l mode while the Winter prog ra mme is active, the Winter prog ra mme is interrupted. The Winter programm e resumes upon return to Automatic mode. Winter progr amme T In the event of diffic ulties starting-off on slip pery road s, p ress button T ("A" and T appear in the tra nsmission display). Ea sy tronic switches to Automatic mode and the vehicle sets off in second gea r. The Winter p rogram me is switched off by: z Pressing button T again. z Turning off the ignition. In order to protect the Easytronic the Winter programme autom atically switches itself off at extremely high clutch tem peratures. Kick down Depress accelerator past resistance point: transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on engine speed. Full engine power is available for acceleration. During k ickdown no ma nual gearshifting is possible. Driving and o peration When the engine speed a pproaches its upper limit, the transmission shifts to a higher gear during kick down even in Manual mode. Without kick down this automatic shift is not effec ted in Ma nual m ode. Eng ine braki ng Autom atic mode: When driv ing downhill, Easytronic d oes not shift into higher gears until a fairly high engine sp eed has been reac hed. When braking, Easytronic shifts down in good time. Manual mode: To utilise the engine braking effect, select a lower gear in g ood time w hen driving downhill. 173 "Rock ing" t he v ehic le If it becomes necessary to rock the vehicle to free it from sand, mud, snow or a hole, move the selector lever between R and A (or + or -) in a repeat pattern while app ly ing lig ht p ressure to the accelerator pedal. Do not rac e the engine and avoid sudden acceleration. This applies only to the exceptional circum stances mentioned a bove. Ma noeuvr ing the vehicle To ma noeuv re the vehicle back and forth during attempts to park or in ga ra ge entrances the creeping m ov ement can be utilised by releasing the footb ra ke. N ever actuate accelerator and brake pedals sim ultaneously. To prevent d amage, Easy tronic disengag es the " creep function" a t extrem ely high a utomatic clutch temperatures. 174 Drivin g and operatio n Stop ping t he v ehic le In Automatic or Manual m od e, when the vehic le has stopp ed first gear (with Winter mode enga ged, second gear) is engaged automatically and the clutch relea sed. In R rev erse remains engaged. When the engine is running, a gear is enga ged and the footbrake is not depressed, a wa rning buzzer sounds w hen the d riv er’s door is opened and the gea r shown in the transmission d isplay flashes at a rapid rate. If the hand brake is not applied, the vehicle creeps. Move the selector lever to N a nd apply the handbrake. When stop ping on gradients, app ly the handbrake or depress the brake pedal. To prevent overheating of the clutch, do not increase engine speed to ensure smooth idling when in gear. In order to prev ent dama ge to the Ea sy tronic the clutc h is automatically enga ged at ex tremely high clutch tem peratures. Switch off eng ine if stop ping for a lengthy period, e. g. in traffic jams or at level crossings. Vehicle storag e Before leaving the vehicle: z Apply hand brake, z Remove ignition key. The most recently engaged gear (ind icator in transmission display) remains engaged. With N , no gea r is engaged. When the ignition is switched off the Easytronic no longer responds to movem ent of the selector lev er. Lock the vehicle. Otherwise the battery may become discharged if the vehicle is parked for long periods. If the handbrak e has not been ap plied, the control indicator R flashes for a few second s a fter the ignition is switched off. With the engine off a nd the handbrak e not applied, when the driver’s door is opened a warning buzzer sounds and the control indica tor R flashes; switch on ignition, engage gear, switch off ignition and apply ha ndb ra ke. Fault C ontrol indicator A illuminates in the event of a fa ult in the Easytronic sy stem. In the event of serious faults, "F" a lso appears on the transmission display. It is possib le to continue driving if only control ind icator A illuminates. M anual mode can then no longer be selected. If " F" also appea rs on the tra nsmission display, continued driving is not possible. Hav e the cause of the fault elim ina ted by a workshop. The self-d ia gnosis integrated into the system allows rapid fault identification. Driving and o peration If the cause of the power failure is not a discharged battery , conta ct a workshop. If the vehicle m ust be rem ov ed from flowing tra ffic, relea se the c lutch as follows: 1. Apply handbrak e and switch off ignition. 2. O pening and p ropp ing up the bonnet see page 228. 3. C lean Easy tronic around the cap (see Fig. 17925 J) so that no d irt c an get into the opening when the cap is rem oved. Interrup tion of power suppl y The c lutch is not disengaged if the vehicle battery is discharged and a gear has been selected. The vehicle ca nnot move. If the battery is flat, start the vehicle using jump leads – see pag e 230. 4. Rotate cap to slacken and remove by lifting upwards – see illustration. 5. Turn the a djusting screw clockwise using a flat-head screwdriver (v ehicle tools 3 – see page 238) until clear resistance can be felt. The clutch has now been disengaged. Do not turn beyond the resista nce, since this can damag e the Easytronic. 175 6. Fit cleaned cap ag ain. The cap must be in full contact w ith the housing. Towing the vehic le and starting the eng ine is not perm itted when the clutch has been released in this way , although the vehicle can b e m ov ed a short distance. C ontact a workshop immediately. 176 Drivin g and operatio n Automatic transmission 3 The a utomatic tra nsmission allows automatic shifting (Autom atic mode) or manual shifting (Ma nua l mode) to tak e place. The engine ca n only be started with the selector lever in P or N. When starting in N, depress the footbrake or apply the handbrake. After the engine has started , depress the footbrake before engaging a gear. Do not accelerate while selecting a gear. O nc e a gear is engaged and the footb rake is released, the vehicle "creeps". Never depress the footbrak e and the accelerator pedal simultaneously . The selected g ear is shown in the transmission display - see end column. 9 Warning Disregard of these instructions m ay lead to injuries or endanger life. Selecting D puts the transmission in Automatic mode. If the selec tor lever is m oved to the left from the D position, Manual mode is activated . Gear changes can then be ma de manually by moving the selec tor lever towards + or -. Transmi ssion di sp lay Display of selector lev er setting, g ear and mode. P Pa rk position R Reverse gear N Neutral D Automatic mode 1-6 Manua l mode showing the gear selected Driving and o peration 177 The selector lever can only be mov ed out of position P or N w ith the ig nition switched on and the footbrake depressed (selector lever lock). In selector lev er position N the selector lever lock is activa ted after a delay and only if the vehicle is stationary. In positions P or N, the control indicator j illuminates red in the selector lever indica tor, the selector lever is blocked see Fig. S 12547. To engage P or R , press button on selector lever. Selector l ev er setti ng s P, R, N and D (Automat ic mod e) P Park position, front wheels blocked. O nly select with vehicle sta tionary and handbrake app lied. " P" appears on the transmission display. The engine can only b e started with lever in position P or N . When position N is selected, depress footbrak e or ap ply handbrake before starting. R Reverse gear. Only select when vehic le is stationary . "R" appears on the transmission display. N Neutra l or idling position. " N" appears on the transm ission display . D Drive position for norma l driving in 1st to highest gear. "D" appears on the transm ission display . If the transmission fluid tempera ture is less than -25 °C, the selector lever cannot be mov ed until the fluid tempera ture reac hes -25 °C with the engine running (P or N flashes in the transmission disp la y for as long as the selector lever is locked). Do not accelerate during the selection procedure. 178 Drivin g and operatio n If the engine speed is too slow, the tra nsmission a utomatica lly shifts to a lower gear, but not if the gear was selected below a certain speed. If a higher gear is selected below a certain speed a downshift does not ta ke p lace. When engine speed is high, there is no autom atic shift to a higher gea r. For reasons of safety, k ickdown also functions in Manual mode – see page 180. The selected g ear is shown in the tra nsmission display – see page 176. Acti veSelect (Manual m ode) Shift the selector lev er from D first to the left and then forwards or ba ckwards. + - Shift to a higher g ear Shift to a lower gear If a higher gear is selected at too low a speed or a lower gear selected at too high a speed, there is no change. This avoids rev s that a re too low or too high. Electronical ly cont rolled driv ing pr og ramm es z With adaptive prog ra mmes, shifting into other gears is handled automatically based on the driving style, e. g.: – Economical driving sty le: at slow er engine speeds. – Adaptation to specia l driving conditions still takes pla ce, such as: driving up a nd down hills, tow ing a carav an/trailer, and with a heavy load. Driving and o peration z Automatic neutra l shift function automa tic ally sets the transm ission to N to reduce fuel consumption, e.g. at traffic lights. The automatic neutral shift function is activated when the following occurs simultaneously: – The selector lever is in Autom atic or Manual mode. – The footbrake is depressed. – The v ehicle is stationa ry . – The ac celera tor p edal is not actuated. – The transmission fluid temperature is above 0 °C. As soon as the footbrake is released and the accelerator pedal is depressed, the vehicle starts off in the usua l manner. 179 z After a cold start, the operating temperature programme ensures that the correct gear (inc reased engine speed) is selected to quickly bring the cataly tic converter to the temperature req uired for optimum pollutant red uc tion. z If the Continuous Da mping Control is set to SPORT mode 3, the shift times are reduced and gear changes occ ur a t hig her engine sp eeds (not when cruise control is active). The control indicator 1 also illuminates in the transmission displa y - see pag e 176. Continuous Damping C ontrol, S PO RT mode 3 - see pag e 198. z Winter programme: Press button T. Control indica tor T appears on the tra nsmission display - see next page and page 176. 180 Drivin g and operatio n To deactiv ate The Winter programme is switched off by : z pressing button T again, z switching off the ignition, z switching to Manua l mode. To protect aga inst dam age, the startingoff aid autom atically cuts out at very high tra nsmission fluid tem peratures. Winter progr amme T Press b utton T if you are having problems starting-off on a slippery road surfac e. To activate The Winter programme can be switched in Autom atic mode (T illuminates in the transm ission display - see page 176). The vehic le shifts to 4th gea r. Kick down Depress accelerator past resistance point: transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on engine speed. Full engine power is available for acceleration. For safety reasons, k ickdown is available in both Automatic mode and M anual mode. Driving and o peration Eng ine braki ng The a utomatic tra nsmission automatically selects the driving programm e w ith optimal engine brak ing effect. As needed, lower gears can also be selected in M anual mode to increase engine braking effect. 1st gear has the greatest braking effect. 181 "Rock ing" t he v ehic le If it becomes necessary to rock the vehicle to free it from sand, mud, snow or a hole, move the selector lever from D to R in a repeat pattern w hile sim ultaneously applying light pressure to the accelerator pedal. Do not race the engine and av oid sudden acceleration. This applies only to the exceptional circum stances mentioned a bove. Ma noeuvr ing the vehicle To ma noeuv re the vehicle back and forth during attempts to park or in ga ra ge entrances, the v ehicle’ s creeping mov ement can be utilised by releasing the footbrake. N ever actuate accelerator and brake pedals sim ultaneously. 182 Drivin g and operatio n Stop ping t he v ehic le The selector lever can be left in the chosen gear with the engine running. When stop ping on gradients apply handbrake or depress brake peda l. To prevent overheating of the transmission, do not increase engine revolutions to ensure smooth idling while standing if a gear has been selected. Switch off eng ine if stop ping for a lengthy period, e. g. in traffic jams or at level crossings. Before leav ing the vehicle, apply handbrake, then p la ce selector lev er in position P and remove ignition key . The ignition key can only be removed when the selector lever is in position P. If the selector lever is not in the P position when the ig nition is sw itched off, control indica tor j in the selec tor lever ind icator strip flashes – see pa ge 177, Fig. S 12547. Shift the selector lever to P. If the ignition key is not removed, the battery m ay be discharged if the vehicle is then left to stand for a lengthy period of tim e. Fault In the ev ent of a fault in the automa tic transmission, control indica tor A illuminates. The transmission no longer shifts automatically. Driving can be continued. In Manual mode, 2nd gear and the highest gear ca n be engag ed. For some faults, only the highest gear is av ailable. O nly the highest gear is ava ila ble in D in Automatic mode. Driving and o peration 183 Illumination of control indicator A can also indicate a fault in the engine electronic s – see page 192. For diesel engines 1) Z 19 DTL, Z 19 DT, Z 19 DTH illum ina tion of control indicator A c ould a lso indicate that the diesel fuel filter must be d ra ined of water see page 274. Hav e the cause of the fault elim inated by a workshop. Interruption of p ower supply If the v ehicle b attery is flat, the selector lever cannot be moved out of position P or N. If the ba ttery is flat, start the v ehicle using jump lead s – see page 230. If the cause is not a discharged battery, unlock selector lev er: 1. Apply hand brake. 2. Remove the ashtray – see page 94. 3. Pull out ashtray socket upwards. 1) Sa les desig nation – see pa ge 28 4, 285. 4. Press the yellow catch downwards w ith a screwdriver and move the selector lever out of P. 5. Refit ashtra y socket in centre console and latch into position. 6. Refit ashtra y. S elec ting P or N again effects lock ing aga in. Have the c ause of the interruption of power supp ly rectified by a workshop . 184 Drivin g and operatio n Driving hints The first 600 mil es (1000 k m) Drive your vehicle at v arious speeds. Do not use full throttle. Never allow the eng ine to labour at low revs. Make good use of all gea rs. Depress the accelerator pedal a maximum of around three quarters of the ava ila ble ped al travel in all gears. Do not drive faster than three quarters of max imum speed. Do not brake unnecessarily hard for the first 125 miles (200 km ). Never coa st with engine not running Many units will not function in this situation (e. g. brak e serv o unit, elec tro-hydraulic power steering). Driving in this manner is a danger to yourself and others. Brak e servo unit When the engine is not running, the brake servo unit is no longer effective once the footb rake has been depressed onc e or twice. Braking effect is not reduced, b ut significantly greater force is required for braking. Electro-hydrauli c power assisted st eering If the power-assisted steering fails when being towed with the engine switched off, the vehicle can still be steered, but considera bly more forc e is req uired. Dr iving in mountainous terrai n or with a carav an/trailer The cooling fan is electrically operated. Its cooling p ow er is therefore independent of the engine speed. Since a considerable amount of heat is genera ted at high engine speeds and less at slower speeds, do not shift d ow n when climbing hills whilst the v ehicle is still coping with the gradient in the higher g ear. Diesel engines: O n rising gradients of 10% or more, do not drive fa ster tha n 20 mph (30 km/h) in 1st gear or 30 mph (50 k m/h) in 2nd g ear; with automa tic tra nsmission 3, do not ex ceed 25 mph (40 km/h) in position 1. Dr iving with a roof load Do not exceed the permissible roof load – see p ages 218, 293. For reasons of safety, distribute the load evenly and secure it prop erly w ith retaining straps. Adjust the tyre pressure to the load conditions. Do not drive faster than 75 mph (120 km/h). Check and retighten the strap s frequently. Observ e country-specific regula tions. Sw itching off the engi ne When y ou switch off, fans in the eng ine compa rtm ent may continue running for a time to cool the engine. If the engine temperature is very high, e.g. after driving in mountainous terrain: allow the engine to id le for approx im ately two minutes in order to prevent heat acc um ulation. Vehicles with turbocharged engine 3 After running at high eng ine speeds or high eng ine loads, operate the engine briefly at a low load or run in neutral for approx. 30 seconds before switching off in order to protec t the turbocharger. Sa ve energy – m ore miles / kilom et res Plea se observe the running-in hints on the previous pa ge a nd the tips for energy saving on the following pag es. Good, technically correc t and ec onomical driving ensures m aximum d urab ility and performa nc e for your vehicle. Driving and o peration O verrun The fuel supply is autom atically shut off during overrun, e.g. when the vehicle is being driven down long gradients or when braking. To enable the overrun cut-off to take effect, do not acc elerate during overrun and, if in manual transm ission mode, do not depress clutch ped al. To prevent damage to the catalytic converter, overrun cut-off is temporarily d eactiva ted when the catalytic conv erter temperature is high. Vehicles with turbocharged engine 3 Flow -g enerated noises may be aud ible if the a ccelerator is released quickly on account of airflow in the turbocharger. Eng ine sp eed Drive in a low engine speed range for each gear as much as possible. Warmi ng up Allow the engine to warm up w hilst driv ing . Do not w arm it up by letting it run at idling speed. Do not app ly full throttle until the engine has reached operating tem perature. After a cold sta rt, the automatic transm ission 3 or Easytronic 3 in Autom atic mode shifts into higher gears at higher rpm . This a llows the catalytic converter to quickly reach the temperature req uired for optimum pollutant reduction. Correct g ear selection Tra nsmission in neutral and without revving in the lower gears. S top-a nd -g o tra ffic a nd driving at a speed too hig h for the selected g ear or transmission ratio increases wear and fuel consum ption. Change dow n When decreasing speed, shift down into the next lowest gear. Do not slip the clutch with a high-revving engine. This is especially important when hill climb ing. Clutch op era tion Alw ays dep ress the clutch ped al hard to the floor to prev ent shifting difficulties and tra nsmission dam age. When driving do not use the pedal as a footrest; this will cause substantial clutch wear. 185 C ool ing fan The cooling fan is controlled v ia a therm oswitch and therefore only runs if nec essary . The cooling fan a utomatica lly switches on when the diesel particle filter 3 is being cleaned depending on the eng ine. Pedals Do not place any ob jects in the footwell which could slip under the ped als and inhibit the pedal trav el. To ensure the pedal travel is uninhibited, there must be no mats in the area of the pedals. Bat tery ca re When driving slowly or when the v ehicle is stationary , e.g. in slow urban traffic, stopand-go traffic or traffic jams, turn off all unnecessary electrical load s w here possible (e. g. heated rear window, heated seats 3 ). Depress clutch pedal when sta rting in order to relieve the strain on the starter and the battery. 186 Drivin g and operatio n Saving fuel, protecting th e environment Trend-set ting technology In the dev elopment and manufacture of your vehicle, environment-friendly and in the m ain recy clable materials were used. The p roduction method s used to make your vehicle are likewise env ironmentally compatible. Recycling of production wastes keeps the circulation of material closed. Reduction of energy a nd water requirements a lso help s to conserve natural resources. A highly adv anced design mea ns that your vehic le can be easily disassembled at the end of its working life, and the individual materials separated for subsequent re-use. Materia ls such as asbestos and cadmium are not used . The refrigerant in the air conditioning system 3 is C FC -free. New painting techniques employ water as a solvent. End-of-li fe v ehi cle rec overy For detailed information on Va ux ha ll’ s on-going comm itment to achieving an environmentally susta inab le future, including; design for recycling, take back of End-of-Life Vehicle’s (ELVs) and the recycling of ELVs, view www.va ux ha ll. co.uk/recycling for details. Warm ing up z Full throttle and w arming up at idle speed increase w ear, fuel consumption, ex haust em ission, the am ount of pollutant in the exhaust and the am ount of noise. Energy and environm ent-c onsci ous drivi ng z High noise levels and exhaust em issions are often a result of driving w ithout due attention to saving energy and protecting the environment. Uniform speed z Hectic driving significantly increases fuel consumption, the ex haust emissions, the proportion of pollutant in the exhaust gas and the noise level. z Y ou should therefore drive with energy in mind "more m iles / k ilom etres – less fuel". Reduce the noise level and exhaust emissions b y adopting an environmentconsc ious driving style. This is ex tremely worthwhile and im proves the quality of life. Fuel consum ption d epend s to a great extent on your own personal d riv ing style. The following hints are intended to help you consume fuel at a rate that is as close as possible to the specified levels – see page 287. C heck y our v ehicle’ s fuel consumption every time you refuel. This facilitates early detection of any irregula rities causing increased fuel consumption. z Driv e off as soon as possible a fter starting. z Do not accelerate a nd brake unnecessarily . Drive at uniform speed, watching the road. Avoid freq uent starting-off and stopping e.g . at traffic lights, in short distance tra ffic and in queues of traffic by m eans of clever planning . Select road s w ith good traffic flow . I dling z The eng ine also consumes fuel when idling . z If you have to wait for more than one minute, it is worthwhile switching off the engine. Fiv e m inutes of idling corresponds to ap prox imately 0.6 miles (1 k m) of driving. Driving and o peration O verrun z The fuel supply is automatically shut off during ov errun, e. g. when the vehicle is being driven down long gradients or when braking – see page 185. z To enable the overrun cut-off to come into action and sav e fuel, do not accelerate or d epress clutch pedal during ov errun. Corr ect gear sel ec tion z High revs increase engine w ear and fuel consumption. z Do not race your engine. Avoid d riv ing at high engine speeds. Making use of the tachom eter helps to save fuel. Drive in a low engine speed ra nge for each gear as much a s possible with uniform engine speeds. Drive as often as possible in top gear, select the next higher gear a s soon as possible, and only chang e down when the engine is no longer running perfectly smoothly . High speed z The higher the speed , the higher the consumption and the noise level. At top speed, you consume a great deal of fuel and produce excessive noise and exhaust em issions. z Slightly relea sing the accelerator ped al results in distinct fuel savings with no major loss of speed. Drive at no more tha n around three quarters of max imum speed and you will use up to 50% less fuel, without losing a great deal of time. Tyre pressure z Inadequate ty re p ressure, leading to higher road resistance, costs m oney in two wa ys: for more fuel and increased tyre wear. z Regular checks (every 14 d ays) pay off. Electri cal loa ds z The power consum ption of electrical equip ment increa ses fuel consumption. z Sw itch off all aux iliary electrical loads (e. g. air c onditioning 3, heated rear window) when not needed. Roof rack s, sk i-holders z Due to air resistance, a roof load can increase fuel consum ption by approx . 3.5 gal./1000 miles (1 l/100km ). z Remove them if they are not being used. 187 Repai r and m aintenance z Improper repairs or adjustm ent and maintenance work can increase fuel consumption. Do not carry out w ork on the eng ine yourself. You may out of ignorance infringe environmental law s b y not disposing of materials properly. Appropriate parts might not b e recycled. Contact with some of the materia ls inv olv ed may p ose a hea lth haz ard. z We recom mend that repair and maintenance be entrusted to your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Extr em e d riving conditions z Going up steep slopes, cornering, driving on poor road s a nd winter driving a ll increase fuel consumption. Fuel consumption increa ses dramatically in urba n tra ffic a nd at winter temperatures, especially on short trip s when the engine operating tempera ture is not reached. z Follow the hints given above to keep consumption to a m inimum under suc h cond itions. 188 Drivin g and operatio n Fuels, refu elling Fuel c onsum ption Fuel consump tion is determined und er specific driv ing cond itions – see page 287. Special equipment increases the weight of the v ehicle. As a result, they can increase fuel consump tion and reduce the specified max imum speed. For the first few thousand m iles / kilometres, friction between the engine and transm ission com ponents is higher. This increases fuel consumption. Fuel for petrol engines Normal c om mercial high-quality fuels with a m aximum ethanol content of 5% in accordance with DIN EN 228 are suitable (for catalytic converter see pag e 190, for octane numbers - see pages 284, 285). The quality thereof has considerable effect on the p erformance, running and serv ice life of the engine. The additives mix ed with the fuel are extremely im portant. For this rea son you must only refuel with highquality fuels containing additives. Fuels with ethanol c ontent greater than 5% do not comply with DIN EN 228 and must not be used unless the vehicle has been specifically dev eloped and app rov ed for these fuels. Fuel with too low an octane number can cause pinking. Vauxhall cannot be held lia ble for resulting dama ge. Petrol with a higher octane number can always be used. The use of 91 octane fuel is not permitted in v ehicles with the Z 22 YH1 ) engine or the Vectra VXR. The ignition tim ing adjusts automatically to the grade of fuel used (octane numb er) – see pa ges 284, 285. Use of petrol w ith a n oc ta ne rating of 95 will ensure economica l driving. Fuel with 95 RO N w ill result in less power and torque with the Vectra VXR. Fuel for di esel engines Diesel engines must be operated only on commerc ia lly available diesel fuel meeting the specifications of DIN EN 590. Since J anuary 2004, some oil companies ha ve m ixed their diesel fuel with up to 5% Bio fuel (FAME = Fatty Acid Methy l Esters) lik e RM E (Rape-Oil Methyl Ester). This is in accordance with the current DIN EN 590 and does not harm the fuel/injec tion sy stem. The characteristic s of a diesel fuel mixed up with 5% Bio fuel (FAME) do not differ from conv entional d iesel fuel and do not influence the vehicle’s driveability. 1) Sales d esigna tion – s ee p a ge 284, 285 . I mporta nt: Diesel fuel m ixed with 5% FAM E acc ording to DI N EN 590 m ust not be confused with 100% Bio Diesel, which is not to be used in Vauxhall eng ines. The flow and filterability of diesel fuel a re temperature-dependent. Diesel fuels w ith improved low temp erature properties are therefore a vailable on the ma rk et during the winter months. Make sure that y ou fill the tank with winter fuel before the start of the cold weather season. Additives can be used with diesel fuels with winter prop erties that are guaranteed by the manufa cturer and when using diesel fuel filters that are heated depending on the outside temperature. Diesel fuels must not be diluted with fuels that are intended for petrol eng ines. Fuel filler cap When replacing the fuel filler cap, be sure to use a genuine fuel filler cap for y our model to ensure full functionality. Dieseleng ined vehicles have special fuel filler cap s. Driving and o peration 189 9 Warning Fuel is flammab le and explosive. When handling fuel or in the immediate vicinity, avoid na ked fla mes or sparks. Do not smoke. This a lso app lies where the presenc e of fuel is revea led b y its characteristic smell. If fuel odours occur in the vehicle, have a workshop elim inate the fault im mediately. Fuel filler neck at right rear side of vehicle. The tank flap is locked together with the doors – see page 30. Refuel ling 9 Warning Care must b e tak en when ha ndling fuel. Before refuelling, turn off engine and also shut off external heaters with combustion cha mbers (identified by stickers on tank flap ). Switch off mobile phones. The tank disp la y updates more quickly if the ig nition is switched off during refuelling. Open the tank flap . Unscrew the fuel filler cap, remove and suspend from the tank flap. The fuel tank has a limiting sy stem which prevents ov erfilling of the tank. C orrect filling depends to a large extent on proper operation of the fuel disp ensing pump: 1. Fully insert the pump nozz le and switch it on. 2. After a n automatic shut-off, the nominal capacity of the fuel tank is reached by mea ns of two m etered top-ups. Insert fuel dispensing p um p as fa r as it w ill g o. To close, position the fuel filler cap a nd rotate past the resistanc e until the ca p audibly clicks over the reta iner. C lose fuel tank flap. Wipe off a ny ov erflowing fuel immediately . 190 Drivin g and operatio n Damage to the ca talytic converter or the vehicle may result if the follow ing points are not observed: z O n ignition faults, uneven running after cold start, a clear d rop-off in eng ine power or other unusual opera ting symptoms which could indica te a fault in the ig nition system, contac t a workshop immediately. C ontinue driving if necessary for a short time at low speed and low revs. Catalytic converter, exhaust gases Ca talytic conv er ter for petrol engines Leaded fuel will damage the catalytic converter and parts of the elec tronic system, rendering them inoperative. Use of high-quality fuels other than those specified on page 188 (e. g. LRP 1) ) c ould dam age the catalytic conv erter. 1) LRP = L ea d Replacement P etrol. Irregular engine running and a loss of eng ine power when the Electronic Stab ility Program me (ESP® Pl us 3) comes into action are the result of operating conditions and are therefore of no significance – see p age 196. z If unb urned fuel enters the cataly tic conv erter, this may result in overheating and irreparable damage to the c atalytic conv erter. You should therefore av oid unnecessarily long use of the starter when starting-off, running the tank d ry (an irregular fuel supply w ill lead to overhea ting) and starting the engine by pushing or towing. Driving and o peration z If the control ind icator Z for exhaust gases fla shes, slow down until the flashing stops and the control indica tor illuminates. Contact a w orkshop for assistance immediately . C ontrol indica tor Z for exhaust gases – see pa ge 192. 191 Cata lyti c converter for d iesel engines Damage to the ca talytic converter or the vehicle may result if the follow ing points are not observed: z O n uneven running , a c lear drop-off in eng ine power or other unusual operating symptoms, c ontact a workshop immediately. C ontinue driving if necessary for a short time at low speed and low revs. Irregular engine running and a loss of eng ine power when the Electronic Stab ility Program me (ESP® Pl us 3) comes into action are the result of operating conditions and are therefore of no significance – see p age 196. C ont rolling exhaust em ission S om e of the damaging substances in the exhaust such a s ca rb on monoxide (CO ), hydrocarbons (HC) and nitrous ox ides (NO x) are reduced to a minim um by making structural changes – mainly in the injection sy stem and the ignition system in conjunction with the catalytic converter. 192 Drivin g and operatio n Flashing with the engine running indicates a fault which could lead to catalytic conv erter damage. Y ou may c ontinue driving without d amage if you bac k off until flashing stops and the control indica tor illuminates. Contact a w orkshop immed iately. Control indicator Z for ex haust Illuminates when the ignition is switched on and during the start attemp t. Ex tinguishes shortly after the engine starts running. Illuminated with the eng ine running indicates a fa ult in the ex haust gas cleaning system . The permitted em issions may be ex ceeded . Contact a workshop immediately . C ontrol indicator A for engine elec tronics Illuminates for a few seconds after the ignition is switched on. If it illuminates when the eng ine is running, there is a fault in engine or transmission electronics. The electronic sy stem switches to an emergency running p rogram me. Fuel consum ption m ay be increa sed and the driveability of the vehicle m ay be impaired. Driving and o peration In some c ases, faults can be eliminated by switching off the engine and restarting . If the c ontrol indicator illuminates again when the engine is running, contact a workshop to eliminate the ca use of the fault. If it illuminates briefly, but does not recur, it is of no significance. If A illuminates, this may also mean water in the diesel fuel filter in the engines 1) Z 19 DTL, Z 19 DT and Z 19 DTH. Where necessary, have the fuel filter insp ected by a workshop for any residual water. If it flashes after the ignition is switched on, there is a fa ult in the immobiliser system. The engine cannot be started. See pag e 27. 193 Exhaust g ases 9 Warnin g Engine exhaust gases contain poisonous carbon monoxide, w hich is colourless and odourless and c ould b e fatal if inhaled. If ex haust gases p enetrate the v ehicle interior, open a window and contact a workshop. Avoid driving with an open luggage compartment. Otherw ise, exhaust g ases could penetra te the interior. During the first drive sm ok e m ay develop because of wax and oil ev aporating on the exhaust system . Park the vehicle in the open for a while a fter the first drive and av oid inhaling the fum es. 1) Sales d esigna tion – s ee p a ge 284, 285 . 194 Drivin g and operatio n Diesel p artic le fi lter 3 The d iesel pa rticle filter system removes polluting soot particles out of the engine exhaust ga ses. The system includes a selfcleaning function tha t operates automatically whilst driving. The filter is cleaned by burning the trapped soot particles at a high temperature. There ma y be an increase in fuel consumption, exhaust smell, and engine cooling fan opera tion 3 during the self-clea ning opera tion. The self-c leaning function will automatically operate whilst d riv ing after the engine has reached its normal operating temperature. The control indicator ! will continue to flash until the self-cleaning op eration is complete. This ma y take up to 20 minutes of driving. The time will be shorter at higher v ehicle speeds. If the vehicle is not moving for more than a few minutes, then the selfcleaning function will not operate. O peration will continue when driving resumes. The self-cleaning function cannot operate autom atic ally during certa in driv ing situations where the engine does not rea ch its normal operating tem perature. An exa mple of this would be driving only short distances in cold weather. If the filter needs cleaning and recent d riv ing situations did not a llow the func tion to automatically op erate, then the control indicator ! will flash. If this occurs, then you may continue to drive the vehic le normally. The vehicle will not be d amaged and does not require service. Driving and o peration We recommend that you do not turn the ignition off until the self-cleaning opera tion is comp lete. If you m ust turn the ig nition off before the operation is com plete, then the opera tion will a utomatica lly resume when driving the next tim e and after the engine has reached its norm al operating tem perature. The control indica tor ! extinguishes as soon as the self-cleaning operation is complete. 195 Ma intena nce Hav e a ll maintenance work carried out at the intervals sp ecified. We recommend that you entrust this w ork to y our Vauxhall Authorised Repa irer, who has proper equipment and tra ined personnel av ailable. Electronic testing systems permit rapid diagnosis and remedy of faults. This way you can b e certain that all components of the vehicle’s electrica l, injection and ignition systems operate correc tly , that your vehicle has a low level of pollutant emission and that the catalytic converter system will ha ve a long service life. Y ou are thereby making an im portant contribution towards keeping the air clean and comp lia nce with em issions legislation. C hecking and adjustment of the fuelinjection and ignition systems is part of the scope of inspec tion. For this reason you should hav e a ll maintenance work carried out a t the intervals specified in your Serv ice Booklet. 196 Drivin g and operatio n Drive Control Systems Interac tive Driv ing System (IDS+) 3 The IDS + combines the sensors a nd control units of the Electronic S tability Prog ramme (ES P®P lu s ), the Anti-lock Brake Sy stem (ABS) and C ontinuous Da mping Control (CDC ). This provides both excellent driv ing dynam ics and greater safety. Electronic Stab ility Program me (ESP® Pl us ) 3 ESP® P lu s im proves driving stability when necessary in any driving situation regardless of the ty pe of road surface or tyre g rip . It also prevents the d riv e wheels from spinning. The system m onitors vehicle movements. As soon as the vehicle starts to swerve (understeers/oversteers) engine output is reduced (the sound of the engine cha ng es) and individual wheels are specifically braked . This considerab ly improves the driving stability of the vehicle on snow and ice and on wet or slippery road surfa ces. ESP® Pl us is ready for operation as soon as the ignition is switched on and c ontrol indicator v ex ting uishes. C ontrol indicator v fla shes when ES P®P lu s is in action. The vehicle is now in a critical situa tion; ESP® Pl us allows you to keep control of the vehicle a nd reminds you to m atch your speed to the road conditions. 9 Warnin g Do not let this special safety feature tempt you into ta king risk s w hen driving. Tra ffic safety can only b e ac hieved by adopting a responsible d riv ing sty le. Driving and o peration 197 Illum inates whilst driving: The system is switched off or a fault has oc curred. The vehicle can continue to be driven. However, driv ing stability may worsen depending on the nature of the road surface. Switch on ES P®P lu s again, or hav e the cause of the fault rectified by a workshop. The system’s integ ra ted self-diagnostics allow s faults to be quickly remedied. Control indicator v Illuminates for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on. The system is now rea dy for opera tion. Flashing during driving: This shows the system has com e into action. The engine output may be reduced (the sound of the engine cha nges) a nd the vehic le ma y be braked automatically to a small degree. S witc hing off 3 ESP® Pl us can b e deactivated by pressing button v 3. Deactivation is only possible up to a speed of 40 mph (60 k m/h) and is indicated by illumination of control indicator v in the instrument cluster. Pressing the v button again or turning on the ignition switches ES P®P lu s on again. 198 Drivin g and operatio n Cont inuous Dam ping C ontrol 3 (CDC ) Normal mode CDC automatically adapts vehicle dam ping to the current driv ing situation and road conditions. The sy stem continually monitors w heel and vehic le mov ements and immediately modifies the damping of each shock absorber. Chassis calibration is optimally adap ted to the driving situation and road conditions. Continuous Damping Control is alwa ys in normal mode with the ig nition is sw itc hed on. If d esired, the system c an be switched to SPO RT mode. SPORT mode When driving in SPO RT mode, the damping, steering 3 (not for engines Z 28 N EL/NET) 1), throttle application and for automatic transmissions 3 - the shifting points are changed. Damping and steering 3 b ecome more direct and provide better contac t with the road surface. The engine reacts more quic kly to ac celera tor m ovem ents. With automatic transmission 3 the shift tim es are reduced and g ear changes occur at higher eng ine speeds (not w hen cruise control 3 is a ctive). In S PO RT mode, the damping c ontrol is adap ted to a sportier driving sty le, a mong other things. This ad aptation results in a "harder" suspension setting. Activating S PORT m od e Press the S PO RT button. The LED in the button illum inates. In v ehicles with automatic transmission 3 the control indicator 1 also illuminates in the tra nsmission display. If the Winter programme 3 has been switched on (v ehicles with automatic transmission 3) SPO RT mode cannot be activated. Winter programm e - see p age 180. 1) Sales d esigna tion – s ee p a ges 284, 28 5. Driving and o peration Dea ctivating SPO RT mode Briefly press the SPO RT button a gain. The LED in the button extinguishes. The Continuous Damping Control system resumes N orm al mode. 199 The sy stem’s integrated self-diagnostics allows faults to b e q uick ly rem edied. SPO RT mode is switched off by switching off the ignition or switching off the Winter programme 3 (v ehicles with automatic transm ission 3). Winter programme - see pa ge 180. Control indica tor u for C ontinuous Damping C ontrol or SPO RT mode fault Illum inates for a few second s a fter the ignition is switc hed on. I f the control indica tor does not go out, or if it illum ina tes whilst driving, there is a fa ult in the Continuous Damping C ontrol system or SPORT mode. The system is not ready for op eration. Hav e the cause of the fault rectified by a workshop. 200 Drivin g and operatio n Crui se control 3 Cruise control can store and maintain speeds of approx. 20 to 125 m ph (30 to 200 km /h). Deviation from the saved speed is possible on uphill or d ownhill inclines. For safety reasons the cruise control cannot be activated until the footb rake has been depressed once. Cruise control is operated with buttons m , g, and § on the turn signa l stalk . Do not use the c ruise control if it is not adv isable to maintain a c onstant sp eed (e. g. in situations presenting a danger to yourself and other road users, in heavy traffic or on winding , slippery or greasy roads). With automatic transmission 3, only use cruise control in D or in Automatic mode with Easytronic 3. When the cruise control is active, reaction tim es ma y b e increased due to the d ifferent position of the feet. 9 Warning Even with cruise c ontrol activated, the driver has full resp onsibility for maintaining an app ropriate speed. Disregard of these instructions could lead to injury or danger to life. C ontrol indicator m Illuminates for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on. The system is now ready for operation. When driving, control indicator m will illuminate as soon as the system is switched on. Driving and o peration Decelerate With cruise control active, hold down button g or briefly press it repeatedly : speed is reduced continuously or in steps of 1.2 m ph (2 k m/h). When button g is released the current speed is stored and maintained. 201 To deactivate Briefly press button §: C ruise control is switched off, control indicator m extinguishes and the vehic le slowly decelerates. To continue driving, dep ress the ac celerator pedal in the usual ma nner. For reasons of safety , cruise control deactivates under certain d riv ing conditions. For ex ample: z if the vehicle’s speed drops below approx. 20 mp h (30 km/h), or z if the brak e pedal is depressed, or To activate Briefly p ress button m: the c urrent speed is stored and m ainta ined. The accelerator pedal can be released. Vehicle speed can be increased by depressing the accelerator pedal. When the a ccelerator peda l is released, the previously stored speed is resum ed. Increa se With cruise control activ e, hold down button m or briefly press it repea tedly: speed is increased continuously or in steps of 1.2 mph (2 km/h) without using the accelerator pedal. When button m is released the current speed is stored and m aintained. z if the clutch pedal is dep ressed, or z if the selector lever of automatic tra nsmission 3 or Easytronic 3 is in N. Resuming the stored speed Briefly press button g at a sp eed above 20 mph (30 km/h): the speed selected before the cruise control w as switc hed off is resumed. The stored speed va lue is deleted when the ignition is switched on. 202 Drivin g and operatio n Park ing dista nc e sensors 3 The parking distance sensors mak e reverse parking easier by measuring the distance between the vehicle a nd an obsta cle, and giving a n acoustic signal in the p assenger compartment. The sy stem registers distance b y means of four sensors in each of the front and rear bumpers. To activa te With the ignition switched on, the front and rear parking distance sensors are automatically activa ted when reverse g ear is engag ed. The parking distance sensors c an also be activa ted a t speed s of less than 15 mph (25 km/h) b y pressing the r button on the instrument panel. An illumina ted LED a nd an acoustic signal indicate that it is ready for operation. Driving and o peration C aravan/trailer towing equipm ent 3, carav an/trailer towing The sy stem automatically detects if a towbar is properly fitted to the vehicle. If the vehicle approaches a n ob stacle to the front or rea r, a series of signals is audible in the vehicle interior. The interval between the signals becomes shorter a s the d istance is reduced. If the dista nce is less than 30 cm , the signal will b e continuous. When towing, inserting the c aravan/trailer plug in the sock et automatically sw itches off the p arking dista nce sensors for the rear. 9 Warning Und er certain circum stances, various reflective surfaces on objects or clothing as w ell as external noise sourc es may cause the system to fail to detect ob stacles. For this reason, care must be ta ken when reversing even if the pa rk ing distance sensors are operational. This is of p artic ular im porta nce when in the vicinity of ped estria ns. To deactivate To d eactiva te the sy stem, press button r again, the LED in the button w ill go dark. The sy stem switches itself off autom atically when the forwards speed exceeds approx. 15 mph (25 k m/h). 203 Fitting rear load ra cks 3 Rear load rack s, e.g . bicy cle rack s, fitted nea r the sensors could disrupt the system . Control indica tor r Illum inates: Fault in system. The system is not op erational. Have cause of fault remed ied by a workshop. The system’s integ ra ted self diagnostics allows faults to b e quickly remedied. Flashes: The fault is d ue to sensors obstructed with snow or ice. The sensors must be undam aged a nd free of d irt, snow and ic e. Interference due to ex ternal sources of ultra sound (e.g . pneum atic drills, rota ry machines). Once the source of interference is removed, the sy stem will operate normally . 204 Drivin g and operatio n The vehic le is automatically ra ised at the rear, increasing the spring tra vel and ground c learance. The automatic level control system is activated after ap prox . 2 miles (3 k m), depending on the vehicle load ing and the na ture of the road surface. Head lig ht range adjustment – see p age 131. Do not use full load in the event of faults. Have the ca use of the fault rectified straight awa y by a workshop. Autom atic l ev el control 3 Autom atic level control makes it possible to keep the height of the vehicle constant when subjected to different loads in the rea r (e.g. when towing a caravan/trailer). This significantly improves driving conditions. Tyre p ressure monitori ng system 3 The tyre p ressure monitoring system continuously monitors the pressure of all four tyres while the vehicle is being driven. A pressure sensor is integrated in each wheel. O nce each m inute, the pressure of each tyre is sent to a control unit for compa rison. if the sy stem detects one or more pressure differenc es, control indicator w illum inates or fla shes red. I n vehicles with check control 3, the ex act pressure of the ty re in question appears on the information display. In v ehicles with Graphical I nformation Display 3 or Colour Inform ation Display 3 and trip c om puter 3, current tyre pressures can b e shown in the inform ation display . For the system to be operational, all wheels must be eq uipped with pressure sensors and a ll tyres must be inflated to the prescribed pressure. The tyre pressure monitoring sy stem automatically detects if the vehicle is being d riv en with a load of up to 3 persons or a full load. Driving and o peration O nce the ignition is switched on, the sy stem is operational and w ill continuously monitor the tyre pressures at speeds of approx. 20 m ph (30 km /h) and a bove. 205 Ü Board Computer 9 Warning BC 1 The tyre pressure monitoring system does not replace manual check s with a suitable gauge. Timer BC 2 Tyres Check tyre pressures a t least ev ery 14 day s and prior to any long journey; the tyres should be checked when cold. Don’t forget to check the spare 3. Tyre pressure – see pa ges 213, 299. Display of current tyre pressure 3 Select menu item Tyres from the Board Comp ut er menu. The current pressure of each tyre is display ed. C ontrol indicator w in red a s w arning message Illumination in red whilst driving indicates deviating tyre pressure. Indicator illuminates red: Minor tyre pressure differenc e; slow down. C heck ty re pressure a t next opp ortunity with a suitable gauge and correct if nec essary . Indicator flashes red: C onsiderab le pressure d ifference or direct loss of pressure. Stop imm ediately and check tyre and ty re pressure. Fit spare wheel if necessary - see pages 236, 238. 206 Drivin g and operatio n Warning messages in the Graphical Information Displa y 3 or Colour Information Display 3 In the model variant with check control 3 differing tyre pressures whilst d riv ing are indicated by m essa ges on the information display. The message appears in abbreviated form depending on the model variant. For exa mple, the following messages c an be displayed: Navi active Navi active Tyre pressure Attention! C heck rea r left tyre (value in bar) F ron t left tyre pressure loss (va lu e in b ar) OK A graphic 3 indica ting the left rear tyre is shown together with the current ty re pressure: S light pressure deviation. Reduce speed. Chec k pressure at nex t op portunity with appropriate g auge a nd correct if necessary. On the Colour Information Display this report will app ear in y ellow. OK A dia gram 3 appears at the same time, ma rk ing the front left ty re and showing the current ty re pressure: Considerable pressure difference or direct loss of pressure. Exit flow of traffic as soon as possible without obstructing other vehicles, stop and check tyre and ty re pressure. Fit spare wheel if necessary see pages 236, 238. O n the C olour Information Display this report will appear in red. Acknowledgem ent of warnings – see page 116. Driving and o peration General information The tyre pressure monitoring system is not ready for operation if the em ergenc y/spare wheel is used and is not fitted with a pressure sensor; the control indica tor w illuminates yellow. The tyre pressure monitoring sy stem rema ins operational for the other three wheels. Control indicator w in yellow as fault message If control indicator w illuminates y ellow whilst driving , there is a fault in the ty re pressure m onitoring system. Fitting a wheel without a pressure sensor (e.g. the spare wheel 3) w ill also generate a fault in the system. Have the ca use of the fault rem edied by a workshop. The system ’s integrated self-diagnostics allows faults to be quickly remedied. If you use a complete set of wheels which are not fitted with sensors for the tyre pressure monitoring system, e. g. four winter tyres or a ftermarket tyres of a different size, no fault messa ge w ill be display ed. The ty re pressure m onitoring sy stem is not ready for operation. Sensors for the tyre pressure monitoring sy stem can be retro-fitted by a workshop up on request. 207 When m anually chec king tyre pressure with a pressure gauge, sc rew the adapter onto the valve. Tyre pressure – see p age 213. Every time a tyre is changed, the va lv e inserts and tyre pressure monitoring system sealing ring s m ust be rep laced by a workshop. The use of commerc ially ava ila ble liquid filled run-flat systems or repair kits can impa ir the function of the sy stem. Vauxhall-approved systems can be used. Rad io transmitters (e.g. radio headphones, walk ie-talkies) operated in the area could cause interference in the ty re pressure monitoring sy stem. 208 Drivin g and operatio n Footbrak e The footbrake comprises two independ ent brak e circuits. Brake system The effectiveness of the brakes is a n important factor for traffic safety. If one brake circuit faults, the vehicle can still be braked with the other brake circuit. However the brak ing effect will occur at a lower ped al position and considerably more forc e is required. The braking distance is longer. Contact a work shop before continuing to d riv e. To improve effectiveness, do not b ra ke unnecessarily hard for the first 125 miles (200 km) after new brake pads have been fitted. Brake pad wear must not exceed a specified limit. Regular maintenance as detailed in the Service Book let is therefore of the utm ost importance for traffic safety. Hav e worn brak e pa ds replaced by a workshop. Pads tha t hav e been tested and approved guarantee optimum bra ke p erformance. Brake assist If the brak e p edal is slammed on, the vehicle is autom atically brak ed w ith maximum brake force am plifica tion in order to achieve the shortest possib le braking distance w hen full-on brak ing oc curs (braking a ssist). Mainta in steady p ressure on the brake pedal for a s long a s full-on braking is to continue. When the brak e pedal is relea sed, the maxim um brake forc e amplification is tak en awa y. Adapt ive brak e light During full-on braking, all three b ra ke lig hts flash for the duration of ABS control. To ensure that full pedal travel – can be utilised, particularly if there is a fault in one of the b ra ke circuits, there m ust be no ma ts in the pedal area - see page 185. When the engine is not running, the assistance of the brake servo unit disappears once the brak e pedal ha s been depressed once or twice. Braking effect is not red uced, but braking req uires significa ntly greater force. This is especially important to bear in mind w hen towing. Driving and o peration 209 Check the brake lights b efore starting out on a journey. On v ehicles with check control 3 the brake lights are check ed automatically – see page 124. Shortly after starting each journey the effectiveness of the b ra ke system should be tested at low speed and without inconv eniencing other tra ffic, especia lly if the b ra kes are wet, e. g. after the vehicle has been washed. The b ra ke fluid level should be check ed reg ularly . If the brake fluid level is too low and the hand brake is not ap plied, control indicator R in the instrum ent cluster illuminates – see pa ge 99. Handbra ke Alw ays app ly the handbrake firmly without actuating the relea se button; to do this fold up the armrest 3. Apply as fully as possible on uphill or downhill inclines. The mechanic al handbrake acts on the brakes on the rear wheels. It engages autom atic ally when applied. To release the handbrake pull the lev er up slightly, press the ratchet knob , and fully low er the lever. To reduce the operating forces of the ha ndb ra ke, dep ress the footbrak e a t the sam e time. Brak e system control indicat or R The control indicator illuminates when the ignition is switched on if the handbrake is app lied or if the b ra ke or clutch fluid level is too low. B ra ke fluid – see page 276. 9 Warnin g If the control indicator illum ina tes when the handbrake is released, stop driving immediately. Contact a workshop. 210 Drivin g and operatio n Fault Anti-lock Brake System (ABS u ) ABS continually monitors the brake system and prevents the wheels from locking reg ardless of the type of road surfac e or tyre grip. It starts to regulate the braking p ressure as soon as a w heel shows a tendency to lock. The v ehicle remains steera ble, even in the event of very heavy braking, for instance on bends or when sw erving to av oid an obstacle. Even in the ca se of full-on braking, the ABS makes it p ossible to drive round an obsta cle without releasing the brakes. ABS control is made app arent through a pulse in the brake peda l and the noise of the regulation proc ess. 9 Warning For optimum b ra king, keep the brak e pedal fully depressed throughout the braking p rocess, despite the fac t that the pedal is pulsating. Do not red uce the pressure on the pedal. Do not let this special safety feature tempt y ou into taking risks when driving. Traffic safety can only be achieved by adopting a responsib le driving style. 9 Warnin g If there is a fault in ABS, the wheels may be subject to locking due to braking that is heavier tha n normal. The ad vantages of AB S are no longer opera tional. Y ou can continue driving, provided y ou drive with care and anticipation. Control i nd icator u for ABS It illum ina tes for a few seconds after the ignition is turned on. The sy stem is read y for operation when the control indicator extinguishes. If the control indicator does not go out after a few seconds, or if it illuminates whilst driving, there is a fa ult in the ABS. The brake system remains operational without ABS regulation. Self-check Each time the ignition is turned on and the engine started , after moving away from a speed of around 2 mph (3 k m/h) the system performs a self-check which may be audible. Hav e the cause of the fault elim ina ted by a workshop. The self-d ia gnosis integrated into the system allows rapid fault identification. Driving and o peration Wheels, tyres See page 297 for suitable tyres a nd restrictions. Tyres fitted in the factory are a dapted to the c hassis a nd provide optimum driving comfort and safety . Changing tyre/wheel typ e Before c hanging to other tyres or wheels, note the necessa ry changes. If tyres of a different size than those fitted at the factory are used, the electronic speedom eter may require reprogramming to ensure that the correct sp eed is display ed. 9 Warning Use of unsuitab le tyres or wheels m ay lead to accidents and render the vehicle unroa dworthy . 211 Vehicles with ty re pressure m onitoring system 3 If y ou ha ve winter tyres or a ftermarket tyres of a different size fitted, sensors for the tyre pressure monitoring system can b e retro-fitted by a workshop upon request. O therwise the sy stem will not display ty re pressure deviations. Tyre pressure monitoring sy stem 3 – see page 204. 212 Drivin g and operatio n Fitting new tyres Fit tyres in pairs or in sets, which is ev en better. Ensure that tyres on one a xle are: z the same size, z the same design, z the same make, z and have the same tread pattern. Fit direc tional tyres such that they roll in the direc tion of travel. The rolling d irection is indicated by a symbol (e.g. a n arrow) on the sidewall. Tyres fitted opposing the rolling direction (e. g. when a tyre is chang ed) should be refitted a s soon as possible. This is the only way to obtain full benefit from the design properties of the tyre. Some b ra nd s of tyres have a b eaded ed ge for a lloy wheels to protect against damage. If wheel trim is used on steel wheels with beaded-edg e ty res, the following procedure must be followed: z Use wheel trims and ty res tha t are approved by Vauxhall for the vehicle in question a nd therefore meet all the requirem ents pertaining to the respective wheel/ty re c om bina tion. z If the wheel trims and tyres used a re not Vauxhall-app rov ed, the tyres must not ha ve a beaded edg e. 9 Warnin g Use of unsuitable tyres or wheel trims could lead to sudden loss of air and thereby accidents. Driving and o peration Tyre pr essure Check ty re pressures, including the spare wheel, at least ev ery 14 day s and prior to any long journey; the ty res should be check ed when cold. Don’t forget to check the spare. In vehicles with tyre p ressure monitoring sy stem 3 there is an ad apter in the valve cap key. Screw adapter to valv e before attaching tyre pressure gauge see p age 204. Use the v alve cap key to make unscrewing the valve caps easier. The key is located on the inside of the tank flap. Do not reduce ty re pressure when the tyres are wa rm. O therwise the pressure may drop b elow the perm issible minimum when the tyres cool down. Ty re p ressure - see page 299. After having chec ked the tyre pressures, tig hten the va lv e ca ps using the v alve cap key . 213 Incorrect tyre p ressures will im pair sa fety, vehicle handling, c om fort a nd fuel econom y and w ill increase tyre wear. If the pressure is too low , this can result in consid erable tyre warm-up and interna l dam age, lead ing to tread separation and even to ty re blow-out at high speeds. Hidd en tyre dama ge is not elim inated by adjusting the tyre pressure. 9 Warnin g Incorrect ty re pressure could lead to a flat tyre. 214 Drivin g and operatio n Check tyres regularly for dama ge (p enetrated foreign bodies, punctures, cuts, c ra cks, bulges in side walls). Chec k wheels for dam age. If dam age or unusual wear is found, contact a work shop. 9 Warning Dama ge m ay lead to ty re blow-out. Tyre cond ition, w heel condi tion Drive over edges slowly and at a rig ht angle if p ossible. Driving ov er sha rp edges can lead to hidden ty re damage a nd wheel dam age which is only noticed later on. Tread d ep th C heck tread depth regularly. When pa rk ing, ensure that the tyres a re not pressed against the ed ge of the kerb . C orrect tyre pressure. If w ear in the front is greater than that in the rear, m ov e the rear wheels to the front ax le and vice versa. For reasons of safety , tyres should be replaced when their tread depth has worn down to 2 to 3 mm (winter tyres: 4 mm). Driving and o peration General i nformati on z The danger of aq uap laning is greater if the ty res are worn. z Tyres age, even if they a re used only very little or not at all. A spare wheel which has not b een used for six years should be used w ith ca re. z Never fit used tyres the prev ious history and use of w hich y ou do not know. z So as not to im pair brake cooling , use only wheel trims app rov ed for use on your vehicle. The legally permissible minimum tread depth (1.6 m m) has been reached when the tread has worn down as far as one of the w ear indicators (TWI 1 )). A number of wear indicators a re spaced at equal intervals around the ty re within the tread. Their position is indicated by markings on the ty re sidewall. 1) TWI = T read We ar Ind ica to r. 215 Tyre d esigna tions Meaning s: e.g. 195/65 R 15 91 H 195 = Tyre width in mm 65 = Cross-section ratio (ty re height to width) in % R = Belt ty pe: Radial 15 91 H = Wheel d ia meter in inch = Load ind ex e.g. 91 c orresponds to 618 kg = Speed cod e letter S peed code letters: Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h) S T up to 112 mph (180 km/h) up to 118 mph (190 km/h) H V up to 130 mph (210 km/h) up to 150 mph (240 km/h) W up to 168 mph (270 km/h) 216 Drivin g and operatio n Winter tyres 3 For notes on fitting new tyres – see page 212. See page 299 for restric tions. Winter tyres im prove safety at tem peratures below 7 °C and should therefore be fitted on all the wheels. The d esign of summ er tyres mea ns they have limited qualities for winter driving. If the m aximum p ermissible speed for the winter tyres is less than that of the vehicle, a notic e indicating the maxim um permissib le speed for the tyres must be affix ed within the driver’s field of vision 1 ). If you use the spare wheel when it is fitted with a sum mer ty re, the vehic le’s driveab ility may b e affected, esp ecially on slippery road surfaces. O btain a replacement for the faulty tyre as soon as possible, and have the w heel balanced and fitted to the vehicle. 1) Va ries from cou ntry to co untry on a ccou nt o f na tion al reg ulations. Wheel trims 3 If the wheel trims and tyres used are not Vauxhall-approved, ma ke sure that the tyres do not have a beaded edg e see page 212. Driving and o peration Wheel trim on steel w heels could com e into contact with parts of the chain and be damaged. R emove the wheel trim – see p age 239. Ty re chains may only be used a t speeds up to 30 m ph (50 km/h) 1 ) and, when travelling on roads that are free of snow, they may be used for brief periods only since they are subjec t to rapid wear on a hard road and may snap. Temporary wheel 3 Tyre chains must not be used on the temporary spare wheel. If y ou need to use tyre chains after suffering a flat front tyre, fit the temporary spa re on the rear ax le and transfer one of the rea r wheels to the front axle. For notes on the tem porary spare wheel – see page 237. Wheel changing – see pag e 238. C orrect tyre pressure. Tyre pressure monitoring sy stem 3 – see page 204. Tyre cha ins 3 Restrictions and further information – see page 299. Tyre c hains are only permitted on the drive wheels (front ax le). They must be fitted to the ty res sy mmetrica lly in order to achieve a concentric fit. Always use fine mesh chains that add no more than 10 mm to the tyre tread and the inboard sides (including chain lock). 1) Va ries from cou ntry to co untry on a ccou nt o f na tion al reg ulations. 217 218 Drivin g and operatio n Roo f racks 3 9 Warning Disreg ard of these notes ca n lead to injuries which may be fatal. Vehicle passengers must b e informed according ly . For safety reasons and to avoid roof dam age, we recommend using the Vauxhall roof ra ck system approved for your vehicle. Fasten the roof rack following the instructions that ac company the sy stem. Driving hints – see page 184. Version wit hout roof rail ing Fold cov ers of installation openings up wards. Attac h roof rack at appropriate points see enclosed roof luggage rack system instructions. Versi on with roof ra iling 3 Attach roof rack to roof railing at p oints show n in illustration - see enclosed roof luggage rack sy stem instructions. Driving and o peration Towing equipment 219 3 9 Warning Disreg ard of these notes ca n lead to injuries which may be fatal. Vehicle passengers must b e informed according ly . O nly use a ca ra van/trailer tow ing dev ice approved for the vehicle. Hav e a tow ing device fitted by workshop, who will inform you of any possible caravan/trailer load increases. They will hav e the instructions for fitting the device and any necessa ry changes to the vehic le concerning cooling, heat shields or other devices. 9 Warning The coupling ball bar is to b e removed when not towing . For installation dimensions of the carava n/trailer towing equipment – see pages 311, 312. Towing equipment with removable coupling ball bar 3 , Saloon / Hatch 3 Stowa ge of coupling b all b ar The coupling ball ba r is stored in a bag strapped to the spa re wheel. Fitti ng the coupling b all b ar C om press the sealing plugs at the ends and pull out of the opening for the coupling ball bar. S tow the sealing plugs in the luggage compa rtm ent. Disengage socket and fold d ow n 3. 6 220 Drivin g and operatio n Checking the tensioning of the c oupling ball b ar: z Red m arking on turn knob points towa rd s green m arking on coupling ba ll bar. z Gap of approx. 6 millimetres between rotary knob and coupling ball bar. z Key is in lock. Otherwise, the coupling ball bar must be tensioned before it is inserted into the coupling housing: z O pen coupling ball bar, z Pull turn k nob out and then turn it clockwise as far as it will go – see illustration. Inserting the coupling b all bar Insert the tensioned coupling ball bar in the coupling housing and push firmly upwards until you hear the coupling ball ba r eng aging. The turn knob snaps back into its home position resting a gainst the coup ling ball bar. 9 Warnin g Do not touch the turn k nob when inserting the coupling ball bar – risk of injury. Driving and o peration 221 Imp or tant Check that the coupling ball bar is correctly installed: z Red mark ing on turn knob p oints towards white marking on coupling ball bar. z No gap between turn k nob and coupling ball b ar. z C oupling ba ll bar must be seated firm ly in coupling housing. z C oupling ba ll bar must be locked and key m ust be rem oved. O pen coupling ball b ar. Remove key and put on provided protectiv e clip. When the coupling b all bar is locked the turn knob can no longer b e pulled out. 9 Warning Towing is permitted only with a c orrectly fitted towb ar. If the towbar cannot be fitted correctly, contact a workshop. Eye for b reak-aw ay st opping c able In the case of carava ns/trailers with brake, attach the break-away stop ping cable to the eye. Ey e - see Fig. 17721 J. Dismounti ng the coupling b all b ar C lose coup ling ball bar. Pull the turn knob out and then turn it clockw ise as far as it will go. Pull the coupling ball b ar downwards out of the coupling housing and stow it in the luggage compa rtm ent – see p age 219, Fig. 17729 J. Insert the sealing plug in the hole for the coupling ball b ar. Fold away the socket – see page 219, Fig. 17717 J . Do not use steam -jet cleaners or other high-pressure clea ners to clean the coupling ball b ar. 222 Drivin g and operatio n Towing equipment with pivo ting coupling ball bar 3 Folding out the c oup ling b all ba r The release lever is in the stowage compartment to the left in the luggage compartment. To open the stowa ge c om partment, push both latches down and open the cover. Push the release lever down; the LED on the lever is illuminated while the coupling ball bar is not engaged. A wa rning buzzer also sounds and the coupling ba ll bar pivots down. 9 Warning Mak e sure that no one is in the p iv ot zone of the c oupling b all bar. Risk of b od ily injury . Swivel the coupling ba ll bar back wards until it engages (see Fig. 17726 J). The LED must g o out a nd the warning buzzer must cease. Otherwise, repeat the proced ure. I mporta nt C heck tha t the coupling ball bar is correctly eng aged: z LED is not illuminated. z No warning buzzer. Driving and o peration 223 Caravan/trailer towing 9 Warning C arava n and tra iler loads 1 ) The permissib le carav an/trailer load s a re vehicle-dependent and engine-dependent ma ximum v alues which must not be exceeded. The actual carava n/trailer load is the d ifference between the actual gross weight of the carav an/trailer and the actual c oupling socket load with the carav an/trailer atta ched. When the carav an/trailer load is being checked, therefore, only the caravan/trailer w heels – and not the joc key wheel – m ust be standing on the weighing apparatus. Caravan/trailer towing is permissible only when the c oupling ba ll bar is engag ed correctly. I f the coupling ball b ar cannot be engaged correctly, the LED does not go out or the warning b uzz er does not go off. Seek the assistanc e of a work shop. Ca rava n/tra iler wit h break-a way cable 3 For caravans/trailers with brak es, loop break-away cable around coup ling ball bar. Stowi ng the coupling ball b ar Open the stowage compartment – see p age 222. Push the release lever down; the LED on the lev er remains illuminated as long as the coupling ball ba r is not engaged . A warning buzzer also sound s a nd the coupling b all bar piv ots down. The permissib le carav an/trailer load s for y our v ehicle are giv en in the vehicle documents. Unless otherwise stated, they are valid for g ra dients up to max . 12%. Piv ot the coupling ball ba r to the right and up . The LED must g o out and the wa rning buzzer m ust cease, otherwise repeat the proc edure. 1) Ob serve n atio nal regula tions. 224 Drivin g and operatio n The permissible cara van/trailer load should be fully utilised only by drivers who are adequately experienced in towing large or heav y carav ans/trailers. The permitted carav an/trailer load ap plies up to the specified incline and up to an altitude of 1000 m etres abov e sea -level. Since engine power decreases as altitude increases because of the air becom ing thinner, therefore reducing climbing ability, the p ermitted towing weig ht a lso decreases by 10% for every 1000 m etres of additional altitude. The towing weight does not have to be reduced when driv ing on roads with slight inclines (less than 8%, e.g. m otorway s). The actual carav an/trailer load plus the actual gross weight of the towing vehicle must not exceed the max imum permitted tow ing weight. For example, if the permitted Gross Vehicle Weight is utilised , the caravan/trailer load must only b e used until the maximum permitted towing weight is rea ched. The max imum permitted towing weight is shown on the identification plate - see p age 282. C oup ling sock et load The coupling socket load is the load exerted by the ca ra van/trailer on the coupling ball. It can be va ried by changing the weight distribution when loading the carav an/trailer. The m aximum permissible coupling socket load (S aloon / Hatch: 78 kg, Estate: 85 k g) is specified on the towing equipment identification plate and in the vehicle documents. Alw ays aim for the maximum load, espec ia lly in the c ase of heav y carav ans/tra ilers. The coupling socket load should never fall below 25 kg. When measuring the coupling socket load , ma ke sure that the drawbar of the loaded carav an/trailer is at the same height as it will be when the carav an/trailer is coupled with the towing vehic le loa ded. Particularly important for carav ans/trailers with tandem ax le. Driving and o peration Trai ler Stabi lity Assist 3 (TS A) TSA monitors vehicle movements when towing a caravan/trailer. If the sy stem detects lurching movem ents, engine power is reduced while the vehicle a nd carav an/trailer com bination is selectively brak ed until the lurching ceases. Rear axle load during tow ing When the carava n/trailer is coup led up and the towing vehicle is fully load ed, including all occupants, the permissib le rear axle load (for inform ation - see the identification plate or vehicle documentation) may be ex ceeded by 50 kg. The Gross Vehicle Weight rating must not be ex ceeded in the process. TSA is a function of the Electronic Stability Programme (ES P ®P lu s ) - see page 196. O n the increased payload version 3, the permissible rear ax le load may be exceeded by 65 kg . If the permissib le rear axle load is exceeded, a maximum speed of 60 mp h (100 km/h) must be applied. If lower nationa l speed limits are p rescrib ed for vehic les towing caravans/trailers, these must be observed . 225 Tyre pressure Ad just the ty re pressure on the towing vehicle to the v alue specified for a full load - see page 299. Also check the pressure of the carav an/trailer w heels and the sp are wheel. 226 Drivin g and operatio n Driv ing chara cteristics, tow ing tip s For caravans/trailers with brak es, attach break-away cable to eye 3 or loop around coupling ball ba r if no eye av ailable. Turn signal control indicator – see page 98. Before attaching the ca ra van/trailer, lubricate the ball of the caravan/tra iler towing device. However, do not lub rica te the b all if a stabiliser, which acts on the coupling ball, is being used to da mp sna king . Handling is greatly influenced by the loa ding of the carav an/trailer. Loads should therefore be secured so that they cannot slip and be p laced in the centre of the carav an/trailer if p ossible, i. e. above the axle. Check cara van/trailer lig hting b efore starting to drive. The fog tail light on the vehic le is deactivated when towing a carava n/trailer. Ca ra van/trailers with LED turn signals m ust have a provision tha t makes it possible to monitor standard light bulbs. The parking distance sensors at the rear 3 are d eactivated when tow ing a caravan/trailer. In the case of trailers with low driving stability or caravans with a permitted Gross Vehicle Weight of 1400 k g (Saloon / Hatch)/1500 kg (Estate), do not exceed a speed of 50 mp h (80 km/h); the use of a friction-type sta biliser is highly recommended. Do not d riv e faster than 50 mph (80 k m/h) if possible, ev en in countries where hig her speeds are permitted. Make sure that you have enough room when cornering and a void sud den manoeuvres. If the cara van/trailer starts to sway, drive more slowly, d o not a ttempt to correct the steering and b ra ke sharply if necessary. If it is necessary to apply the brak es fully , depress the brak e pedal a s hard as possible. Remem ber that the braking d istance for vehicles towing carava ns/trailers with and without brake is always greater than that for vehic les not tow ing a carav an/trailer. When driving downhill, the brakes are under considerably m ore load when towing a caravan/trailer. For this reason, d riv e in the same gear as if driving up hill and drive at a sim ila r speed . Automatic transm ission 3 or Easy tronic 3 in Automatic mode will automatically select the d riv ing programme with the optimum engine b ra king effec t. If necessary, the gears can a lso be selec ted ma nually. Driving and o peration 227 The cooling fan is electrically operated. Its cooling power is therefore independent of the engine speed. For v ehicles with a utomatic transmission 3 or Easy tronic 3 in Autom atic mode it is sufficient to apply full throttle. Since a considerable amount of heat is generated at high engine sp eed s a nd less at slower speeds, d o not shift down when climbing hills whilst the vehicle is still coping with the g ra dient in the higher gea r. Before starting-off under extreme conditions (high combination weight, mountainous terrain w ith steep inclines), switch off all unnecessary electrical loads (e.g. heated rear window, air conditioning system 3, heated seats 3). Diesel engines: O n rising g radients of 10% or more, do not drive faster than 20 mph (30 k m/h) in 1st gear or 30 mph (50 km/h) in 2nd gea r; with automatic transm ission 3, do not exceed 25 mp h (40 k m/h) in position 1. Start ing on inclines For vehicles with manual transmission, the most favourable engine speed when starting-off on an incline is between 2500 and 3000 rpm for petrol engines and between 2000 and 2200 rpm for diesel engines. Hold engine speed constant, engage clutch gradually (let slip), release ha ndb ra ke and open throttle. If possible, the engine speed should not drop d uring this procedure. 228 Self-help, vehicle care Self-help, vehicle care Diesel fuel system, bleeding . .... .... ..... . Bonnet ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Starting .... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Towing ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Warning triangle ¨ 3 , first-aid kit + 3.. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Spa re wheel 3 . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Jac k £ 3 and vehicle tools 3 .. .... ..... . Changing wheels . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Tyre repair kit 3 ... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Electrical system .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Fuses and the most important c ircuits they p rotect .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Bulb replacem ent .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Halogen headlight system, dipped and main beam . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Xenon headlight system , dipped and main beam ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Adaptive Forw ard Lighting (AFL) sy stem 3 ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Halogen headlight system, Xenon headlight system, parking lights .... . Tail lights . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Numb er plate light .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Courtesy lig ht .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Vehicle care. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 228 228 229 232 234 236 238 238 242 246 248 252 253 255 257 257 258 261 262 264 9 Warning Disregard of these notes can lead to injuries whic h may be fatal. Vehicle passengers must be informed accordingly. Diesel fuel system , bleeding Nev er let the tank run dry . If control indica tor Y illuminates, refuel as soon a s possible. Refuel immediately if it fla shes. Restarting after running out of fuel is possible, but sta rting b ehaviour will be delay ed. Turn on the ignition three times for 15 seconds eac h tim e. Then start the engine for a maxim um of 40 seconds. If it does not start, repeat the p rocess after waiting at least 5 seconds. I f the engine still does not start, contac t a workshop . Bon net To open the bonnet, pull the release lever located on the driv er’s side b elow the instrument panel. The bonnet will then be unlocked and will partially open. R eturn release lever to its original position. Self-help, vehicle care 229 Starting Do not sta rt wit h quick charger This prevents d amage to electronic components. Do not sta rt by pushing or tow ing Because your vehicle is fitted with a cataly tic converter, it must not be started by pushing or towing – see page 190. The v ehicle can only be started using jum p leads – see follow ing page. There is a safety catch on the underside of the b onnet: lift this upwards and op en the bonnet. To hold the bonnet open, insert the support loca ted a t the side in the small slot on the underside of the bonnet. Dirt or snow on the bonnet may drop onto the windscreen when the bonnet is opened and block the air intake. Before c losing, fasten the support in its retainer. Lower the bonnet and allow it to fa ll into its catch. Air intake – see page 166. Check tha t the bonnet is lock ed in position by pulling at its front edge. I f it is not engaged, repea t the procedure. 230 Self-help, vehicle care Sta rting t he engine wi th jump lea ds 3 A vehicle with a discharged battery can be started using jump lead s and the battery of another vehicle. Attemp ts to start the vehicle should be mad e at intervals of one minute a nd should not last longer than 15 seconds 9 Warning Be extrem ely careful when starting with jump leads. Any dev iation from the following instructions can lead to injuries or damage caused by battery explosion or damage to the elec trical sy stems of both v ehicles. z Nev er expose the battery to naked flam es or sparks. z A discharged ba ttery ca n freeze at temperatures of around 0 ° C. Alwa ys thaw out a froz en batteries in a wa rm room before attaching jum p lead s. z Do not a llow battery fluid to come into contact with eyes, skin, fabrics or painted surfa ces. The fluid c ontains sulphuric acid which can c ause injuries and damag e in the event of direct contact. z Wear eye protec tion and protective clothing when handling a b attery. z Switch off all unnecessary electrical consumers. z Use aux iliary battery with same voltage (12 v olts). Its cap acity (Ah) must not b e consid erably less than that of the discharged battery. Voltag e and capa city inform ation c an be found on the batteries. z Do not lean over the ba ttery during jump starting. z Use jump leads with insulated terminals and a cross section of at least 16 mm 2 (25 m m2 for diesel engines). z Do not disconnect the d ischarged battery from the vehicle. z Do not allow the terminals of one lead to touch those of the other lead . z Do not allow the vehicles to touch while jum p sta rting. z Apply handbrak e. M anual tra nsmission or Easytronic 3 in neutral, autom atic tra nsmission 3 in P. The battery is in a box at the front of the eng ine compartm ent, on the right-hand side as v iewed from the front. To open the box , pull the c ov er forwards and swing it upwards. Self-help, vehicle care z Do not connect leads to negative term inal of discharged battery. z Start the engine of the v ehicle prov iding the jump start. z The connection p oint should be as far away from the discharged battery as possible. z After 5 minutes, start the other engine. Start attempts should be made at intervals of 1 minute and should not last longer than 15 seconds. z Route the lead s so that they cannot catch on rotating parts in the engine compa rtm ent. Connect the lea ds in the order shown in the illustration: 1. Connect one end of the first jump lead to the positiv e terminal 1 of the battery prov iding the jump start (identified by "+" sign on battery case or terminal). 2. Connect the other end of this lea d to the positive terminal 2 of the discharged battery (" +" sign). 3. Connect the first end of the other jump lead to the negativ e terminal 3 of the battery prov iding the start ("–" sign). 4. Connect the other end of the second jump lead 4 to ground on the other vehicle, e. g. engine block or screw connection in the engine suspension. 231 z After starting, allow both eng ines to idle for approx. 3 m inutes with the leads connected. z In order to a void ex cess voltage in the electric al sy stem, b efore removing a lead, sw itc h on a n electrica l consumer (e.g. light, heated rear window) in the vehicle receiving the jump sta rt. z Reverse abov e seq uence exac tly when removing leads. 232 Self-help, vehicle care Drive slowly . Do not drive jerkily . Excessive tractive force c an damage the vehicle. 9 Warnin g For brak ing and steering, significantly hig her forces are required: brake assista nce and steering assistance are effectiv e only w ith the engine running. To prevent the entry of exhaust fum es from the tow ing vehicle, switch on the air recirc ulation 3 and close the wind ow s. Towing Towing your own v ehi cle To open the cover concealing the towing eye socket at the front right of the vehicle: disengage the cover at the bottom and pull it off downwards. The front towing ey e is located in the compartment containing the jack and vehic le tools underneath the spare wheel in the lugga ge c om partment. Jack and vehic le tools – see page 238. Screw in the front towing ey e anticlockwise as fa r as it will go until it stops in a horizontal position. Attac h a tow rope 3 – or better still a tow rod 3 – to the eye. The front towing eye may b e used only for tow ing the vehic le, not for rescuing it. Switch on ignition to release steering colum n lock and to permit opera tion of brake lights, horn and windscreen wiper. Manua l transmission or Easy tronic 3 in neutra l, automatic transmission 3 in N. Vehicles with automatic tra nsmission 3 should b e towed facing forw ards only and must not be tow ed faster than 50 mph (80 km/h) or further than 60 m iles (100 km). If the transmission is defective, or if the abov e speed or distance is to be exceeded, the front ax le m ust be raised off the ground. Self-help, vehicle care 233 Contact a workshop. If the autom atic clutch is relea sed manually a fter a p ower failure on vehicles with Easytronic 3 , tow ing is not perm itted see page 175. I n this case, contact a workshop immediately. After towing, unscrew front towing eye by rotating cloc kwise and insert a nd c lose the cap. Towing serv ice Entrust your vehicle only to the towing service of your choice and obtain an estimate on tow ing costs before employing any towing serv ice. In this w ay y ou a void unnecessary costs and possible insurance problem s during c la im processing . Tow ing another v ehic le To op en the cover c oncealing the towing eye socket at the rear right of the v ehicle: disengage the cover at the bottom and pull it off d ow nwa rds. S crew in the rear towing eye anticlockwise as far as it will g o until it stops in a horizontal position. The rea r tow ing eye is located in the compartment containing the ja ck and vehicle tools underneath the spare w heel in the luggage compartment. J ack and vehicle tools – see page 238. The rear towing eye may be used only for towing the vehicle, not for rescuing it. Attach a tow rop e 3 – or better still a tow rod 3 – to the ey e. Drive slowly . Do not drive jerkily . Excessive tractive force c an damage the vehicle. After towing, unscrew rear towing eye by rotating clockwise and insert and close the cap. 234 Self-help, vehicle care Warning triangle ¨ 3, first-aid kit + 3 To access press down bar a nd open the cover. Sal oon / Ha tch The w arning triangle and first-aid kit/ cushion are stowed in the side panel trim on the left-hand side. Depend ing on the warning triangle version, move loc king lever upwards and therefore clamp wa rning triangle in position. When loading v ehicle, always ensure that first-aid cushion or first-aid kit is a ccessib le. Self-help, vehicle care 235 When loading v ehicle, always ensure that warning triangle and first-aid cushion or first-aid kit are accessible. Est ate The w arning triangle and first-aid kit/ cushion are stowed in the side panel trim on the left-hand side. To op en, push both bars down and open the flap. 236 Self-help, vehicle care Spare wheel 3 Some vehicles are equipped with a tyre rep air kit instead of a spare wheel. See page 242. Sal oon / Ha tch The spare wheel is located in the luggage compartment under the floor cov er. I t is secured with a plastic wing nut. To open the floor cover, p ull up the handle or stra p. Estat e The spare wheel is located in the lugg age compartment under the load floor. I t is secured with a plastic wing nut. To open the loading floor, fold out release lever b y pushing at the m arked point and raise up the loading floor all the way. St owing sta nd ard size tyres in the spare w heel well The spare w heel well is not designed for all sizes of permissible tyres. I f a larger wheel must be stowed in the spa re wheel well after chang ing wheels, place the floor cover on the protruding wheel. Self-help, vehicle care Genera l informa tion Dep ending on the model variant, the spa re wheel is in the form of an temporary spare wheel 3. Please pay attention to instructions concerning temporary spare wheel in the nex t colum n and on pages 217, 242, 299. Notes on tem porary spare wheel 3 z Using a temporary spare wheel may change the driving b ehaviour of the vehicle, particularly if using winter tyres 3. Replace defective ty re as quickly as possible, ba la nce wheel and fit to vehicle. O n vehicles w ith a lloy wheels 3 the spare wheel may have a steel rim. z Fit only one temporary spare wheel. If y ou use winter tyres 3, the spare wheel may still be fitted with a summer tyre. I f you use the spare wheel the vehicle’s ha nd ling may be altered. O btain a replacement for the faulty tyre a s soon as possible, and have the wheel b alanc ed a nd fitted to the vehic le. The spare wheel may have a smaller tyre and a smaller rim tha n the wheels mounted on the vehic le 1) : Using the spare wheel m ay alter vehicle handling. Have the defective tyre replaced as soon as possible, balance the w heel and have it mounted on the vehic le. z Do not drive faster than 50 m ph (80 k m/h). z Take curves slowly. z Do not use the temporary spa re wheel for a lengthy period. z Replace temporary spare wheel with full specification wheel without delay . z Tyre chains are not permitted on the temporary spare wheel. If tyre chains have to be used after a front wheel puncture, fit temporary spare wheel to the rear ax le and fit a rear wheel to the front axle. Check tyre pressure and correct if necessary - see pa ge 299. z Please follow instructions concerning temporary spare wheel on pages 217 and 299. 1) Co untry-specific versio n: The s pa re wh eel is only to b e used as a tem po ra ry sp are wheel. 237 Not es on di rect ional tyres 3 Direc tional ty res only achiev e their full performa nc e potential when mounted in the prescribed direction of rotation. If after a flat tyre the tyre or sp are wheel is mounted against the prescribed direc tion of rotation, observe the following: z Driv ing conditions may be altered. Replac e the defective tyre a s soon as possible, balance the wheel and mount it on the vehic le. z Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km /h). z Driv e especially carefully in w et or snowy weather. For further information on directional tyres – see page 211. 238 Self-help, vehicle care Changing wh eels There may be a tyre repair kit instead of a spare wheel – see page 242. To ensure y our safety, m ake the following preparations and ob serve the follow ing inform ation when changing wheels: z Park the vehic le on a lev el, firm and nonskid surface. z Switch on hazard warning lig hts, ap ply ha nd brake, automatic transm ission 3 selector lever in P, manual transm ission or Easytronic 3 - engage 1st or reverse gear. Jack £ 3 and vehicle tools 3 The jac k and the vehicle tools hav e been specially dev eloped for your vehicle and must only be used on that vehicle. Only use jack for changing w heels. Vehi cles w ith tyre rep air k it 3 The vehicle tools a re stored in the luggage compartment together with the ty re rep air kit in a compartment beneath the floor cover. Vehi cles w ith spare w heel 3 The jack and vehicle tools are loca ted in a compartment in the luggag e compartment, b eneath the spare wheel. To rem ov e the spare w heel - see page 236. After use, stow away the jack and tools in the compartm ent as shown in illustration. z Correctly set up the warning tria ngle. Wa rning triangle – see page 234. Self-help, vehicle care z Remove spare wheel from luggage com partment - see page 236. z Before raising the v ehicle, set the front wheels to the straight-ahead position. z Slacken the wheel bolts one half turn before raising the vehicle, but do not totally unscrew the bolts. z Nev er change more than one wheel at once. z Block the wheel d iagona lly opposite the wheel to be cha nged by placing w edge bloc ks or equivalent in front and behind the wheel. z Use the jack only to change wheels. 239 z If the ground on which the vehicle is standing is soft, a solid board (max. 1 cm thick) should b e placed under the jack 3. Using a thicker b oard c ould dam age the jack 3 and the vehicle. z No people or animals may be in the vehicle when it is jacked -up. z Never crawl under a jacked-up vehic le. z Do not start or run the engine while the vehicle is on the jac k. z Before inserting the wheel bolts when changing wheels, lightly grease the cone of ea ch b olt. For this reason, c arry som e conventional grease. 1. Prise off the wheel trim using the hook included with the vehicle tools 3 . For vehicle tools - see p age 238. If the wheel trim ha s visib le w heel bolts 3, the trim ca n remain on the wheel. The retaining washers 3 on the wheel bolts must not be removed . 240 Self-help, vehicle care Alloy wheels 3: Disengage the wheel bolt caps with a screwdriv er and remove. Protect the wheel by inserting a soft c loth between the screwdriver and alloy wheel. 2. Turn wheel bolts half a turn using the wheel bolt wrench 3, p ushing the wrench 3 on as far as possible. 3. There a re plastic retainers at the front and rea r of the vehic le underbody for positioning the jack. The loca tion of each retainer is indicated by a ma rk on the bottom ed ge of the vehicle. Self-help, vehicle care 4. Before a ttac hing jac k 3 set to required height by turning the eye by hand. Fit the ja ck 3 a t the front – or rear – in such a way that the jack head eng ages in the plastic retainer beneath the vehicle. Check tha t it is properly engaged. The jack b ase must be on the ground directly b elow the jacking point in a manner that prevents it from slipping . Attach crank to eye of threaded rod and turn crank to raise v ehicle. If this is not the case, carefully lower the vehicle imm ediately and reposition the jack. 5. Unscrew wheel b olts and wipe clean with a c loth. Then apply a light coating of grease to the wheel bolts. Do not g rease the thread of the bolts. Do not put the wheel bolts down in a location where they may bec om e soiled. If the wheel bolts hav e retaining washers 3, they m ust not be rem ov ed. 241 6. Change the wheel. N otes on sp are wheel – see page 236, notes on temporary sp are wheel – see page 237. 7. Screw in wheel bolts and tighten slightly , inserting the wheel bolt wrench 3 as far as possible. 8. Lower vehicle. 9. Tighten wheel bolts c rosswise, p utting on wheel bolt wrench 3 as far as possible. 6 242 Self-help, vehicle care 10. Before refitting the wheel trim, clea n the wheel around the retaining clips. Valve sy mbol 3 on back of wheel trim must point tow ards valve on wheel. Align and refit wheel trim or w heel bolt caps 3. Alloy wheels 3: Align and refit wheel bolt caps 3. 11. S tow away replaced wheel, tools and wa rning triangle in the luggage com partment - see pa ge 238. 12. C heck the tyre pressure of the newly m ounted wheel. C orrect if necessary. 13. H ave the tightening torque of the wheel bolts on the new wheel checked on the v ehicle using a torque wrench as soon as possible and, if nec essary , c orrected. Tightening torque – see page 299. 14. Replace the faulty ty re on the wheel that wa s removed. 15. Replace tem pora ry spare wheel 3 with a full specification wheel without delay. Tyre repair kit 3 Minor dam age to the tyre tread or side wall, e.g . from foreign bodies, can be repaired using the ty re repair kit. Do not rem ove the foreign body from the tyre. Tyre damage exc eed ing 4 mm or that is on the rim cannot be repaired with the ty re repair kit. 9 Warnin g Driv ing with tyre pressures too low or tyres deflated c an cause invisible damage to the tyre. This damage c annot be eliminated with a tyre rep air kit. Park the vehicle and contac t a workshop . Im portant information – see pag e 246. In the ev ent of a flat ty re: z Switch on hazard warning lig hts, apply handb ra ke; for automa tic tra nsmission 3, move selector lever to P; for manual transmission or Easytronic 3, select 1st or rev erse gear. z Correctly set up the warning tria ngle. Wa rning triangle – see page 234. Self-help, vehicle care The ty re repair kit is in a c om partment in the spare wheel well of the luggage compartment. 1. Ta ke the pouch with the ty re repair kit from the c om partment. Carefully rem ov e the components from the p ouch. 2. Remove the compressor. 3. Remove the electrical connection cab le and a ir hose from the stow age compa rtm ents on the underside of the compressor. 243 4. Screw the com pressor air hose to the connection on the sealant bottle. 5. Fit the sealant bottle in the retainer on the compressor. Set the compressor near the tyre in such a way that the sea la nt bottle is upright. 6. Remov e the valve cap from the d efec tiv e tyre. 244 Self-help, vehicle care 7. Screw the filler hose to the tyre valv e. 8. The switch on the comp ressor must be set to § . 9. Connect the compressor plug to the accessory socket or cigarette lighter sock et. Accessory socket – see pag e 93. 10. Switch on ignition. To prev ent battery discharge, we recomm end that y ou leave the engine running. 11. S et the rocker switch on the compressor to I . The tyre is filled with sealant. 12. While the sealant bottle drains (approx. 30 seconds) the pressure indicator on the compressor briefly p oints to 6 bar (87 psi). Pressure then sinks aga in. 13. All of the sealant is pumped into the ty re. Afterw ards, the ty re is filled w ith air. 14. The prescribed tyre pressure – see pag e 299 should be reached within 10 minutes. Sw itc h off the compressor when the correc t pressure is obtained. If the specified ty re pressure is not reac hed within 10 m inutes, remove the tyre repair kit. Move the v ehicle through one ty re rotation, approx. 2 metres, in either direction. Reconnect the ty re repa ir kit and continue the filling process for 10 minutes. I f the specified tyre pressure is still not reached, the tyre is too bad ly damag ed. Park the vehicle and contact a workshop. Self-help, vehicle care Drain ex cess ty re p ressure with the button ov er the pressure ind icator. Do not run the compressor for more tha n 10 minutes - see " Important information" on pa ge 246. 15. Detach the tyre repair k it. Screw the filler hose to the free connection on the sealant bottle. This prevents sealant leak age. Stow the tyre repair kit in the lug gage compartment. 16. Wip e aw ay any sealant spill with a cloth. 17. Disma ntle the w arning triangle and stow it in the luggage compartment – see page 234. 245 18. The enclosed sticker shows the m aximum permitted speed at which the ty re repair m ay be used. App ly sticker in the driver’ s field of vision. 19. C ontinue driving immediately to allow the sealant to distrib ute evenly throughout the tyre. Stop after approx. 6 miles / 10 km (but no more than 10 minutes) and chec k tyre pressure. S crew the compressor air hose directly onto the ty re v alve (see Fig. 17256 T). As long as the tyre pressure is more than 1.3 ba r (19 psi), it may be adjusted to the p rescrib ed v alue. Repeat the proced ure until there is no more pressure loss. If the tyre p ressure ha s fallen below 1.3 bar (19 psi), the vehicle ma y no longer be used. Contact a w ork shop. 20. Stow the tyre repair k it in the luggage compartment – see pag e 242. 246 Self-help, vehicle care Im portant 9 Warning Do not d riv e faster than 50 mph (80 km/h). Do not use the temporary spare wheel for a lengthy period. Steerability and d riv ing behav iour m ay be im paired. The d riv ing characteristics of the repa ired tyre is severely affected, therefore have this tyre replac ed. If the compressor makes abnorm al noises or heats up greatly, switch it off for at least 30 minutes. The integrated safety valv e opens a t a pressure of 7 bar (102 p si). Protect the compressor from m oisture and rain. The sealant can only be stored for approx. 4 years. After this time, the sealing prop erties can no longer be gua ra nteed. Heed the exp iration date on the sealant bottle. The sealant bottle can only be used once. Replace a used sealant bottle. The compressor and seala nt c an be used from approx. -30 °C . Dispose of a used tyre repa ir kit in accordance with applicable legislation. The adap ter 3 supplied may be used to pump up other objects, such a s b alls, airbeds, d inghies. This is located on the underside of the compressor. To remove, unscrew the compressor air hose and pull out the adapter. When using the ty re repair kit, no consumer may be c onnec ted to the front ac cessory socket at the sa me tim e. Electrical system 9 Warnin g Electronic ignition system s generate very hig h voltages. Do not touch the ignition sy stem; high voltage can b e fatal. Fuses There are three fusebox es in the v ehicle: In the passenger com partment on the fa r left of the instrument panel, in the stowage compa rtm ent on the left in the luggag e compa rtm ent, and at the front of the eng ine compartm ent. Self-help, vehicle care We recommend c arry ing a complete set of fuses. Before replacing a fuse, turn off the respective switch and the ignition. Spa re fuses are kept on b ack of fusebox cover in the instrument panel. For opening cover – see nex t page. A defective fuse (Fig. 17259 T) can be recognised by its melted wire. A new fuse should only be installed after the cause of the fault has been rectified . There is a fuse extractor on the rear of the fusebox cover in the instrument panel for cha ng ing fuses – see illustration ab ov e. 247 O nly install fuses of the specified rating. Each fuse has its rating written on it, in add ition the fuses are colour coded. Fuse, colour Light brown Dark brown Red Light blue Yellow White Light green Orange Dark blue Fuse, rating 5A 7.5 A 10 A 15 A 20 A 25 A 30 A 40 A 60 A 248 Self-help, vehicle care No. C ircuit 10 S teering column m odule control unit Ra ting 7.5 A 11 Diagnostics p lug 7.5 A 12 Battery overload protection 10 A Fuses and the m ost importan t circuits they protect Some circuits may be protected by sev eral fuses. Fusebox in passenger compa rtment The fusebox is on the left, on the outside of the instrum ent panel. O pen door. Disengage cover by p ulling firmly and rem ov e. No. C ircuit 1 Infotainment system, radio transport fuse 2 Interior fan, heating, air conditioning sy stem 3 S unroof Spa re fuses, fuse ex tra ctor – see page 246. Ra ting 20 A 13 – 14 – – – 15 Door module control unit 16 – 30 A – 17 instruments, information display 15 A 18 – 19 – – – 20 Y aw rate sensor (ESP® Pl us ) 21 – 7.5 A – 30 A 30 A 40 A – 20 A 22 C igarette lighter 23 Interior fan, air conditioning, Electronic Clim ate C ontrol 24 – 4 – 5 Door module control unit – 7.5 A 25 Heating, air conditioning system 7.5 A 6 Brake light 7 Body work module control unit 8 Front passenger’s door module control unit 9 C entral control unit 7.5 A 30 A 26 Instrum ents, informa tion display 7.5 A 7.5 A 30 A 7.5 A Self-help, vehicle care No. C ircuit 249 Rating 11 Battery voltage 12 S eat heating, rear left 25 A 15 A 13 Towing equipment 14 Tailgate wiper 20 A 15 A 15 Heated seats, seat clim ate 15 A control, left front Fusebox in lugga ge compa rtment The fusebox is loca ted on the left side of the luggag e compa rtm ent, in the stowage compartment. Saloon / Hatch: Press the latch down a nd open the cover. Estate: Press both latches down and open the cover and interior trim. Spa re fuses, fuse ex tra ctor – see page 246. Some circuits may be protected by sev eral fuses. No. C ircuit 1 – Rati ng – 2 – 3 Electric seat adjustment, driv er’s seat 4 H eated rear wind ow – 40 A 5 Electric seat adjustment, front passenger’s seat 40 A 6 Electric w indow operation, right rear 30 A 7 Electric w indow operation, left rear 30 A 8 S eat heating, rea r right 9 H orn, Vauxhall ala rm system 10 Fuel p um p 40 A 15 A 15 A 20 A 16 S eat heating, front right 17 Accessory socket 15 A 15 A 18 Tailgate locking, Estate 19 Term ina l 30, Tw in Audio 30 A 10 A 20 Tank flap loc king 21 Ultrasonic sensor, Vauxhall alarm sy stem 22 Electrically op erated tailgate 23 Glass break age sensor (Vauxhall alarm system ) 24 Battery voltage 7. 5 A 5A 25 Electronic chassis 26 Term ina l 15 (starter switch), Twin Audio 27 S eat occupancy recognition, ty re pressure monitoring sy stem, rain sensor, air conditioning system 10 A 25 A 28 Parking distance sensors 29 – 7. 5 A – 30 A 7. 5 A 25 A 5A 250 Self-help, vehicle care S om e circuits may b e protec ted by several fuses. No. Ci rcuit Fusebox in engine compa rtment The fusebox is in the box at the front of the engine compartment. 9 Warning Switch off engine before op ening the fusebox in the eng ine compa rtm ent, risk of injury. To open, disengage front b attery c ov er and tilt upwards. Disenga ge the bar at the front of the cover of fusebox and swing it upwards. Spare fuses, fuse extractor – see p age 246. Rating 1 Engine electronics, transm ission elec tronics 20 A 2 Starter 3 Horn 25 A 20 A 4 Air conditioning system , Electronic Climate Control 10 A 5 Wind screen wa sh system, front and rear 15 A 6 Diesel fuel filter heating 30 A Self-help, vehicle care No. Ci rcuit 251 Rat ing 27 Easy tronic 30 A 28 Tailgate module control unit 60 A 29 ABS 40 A 30 Tailgate module control unit 60 A 31 Vehicle interior module control unit 60 A 32 ABS 40 A 33 Vehicle interior module 60 A control unit 34 Tailgate module control unit 60 A No. Circuit R ating 7 Central control unit, ESP® Pl us 15 A 8 Headlights, windscreen wash nozzles 1) Ra ting – 18 – 19 Adap tiv e Forward Lighting , headlight range ad justment 20 H eadlight rang e adjustment – 15 A 5A 5A 11 Windscreen wiper 30 A 12 Central control unit, ESP® Pl us 7.5 A 21 – 22 Windscreen wiper – 30 A 13 Headlight w ash system 14 Oxy gen sensor 30 A 10 A 23 Auxiliary heating 20 A 24 Ba ttery v oltage, terminal 30 30 A 15 Engine control unit 1 ) 16 ABS 10 A 5A 25 Ba ttery v oltage, terminal 30 30 A 26 – – 9 Power steering, brake servo 10 Ad aptive Forward Lighting 10 A No. C ircuit 17 – 7.5 A 10 A The b ra ke lights a re on all the time if the fus e is d efective an d the ignitio n is switched on. 35 Cooling fan 1) 30 A 40 A 36 Cooling fan 1) 20 A 30 A Brake servo 30 A 37 Adaptive Forw ard Lighting: Insert Slot for changing to any symmetrical dipped beam max ifor driving abroad fuse see page 136 38 – 1 ) Depen ding on eng in e. – 252 Self-help, vehicle care Headl ight ai ming We recommend that headlight adjustm ent be carried out by a workshop which w ill have special equipment. Bulb replacement Before replacing a bulb , switch ignition off and switch relevant switch off. O nly hold new b ulb at base. Do not touch the b ulb glass with b are hands, otherwise fingerprints on the glass evap orate. Residue builds up on the reflector eventually resulting in a dull reflector. Inadvertently stained bulbs may b e cleaned with a clean non-fluffy cloth, using alcohol or white spirits. Replacem ent bulb m ust be in accordance with d ata on base of defective bulb. Do not exceed wa tta ge g iv en on bulb b ase. Manual headlight range a djustment 3 must be set to 0 when adjusting the hea dlights. To c hange the lights on the left-hand side, remove filler neck from windscreen wash sy stem fluid container to gain better access: disengage reta ining c la mp and withdra w filler nec k by pulling upw ards. Wash fluid may escape if the bottle is full. 9 Warning Protect the environment. Do not allow wash fluid to seep into the ground or drain into the sewage sy stem. As the headlight has to be rem ov ed, have the bulb on the rig ht cha nged by a work shop. Self-help, vehicle care Halogen headlight system , dipped and main beam Di pped beam Headlights with separate system s for main beam 1 (inner bulbs) and dipped beam 2 (outer bulbs). 2. To change the bulb on the left, remove filler neck from windscreen wash sy stem fluid container - see pag e 252. As the hea dlight has to b e removed , have the bulb on the right cha ng ed b y a workshop . 1. O pen bonnet. 3. Turn the hea dlight cover a nticlockw ise and remove. 253 4. Push down bulb at bulb hold er. 6 254 Self-help, vehicle care 5. Remove the bulb hold er with bulb from the reflector. 6. Detach bulb from bulb mounting. Ma in beam 7. I nsert new bulb into bulb m ounting, without touc hing the glass. 1. Open bonnet. 8. I nsert new bulb so that the two lugs on the bulb mounting engage in the recesses in the reflector. 9. Engage the bulb holder. 10. Reposition the headlight cover a nd turn it c lock wise. 11. After cha ng ing the bulb on the left, insert and engage filler nec k for windscreen wa sh sy stem fluid container - see p age 252. 2. To chang e the bulb on the left, rem ove filler neck from windsc reen w ash system fluid container - see page 252. As the headlight has to be remov ed, ha ve the bulb on the right changed by a workshop. 3. Turn the headlight cover anticlockwise and rem ov e. 4. Detach plug connector from bulb . Self-help, vehicle care 5. Press spring wire clip forwards, diseng age to the right and open. 6. Remove bulb from reflector housing. 7. When fitting a new bulb, engage the lugs in the recesses on the reflector without touc hing the glass. 8. Engage spring wire clip, plug connector onto bulb. 9. Reposition the headlight cover a nd turn it c lock wise. 10. After cha ng ing the bulb on the left, insert and engage filler nec k for windscreen wa sh sy stem fluid container - see p age 252. 255 Xenon headlight system, dipped and main beam Headlights with separate sy stems for main beam 1 (inner bulbs) and dipped beam 2 (outer bulbs). Dipp ed beam 9 Warnin g The dipped beam work s with very hig h electric al voltage. Do not touc h, risk of fatal injury. Have bulbs changed by a workshop. 6 256 Self-help, vehicle care Mai n bea m 1. Open bonnet. 2. To cha nge the bulb on the left, remov e filler neck from windscreen wa sh system fluid container - see page 252. As the headlight has to be removed, hav e the bulb on the right changed by a work shop. 3. Turn the headlight cover anticlockwise and remov e. 4. Detach plug connector from b ulb. 5. Press sp ring w ire clip forwards, disengage to the rig ht and open. 6. Remove bulb from reflector housing. 7. When fitting a new bulb, eng age the lugs in the rec esses on the reflector without touching the g lass. 8. Engag e sp ring wire clip, p lug connector onto bulb . 9. Reposition the head lig ht cover and turn it clockwise. 10. After changing the bulb on the left, insert and eng age filler neck for windscreen wash system fluid container - see page 252. Self-help, vehicle care 257 Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL) system 3 Xenon headlight system for main and dipped beam together with curve illumination b ased on steering ang le. 9 Warning Xenon headlights operate at very high volta ge. Do not touc h, risk of fatal injury. Only hav e bulbs for dipped beam, main beam , turn lig hting, parking lights and turn signal lights c hanged by a work shop. Halogen headlight system, Xenon headlight system, parkin g lights 1. O pen bonnet. 2. To change the bulb on the left, remove filler neck from windscreen wash sy stem fluid container - see pag e 252. As the hea dlight has to b e removed , have the bulb on the right cha ng ed b y a workshop . 3. Turn the hea dlight cover a nticlockw ise and remove. 4. Remov e pa rk ing light bulb holder from reflector. 6 258 Self-help, vehicle care Halogen headlight system, Xenon headlight system, front turn signal lights Have bulbs changed by a workshop. Side turn signal lights Have bulbs changed by a workshop. Front fog ligh ts 3 Have bulbs changed by a workshop. 5. Remove bulb from socket. Tail lights 6. Insert new bulb, without touching the glass. Sa loon / Hatch 1. To open the stowage compa rtm ent, press down bar and op en the cov er. 7. Insert socket in reflector, position headlight cover and turn clockwise. 8. After changing the bulb on the left, insert and engage filler neck for windscreen wash system fluid container see pa ge 252. Self-help, vehicle care 259 4. Remove bulb from socket. 5. Insert new bulb without touching the glass. Fit bulb mounting into bulb housing. C onnect plug. Close stow age compa rtm ent. 2. Detach plug connector from b ulb mounting. 3. Press the two retaining lugs on outer edges of bulb mounting towa rd s each other and rem ove b ulb mounting. Lights from top to bottom: Turn sig nal light Tail light/brake light Tail light Fog tail light Reversing light Est ate 1. Open the com partment on the left or right-hand side by pressing the latch down – see pag e 235. 2. Hold the b ulb housing from the outsid e, use a w heel bolt spanner 3 to loosen the retaining nuts and unscrew them by ha nd . Remove the bulb housing to the rear. Wheel bolt spanner 3 – see vehicle tools on page 238. 3. Detach the cab le from the bulb housing . 6 260 Self-help, vehicle care 4. Und o the three screws using a screwdriver and deta ch the bulb mounting. 5. Remove bulb from socket. Bulb s in b ulb holder: 1 2 = = Brake/tail lig ht Turn signal light 6. Fit a new bulb without touching the glass. R efit the b ulb mounting a nd screw it into plac e. Position the bulb housing in the v ehicle b od y and screw it into place. C lose the compa rtm ent in the side trim. Tailgate lights Due to the large am ount of effort required, bulbs should b e replaced by a workshop. 1. Use a screw driver to p rise off the plastic plugs in the tailgate panelling to the right and left of the tailgate lock . Self-help, vehicle care 2. Und o screws in handle of inner panelling with torx screwdriver. 3. Remove the inner panelling and clip s from the tailgate. 4. Unscrew c orresponding holder: 1 2 3 = = = Reversing light Fog tail light Reversing light 5. Remove bulb from socket. 6. Fit a new bulb without touching the glass. Refit the mounting in the tailgate. 7. Refit the inner panelling to the tailgate using the clips. Tighten the sc rew in the handle. Refit the plastic plugs in the openings. Lights in electrically operated ta ilg ate 3 Have bulbs replaced by a workshop. 261 Number plate ligh t 1. Insert screw driver vertically in b ulb insert as shown in illustration. Press to the side and release spring. 6 262 Self-help, vehicle care 2. Remove bulb housing downw ards, ta king care not to pull on the cable. 4. Rotate bulb holder to left and disengage. 3. Lift flap and disconnect plug from bulb socket. 5. Remove bulb from socket. 6. Insert new bulb, without touc hing the glass. 7. Insert light holder in b ulb housing and eng age by rotating clockwise. 8. C onnec t plug to bulb socket. 9. Insert and engage bulb housing. Courtesy light Front courtesy l ight, read ing light s 3 To ensure that no power is supp lied to the lights, close the doors before removing. 1. Lever the lens out of the housing recesses. Self-help, vehicle care 2. Remove bulb from socket. 3. Insert new bulb, without touching the glass. 4. Mount lens and engage in position. Rear court esy lights 3, rear readi ng lights 3 Hav e bulbs changed by a workshop . Glove comp artm ent l ighting, luggag e c om part ment light ing, footwell lig hting 3 To ensure that no power is supplied to the lig hts, close the doors or hold the contact switch depressed before removing. 1. Prise the lig ht out with a screwdriver. 263 2. Press b ulb slightly towards spring clip and rem ov e. 3. Insert new b ulb, without touching the glass. 4. Insert light in opening and engage in position. I nstrum ent illumi na tion, inform ation di sp lay illumina tion 3 Hav e b ulbs changed by a workshop. 264 Self-help, vehicle care Vehicle care When caring for your vehicle, observe all nationa l environmental regulations, particularly when washing it. Regula r, thorough care helps to imp rov e the a ppearance of your vehicle and maintain its value ov er the years. It is also a p rerequisite for warranty claims for any paint or corrosion dam age. The following pages contain tip s for vehicle care which, if used properly, w ill help comba t the unavoidable damag ing effects of the env ironment. Vehicle ca re a ids 3 Vehicle wash: z Wash brush, z C ar Shampoo, z C ar Sponges, z Insect Removal Sponge, z Wheel Cleaners, z Engine Cleaners, z Glass Clea ners, z C ham ois Lea ther. Vehicle care: z Paintwork Cleaner, z Paintwork Polish, z C ream Polish, z Metallic Paintw ork Wax, z Hard wax, z Touch-up pens, z Touch-U p/Aerosol Paint, z Wheel Preserver, z Insect Remover, z Window Cleaning Spray , z Lock C ylinder Grease, z Alloy Wheel Cleaner, z Alloy Wheel Preserver, z Rust Preventa tiv e, z Vauxhall De-icer Spray , z Vauxhall Wind screen Wash Solvent, z Silicone Oil for Rubber Seals. Interior care: z Interior/Upholstery Cleaner. Washing The paintwork of your vehicle is exposed to env ironmental influenc es, e.g. c ontinuous changes in w eather conditions, industrial waste gases and dust or thawing salts, so wash a nd wax your vehicle regularly . When using autom atic car wa shes, select a programm e w hich includes w axing. Bird d ropp ings, dead insec ts, resin, pollen and the like should be cleaned off imm ediately, a s they contain aggressive constituents which can ca use paint dam age. Plea se follow the wash system ma nufacturer’s instructions when using wash systems. The windscreen wip er and the automatic wiper with rain sensor 3 and the rear window wiper 3 must be switched off - see pages 11, 126. Unscrew the antenna rod 3 and the roof rac k 3, standing on the door sill to make them easier to rea ch. If y ou wash your vehicle by hand, make sure that the insides of the wings are also thoroughly rinsed out. Self-help, vehicle care Clean edges and folds on opened doors and flaps as well as the areas they cover. Thoroughly rinse off and leather-off the vehic le. R inse leather frequently. Use separate lea thers for pa int a nd window surfaces: remnants of wa x on the windows will impa ir vision. O bserve na tional regulations. Waxing Wax y our vehicle regularly, in particula r after it ha s b een washed using Car Shamp oo and at the latest when water no longer forms beads on the paintwork, otherwise the paintwork will dry out. Also wax edges and folds on opened doors and flaps as well as the areas they cover. Pol ishi ng Polishing is necessa ry only if the paint has become dull or if solid deposits have become attached to it. Pa intwork polish with silic one form s a protective film , ma king waxing unnec essary . Plastic body parts should not be treated with wax a nd polish. Use Metallic Paintw ork Wa x on vehic les with a metallic-effect paint finish. Wheels Use a p H-neutral wheel clea ning a gent to clean the wheels. Wheels are painted a nd can be treated with the sam e agents as the body . For a lloy wheels we recommend use of Alloy Wheel Preserver. 265 Paintw ork d amag e Repair minor paintwork da mage such as stone chips, scratches etc. immediately using the Touch-up pen or Touch-Up/ Aerosol Paint before rust forms. If rust has already formed, hav e a workshop elimina te the cause. Also check the surfac es and edges facing the road surface on which rust may hav e develop ed for some tim e unnoticed. Exterior lights Headlight and other protectiv e light bezels are made of plastic. If they require add itional cleaning after the vehicle has been wa shed , clean them w ith C ar S ham poo. Do not use any a brasiv e or caustic agents, do not use an ice scraper, and d o not clean them dry. 266 Self-help, vehicle care Plastic and rubb er p arts For additiona l cleaning of plastic and rubber parts use Interior/Upholstery Cleaner. Do not use any other ag ent, and in particular do not use solvents or petrol. Do not use high-pressure jet cleaners on plastic and rubber parts. Wheels and tyres Do not use high-pressure jet cleaners on wheels and tyres. Interior and upholstery Clean the v ehicle interior, includ ing the instrument panel facia, using I nterior/ Upholstery C leaner. The instrum ent panel should only be cleaned using a soft damp cloth. Clean fabric upholstery with a vacuum cleaner and b rush. To rem ove stains, use Interior/U pholstery Clea ner that is suitable for both fabrics and vinyl. Do not use cleaning agents such a s acetone, tetrachloride, p aint thinner, paint rem ov er, na il varnish remover, washing powder or bleach. Petrol is also unsuitable. O pen Velcro fasteners on clothing could dam age seat upholstery . Mak e sure that Velcro fasteners are closed. Seat belts Alw ays keep seat belts clean and dry. Clea n only w ith lukewarm water or Interior/ Upholstery Cleaner. Wi nd ows When cleaning the heated rear w indow, make sure that the hea ting element on the inside of the window is not dama ged. Use a soft lint-free c loth or cham ois leather in conjunction with Window Cleaning Spray and Insect Remover. Vauxhall Windscreen Wash Solvent is suitable for de-icing windows. For mechanical rem oval of ice, use a commerc ia lly availab le sharp-edg ed ice scraper. Press the scraper firmly ag ainst the glass so that no dirt c an get under it and scra tch the glass. Windscreen wiper b lades Wax, such as that used in car w ashes, can cause strea king on the windscreen when the wiper is used. S mearing wiper blades c an be cleaned with a soft cloth and Vauxhall Wind screen Wash Solvent, and rep la ced if necessary – see page 277. Locks The locks are lubricated with a high-quality Lock C ylinder Grease in the fa ctory . O nly use de-icer in urgent cases, since it has a de-greasing effect and affects the operation of the locks. Hav e the locks regreased in a workshop after using de-icer. Engine compa rtment Area s of the eng ine compartment that are painted in the same colour as the vehicle must b e look ed after like any other painted surfac e. It is ad visab le to wa sh the engine compa rtm ent before and after winter and preserve it with wax. Cover alternator and brak e fluid reservoir with plastic sheets before washing the engine. Self-help, vehicle care When washing the engine w ith a steam jet, do not direct the jet at components of the Anti-lock Brake Sy stem (ABS), the air conditioning system 3, the Electronic Clim ate C ontrol system 3, the auxiliary heater 3 or the belt drive or its components. Engine washing also rem ov es subsequently applied protec tiv e wa x. Therefore after washing, have a workshop protect the engine, parts of the b ra king sy stem in the engine bay, axle elements with steering , body elements and cav ities, thoroughly with protective wax . An engine wash can be performed in the spring in ord er to remove dirt that has adhered to the engine compartment, which may also ha ve a high sa lt content. Check p rotective wax layer and make good if necessary. Do not use high-pressure jet clea ners in the engine compartment. 267 Underbody Your vehicle has a factory-app lied PVC undercoating in the wheel arches (including the longitudinal mem bers) which prov ides permanent protec tion and needs no special maintenance. C aution - c om mercially available bitumen/ rubber materials can damage the PVC coating. We recom mend that y ou ha ve underbody w ork carried out by a work shop which knows the p rescrib ed materials and has ex perienc e in the use thereof. The surfaces of the vehicle underb od y not covered by PVC are provided a durable protective wax coating in critic al areas. The underbody should be washed following the end of the cold weather season to remov e any dirt adhering to the underbody since this may also contain salt. C heck p rotective wax c oa ting and , if nec essary , have it restored to perfec t condition. On vehicles which are washed frequently in autom atic car washes with underbody washing facility, the protective wax coating may b e impaired by d irt-dissolv ing additives, so check the underbody after washing and ha ve it waxed if necessary . Before the start of the cold weather season, check the PVC c oa ting a nd protective wax coating and, if necessary , have them restored to perfect condition. 268 Service, maintenanc e Service, maintenance Inspection system .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Genuine Vauxhall Parts and Accessories ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . A note on safety .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Checking and topping up fluids ... ..... . Engine oil . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Diesel fuel filter .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Coolant .... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Brake fluid ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Wind screen wiper .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Wind screen and headlight wash sy stems 3.. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Battery ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Protecting electronic components .... . Vehicle decomm issioning. ..... .... .... ..... . Vehicle recommissioning.. ..... .... .... ..... . 270 In our ex perience, the most com mon cause of all complaints is the result of misunderstanding or lack of communication betw een the customer a nd the Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. We sincerely hope y ou will never have cause to complain ab out y our vehicle. However, if things do go wrong, the best course of action for y ou to ta ke is to contact your Vaux hall Authorised Repairer’s Serv ice Reception S taff and exp la in the difficulty you are having. We are confident they will d o their utmost to resolv e the problem to your complete satisfaction. 271 271 271 272 274 274 276 277 Sometim es, howev er, despite the best of intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If y our prob lem has not been resolved to y our satisfaction, please make an appointment to discuss the matter with the M ana ger of the department c oncerned. 279 280 280 281 281 Should you wish to pursue the matter further, the Principal of the Vauxhall Authorised Repairer should be made aware of your concern. It is ad visab le in cases such as this to write to him to confirm your problem and the solutions that have been offered. The majority of areas of concern can be quic kly resolved in this way. You can be assured the Authorised Repairer’s Principal w ill only be too anxious to fully inv estigate y our prob lems and correct any errors mad e. After all, he has a large investment in his business a nd is proud of his reputation and professionalism and fully realises that satisfied customers are his key to success. In the unlikely event that you are still not happy with the answer your Vaux hall Authorised Repa irer has given, or the action he proposes to c orrect the problem , y ou m ay contact the Custom er C are Department 1 ) where a team of C ustomer C are C onsultants will spare no effort to ensure y our complete satisfaction. Vauxhall Motor s Ltd. C ustomer Care, Griffin House, O sborne Road LUTON , Beds. , LU1 3Y T Telephone: 0845 090 2044 They w ill review all the facts involved. Then if it is felt some further action can be tak en, the Vauxhall Authorised Repairer will b e adv ised accordingly. In any case, y our contact will b e ac knowledged confirm ing Vauxhall Motors’ position in the m atter. If y ou are not satisfied with the outcome, y ou ca n if you wish, seek advice from an independent third p arty suc h as: Autom obile Association (A. A. ) Fanum House, Basing View, BASI NGSTO KE, Hants., R G21 4EA 1) Ca lls may b e mon itored a nd record ed for training purpo ses. Service, mainten ance Royal Autom obile Club (R.A.C. ), R.A.C . Motoring Services Ltd. 89-91 Pall Mall, LON DO N, SW1Y 5HS General Motors Belgium N.V. Noordelaan 401 - Haven 500 2030 Antw erp – Belgium Tel. 00 32-34 50 63 29 The C ustomer Rela tions Depa rtm ent, Soci ety of Motor Manufacturers and Traders Ltd. (S .M.M. T.), Forbes House, Ha lk in Street, LON DO N, SW1X 7DS General Motors Southeast Europe org. slož ka Olbrachtova 9 140 00 Prague – C zech Republ ic Tel. 00 420-2 39 004 321 Customer C omplaints Serv ice, Scot tish Motor Trad e A ssocia tion, (S.M .T.A.), 3 Palmerston Place, EDI NBURGH, EH12 5AQ General Motors Danmark Jaegersborg Alle 4 2920 C harlottenlund – Denm ark Tel. 00 45-39 97 85 00 The N ationa l Conciliation Service, Retail Motor Ind ust ry Fed era tion, 9 North Street, RUBGY , CV21 2AB If you have a p roblem w hilst abroa d: The S ervice Departments of Adam Opel GmbH and General Motors branches everyw here will provide information and assistance: Vauxhall M otors Ltd . Customer Ca re Griffin House, O sborne Road Luton, Bedfor dshi re, LU1 3YT – Engla nd Tel. 00 44-845 090 2044 General Motors Finland Oy Pa juniityntie 5 00320 Helsinki – Finl and Tel. 00 358-9 817 101 47 In Luxemb ourg please contact the General Motors S ervice Department in Antwerp – Belg ium Telephone: 00 32-34 50 63 29 General Motors Franc e 1 – 9, avenue du M arais Angle Q ua i de Bezons 95101 Argenteuil C edex – France Tel. 00 33-1-34 26 30 51 General Motors Austria GmbH Groß-Enzersdorfer S tr. 59 1220 Vi enna – Austria Tel. 00 43-1-2 88 77 444 or 00 43-1-2 88 77 0 ADAM OPEL Gm bH Bahnhofsp la tz 1 65423 Rüsselsheim – Germ any Tel. 00 49-61 42-77 50 00 or 00 49-61 42-7 70 General Motors Hellas S. A. 56 Kifisia s Av enue & Delfon str. Amarousion 151 25 Athens – Greece Tel. 00 30-1-6 80 65 01 General Motors Southeast Europe Ltd. S zabadsag utca 117 2040 Budaörs – H ung ary Tel. 00 36-23 446 100 General Motors India S ix th Floor, Tower A Global Business Park Mehra uli – Gurgaon Road Gurga on 122 022, Haryana – I ndia Tel. 00 91-124 280 3333 General Motors Ireland Ltd. O pel House, Unit 60, Heather Road Sa ndyford , Dublin 18 – Ireland Tel. 00 353 1-216 10 00 General Motors Italia Srl Piazza le dell’Industria 40 00144 Rome – It aly Tel. 00 39-06-5 46 51 General Motors Ned erland B. V. Lage Mosten 49 – 63 4822 NK Breda – N et herla nds Tel. 00 31-76-5 44 83 00 General Motors Norge AS K jeller-Vest 6 2027 Kj el ler – Norw ay Tel. 00 47-23 50 01 04 General Motors Poland Sp. z o. o. Wołoska 5 06- 675 Wa rsa w – Pola nd Tel. 00 48-22-606 17 00 269 270 Service, maintenanc e General Motors Portugal Q uinta d a Fonte Ed ificío Fernão M agalhães, Piso 2 2780-190 Pa ço d’Arc os – Portugal Tel. 00 351- 21 440 75 00 data is continually gathered and is used to calculate the remaining distanc e until the nex t service. The remaining distanc e can be seen in the odometer display when the ignition is off: Press the reset button next to the trip odometer. InSP and the remaining distance will be displayed. General Motors S outheast Europe org. z ložk a Apollo Business Centre Mlynské Nivy 45 821 09 Bra tislav a - Slov aki a Tel. 00 421-2 58 275 543 General Motors España S. L. Paseo de la C astellana, 91 28046 M adrid – Spa in Tel. 00 34-902 25 00 25 General Motors N orden AB Årstaä ngv ägen 17 100 73 S tockhol m – S weden Tel. 00 46-20 333 000 General Motors S uisse S .A. Stelzenstraße 4 8152 Glatt brugg – Swit zerland Tel. 00 41-44 828 28 80 General Motors Türkiy e Ltd. S ti. Kemalpa sa y olu üz eri 35861 Torb ali / Izmir – Turkey Tel. 00 90-2 32-8 53-14 53 In Alb ania, Bosnia-H erzegovina , Bulga ria, C roatia, Estonia, La tvia , Lithuania, Macedonia, Romania , Serbia -Monteneg ro and Sl ov enia please contact the General Motors S ervice Department in Budaörs – Hungary Tel. 00 36-23 446 100 In spec tion system In order to guarantee econom ical and safe vehicle operation and to m ainta in the value of y our v ehicle, it is of vital importanc e that all maintenance work is carried out at the proper intervals. For vehicles with strict engine oil c hange and service intervals, before servic ing is due the disp la y InS P appea rs on the od om eter disp la y after the ignition ha s been sw itched on and off: Ha ve your next service carried out by a workshop within one week or 300 miles (500 km ). The service interval display takes account of off-the-road p eriods during which the battery is d isconnected. For vehicles with flex ible oil change and service intervals, the length of these intervals is based on sev eral para meters stemming from usage. For this reason, various engine-spec ific If the rema ining d istance is less than 1000 miles (1500 km ), InSP is displayed with a remaining distance of 600 miles (1000 k m) when the ignition is switched on. I nS P is display ed for several seconds if the remaining distance is less tha n 300 miles (500 km ). Have service work that is d ue carried out within one week or 300 miles (500 km ). Have this work carried out by a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer in order to av oid inv alidation of warranty claims. Further information on maintenance and the inspection system can be found in the S ervice Booklet, found in the glove compa rtm ent. Hav e ma intena nce work – and repair work on the body and the eq uipm ent – carried out professionally by a work shop. We recommend using your Vauxhall Authorised Repa irer, who has excellent knowledge of Vauxhall v ehicles and has the necessary special tools and up-to-date S ervice Instructions from Vauxhall. It is particularly a dvisable to use a Vauxhall Authorised Repa irer during the wa rra nty period in order to prevent loss of w arra nty . Further information can b e found in the S ervice Booklet. Service, mainten ance 271 Separ ate anti-cor rosion servi ce Hav e this work carried out according to the intervals spec ified in the S ervice Booklet. Genuine Vauxhall Parts and Accessories We recommend that you use " Genuine Vauxhall Parts a nd Accessories" and conversion parts approved ex pressly for your vehicle ty pe. These parts have undergone special tests to establish their reliab ility , safety and specific suitability for Vauxhall vehicles. Despite continuous market monitoring, we cannot assess or guarantee these attributes for other products, ev en if they have been granted approva l by the relevant authorities or in som e other form. "Genuine Vaux ha ll Pa rts and Ac cessories" and conversion parts approved by Vauxhall can be obtained from your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who can provide ex pert a dvice on permitted tec hnical c hanges and ensure correct installation. A note on safety To avoid injury from moving p arts a nd cables conducting ignition volta ge, only carry out engine compartment checks (e.g. checking brake fluid or engine oil level) when the ignition is switched off. 9 Warning The cooling fan is controlled by a thermoswitch and ca n therefore start unexp ectedly even if the ignition is switched off. Risk of injury. Electronic ignition systems generate very high voltages. Do not touch the ignition system; hig h voltage can be fatal. N ever carry out any repairs or adjustment and m aintenance work on the vehicle y ourself. This especially applies to the eng ine, chassis and safety parts. You may unwittingly infringe the p rov isions of the law and, by not performing the work properly , endanger y ourself and other road users. Checking and topping u p fluids To aid identification, the cap s used when topping up engine oil, coolant and wash fluid as well as the oil dipstick handle may be coloured y ellow. 272 Service, maintenanc e Engine oil Information on engine oils is found in the Service Booklet. Eng ine oi l level and consum ption Ev ery engine consumes engine oil for tec hnical reasons. The engine oil consump tion cannot be assessed until a fairly long distance has been driv en, a nd may be a bove the specified value when the vehic le is first b eing driven (run-in period ). Frequent d riv ing at high revs increases engine oil consumption. 9 Warning In vehicles with engine oil level monitoring 3 , the engine oil level is monitored automatically - see page 103. It is advisable to check the oil lev el b efore setting out on long journeys. 9 Warning Imp ortant: It is the owner’ s responsibility to maintain the correct level of a n appropriate quality oil in the engine. Engine oil level check , topp ing up engine oil The illustrations on this p age show examples of the checks for various petrol and diesel engines. Fig. 17780 J on the next pag e shows the check s for engine Z 30 DT 1). The oil level must be checked with the vehicle on a level surface and w ith the eng ine (which must be at operating temperature) switched off. Wait at least 5 minutes before chec king the level to allow the norm al engine oil accumulation in the engine to d rain into the oil pan. Do not allow the engine oil to drop below the minimum level. 1) Sales des ig nation – see p ag e 284, 285. Service, mainten ance To check the engine oil level, insert wiped oil dipstick into dipstick tube as far as it will go. Top engine oil up if the lev el has dropped into the range of the top -up m ark MIN . The engine oil level must not exceed the upper mark M AX on the dipstic k. Excess engine oil must be drained off or extracted. If the engine oil level is above the MAX mark there is a risk of damage to the engine or the ca ta lytic converter. The a mount filled must be between the M IN and MAX marks – see p age 308. Top up with the same brand of engine oil that was used during the previous oil cha ng e, following the instruc tions in the Serv ic e Booklet. To close, position the cap and screw it into place. Capacities – see page 308. 273 Engine oil change, oi l filter chang e C ha nge oil at a work shop according to the service interva l shown on the display . We recommend that you use g enuine eng ine oil filters. 9 Warnin g Wa ste engine oil cannot b e disposed of with domestic refuse. Observ e the lega l requirem ents for d isposal of old oil and filters to protect the environment and your health. 274 Service, maintenanc e Diesel fuel filter Coo lant O n each engine oil change, have the fuel filter checked for any water residue by a workshop. The glycol-ba sed coolant provides exc ellent corrosion protection for the heating and cooling systems as well as anti-freeze protection down to ap prox . -28 °C . It remains in the cooling system throughout the year and need not b e cha ng ed. For engines 1) Z 19 DT, Z 19 DTL and Z 19 DTH , control indica tor A illuminates if there is water in the diesel fuel filter. Hav e fuel filter checked at shorter intervals if the v ehicle is subjected to extrem e opera ting conditions such as hig h humidity (primarily in coastal areas), extrem ely high or low outside temperatures a nd sub stantially v arying day tim e a nd nig httime temp eratures. Use of certain a nti-freezes ca n lead to engine dam age. We therefore rec om mend that you use only approved anti-freezes. 9 Warning Anti-freeze is a danger to health; it m ust therefore be k ept in the original conta iner and out of the reach of children. Anti -freeze a nd corrosion prot ect ion Before the start of winter, have a work shop check the anti-freeze protection. The antifreeze level must guarantee protection down to a pprox. -28 °C. Insufficient antifreeze will reduce the frost p rotection level and the corrosion protection. If necessary add anti-freeze. If c oolant loss is topped up with wa ter, have concentration checked and a dd antifreeze if necessary. 1) Sa les desig nation – see pa ge 28 4, 285. Service, mainten ance 275 When the engine is at op erating temperature, coolant lev el rises. It falls aga in when the system cools. If it falls below the KALT/C OLD mark when the system is cold, top up to the mark. Top up a nti-freeze. If no anti-freeze is av ailable, top up with clean tap water. If tap water is unavailable, distilled water can b e used. Coola nt level Hardly any losses occur since the cooling system is sealed and it is thus rarely necessary to top up the c oolant. 4-cylinder petrol and diesel engines: When the cooling system is c old , the c oolant level in the expansion tank should be slightly above the KALT/C OLD mark. C oolant level can be read off from the outsid e of the expansion tank. For V6 petrol and d iesel engines, the exp ansion tank must be opened in ord er to check coolant level. When the c ooling sy stem is cold, the coolant should be up to the CO LD mark on the filler opening. 9 Warning Allow engine to cool down before rem oving coola nt filler cap . Rem ov e filler cap carefully so that p ressure can escape slow ly, otherwise there is a risk of scalding. After filling with tap water or d istilled water, measure the anti-freeze concentration and ad d anti-freez e if required. H ave a workshop establish the cause of the coolant loss. Too low a coolant level can cause engine dam age. To close, position the cap and screw it into place. 6 276 Service, maintenanc e Coola nt temperat ure If the temperature ga uge enters the righthand (wa rning) z one or control indic ator W illuminates, check the coolant level immediately . Use of certain brake fluids can lead to dam age or reduced braking effect. We therefore rec om mend that you use only high performa nce app roved b ra ke fluid. Extrem e cleanliness is needed when topping up, since contamination in the brak e fluid can c ause brake sy stem ma lfunctions. z Coolant level too low: Top up coolant, noting the instructions given under "Anti-freeze and corrosion protection" and "C oolant level". H ave the cause of the coolant loss rectified by a workshop. z Coolant level O K: Have the cause of the elevated coolant temperature rectified. C ontac t a work shop. After c orrecting the brak e fluid level, have a work shop eliminate the cause of the brak e fluid loss. Brake fluid Brake fluid lev el 9 Warning Brake fluid is poisonous and corrosiv e. Do not allow it to come into contact with eyes, skin, fab ric or painted surfaces. Direct contac t could cause injury and dam age. The fluid lev el in the reservoir must be neither higher than the MAX mark nor low er than the M IN m ark. Service, mainten ance Brak e fluid chang e Brake fluid is hy groscopic, i.e. it absorbs water. If the brakes b ecome hot, suc h as when d riv ing on long downhill stretches, vap our bubb les can occur in the w ater, which can have an extrem ely adverse effect on braking power (depending on the proportion of w ater). Windscreen wiper The fluid change intervals specified in the Service Booklet m ust therefore be observed. If the windscreen is dirty, operate the wind screen wash system before switching on the windscreen wiper or setting the wiper to automatic operation with the rain sensor 3. This will avoid w iper blad e wear. 9 Warning Have the brak e fluid changed by a work shop. O bserve the legal requirements for disposal of brake fluid to protect the environment and your health. Clea r vision is essential for safe driv ing. Perform regular checks on the windscreen wiper a nd headlight wash system 3 to ensure they are operating correctly. We recommend wiper blade rep la cement at least once a year. Do not switch on the wind screen wiper or set the wiper to automatic operation with the rain sensor 3 if the w indscreen is iced up as this could da mage the wiper blades or the wiper sy stem. 277 If the wiper bec om es frozen on to the glass, we recomm end that it be released with the aid of De-icer Spray. S mearing wiper blades c an be cleaned with a soft cloth and Vauxhall Wind screen Wash Solvent. Wiper blades whose lips have become hardened, crack ed or covered with silicone must be replac ed. This may be necessary as a result of the effects of ic e, thawing salt or hea t, or the incorrect use of cleaning agents. S witc h off the windsc reen w ip er or automatic w ip er with rain sensor 3 in car washes - see pa ges 11, 264. Windscreen w ip er blad e m aintenanc e see page 266. 6 278 Service, maintenanc e To ensure proper operation of the ra in sensor 3, the sensor a rea must be free from dust, dirt and ice. The windscreen w ash system m ust also be operated at regular intervals and the sensor a rea m ust be de-iced. Vehicles with rain sensor c an be identified by the sensor area near the top of the w indscreen. Service set ting for front wind sc reen wip er (e.g. for cha nging or cleaning the front wiper b la des). Within 8 seconds of switching off the engine b ut with the key in the starter switch, press the windscreen wiper stalk downwards. Release the stalk as soon as the wiper blades are v ertical. Wiper bl ades on the windscreen Activating serv ic e position - see p receding column. Lift wiper arm. Press the release lever a nd detac h the wiper blade. Service, mainten ance Fill only with clean water to prev ent the nozz les from clogging. To im prov e cleaning efficienc y, w e recommend tha t you ad d a little Vauxhall Windscreen Wash Solvent. Windscreen and headlight wash systems 3 The filler neck of the windsc reen wash system a nd headlight wash system fluid container 3 is at the front left of the eng ine compartment next to the b attery. The fluid lev el in the reservoir ca n be read off from the level indicator. Do not fill above 1/ 1. Ca pacities – see p age 308. 279 The wind screen wash system and hea dlight wash system will not freeze in winter: Frost protection down to - 5 °C M ixture ratio of Vauxhall Windscreen Wash Solvent to Water 1:3 - 10 ° C - 20 ° C 1:2 1:1 - 30 ° C 2:1 When closing the reservoir, press the lid firmly ov er the bea ded edge all the way round. 280 Service, maintenanc e Lay ing up the v ehicle for m ore than 4 weeks can lead to battery discharge, whic h may reduce the service life of the battery. Disconnect battery from on-board power supply b y detaching negative terminal. The Vauxhall a larm system 3 siren must be deactiv ated a s follows: switch the ignition on then off, disconnec t the vehicle’s battery within 15 seconds. Ensure that ignition is switched off before connecting battery . Then perform the following actions: Battery The b attery is m aintenanc e-free. 9 Warning Have the ba ttery changed by a work shop. O bserve the legal requirements for disposa l of old ba tteries to protect the environment and your health. Retro-fitting of electrical or electronic accessories can discharge or add extra load to the battery . Take adv ic e on the tec hnical p ossibilities, e. g. use of a more powerful ba ttery. z Setting date and tim e in the inform ation display – see pages 110, 113, 118. z Activate window and sunroof electronics 3 if necessary – see pages 47, 49. In order to prevent the battery from discharging, some consumers such as the courtesy light autom atically switch off after approx . 20 minutes. Di sc onnecti ng/connect ing the bat ter y from/to the elec trica l system Disconnect b attery from v ehicle power supply before charging : disconnect negative cable first, then the positive cable. The polarity of the battery , i.e. the positiv e and negativ e terminal connections, must not b e switched. Always connect the positive cable first, then the negative cable. Protecting electronic compo nen ts In order to prev ent faults in elec tronic components in the electrical system, never connect or d isconnect b attery w ith engine running or ignition switched on. Nev er start eng ine with battery disconnected, e. g. when starting using jum p lead s. To av oid damaging the vehic le, d o not ma ke a ny modifications to the electrical system, e. g. connecting ad ditional consum ers or tampering with electronic control units (chip tuning). 9 Warnin g Electronic ignition system s generate very hig h voltages. Do not touch the ignition sy stem; high voltage can b e fatal. Service, mainten ance Vehicle decomm issioning O bserve na tional regulations. If the vehicle is to be parked for severa l months, to avoid da mage have the follow ing work performed by a workshop. z Wash and preserve the vehicle – see pa ge 264. z Check corrosion protection in engine com partment a nd on underbody a nd repair if necessary . z Clean and preserv e rubber seals on bonnet and doors. Vehicle storag e z Park vehicle in dry, well v entilated plac e. With manual transmission or Easy tronic 3 , enga ge 1st or rev erse gear. With automatic transm ission 3, selector lever in P. Use chocks or the like to prevent the vehicle from rolling . 281 Vehicle recommissioning O bserve national regulations. Perform the following work before recommissioning the vehicle: z Connect ba ttery – see page 280. z Do not apply handbrake. z Check tyre pressure and correc t if necessary – see page 299. z Disconnect battery by disengaging neg ativ e terminal from vehicle electrical system – see page 280. z Fill up w indscreen wash system a nd headlight wash system 3 – see page 279. z Check engine oil level – see p age 272. z Change engine oil – see page 273. z Check the coolant level; top up with antifreez e if necessa ry – see pa ge 275. z Check anti-freeze and c orrosion protection – see page 274. z Fit the num ber p la te if necessary . z Check the coola nt level, top up with antifreeze if nec essary – see pag e 275. z Empty windsc reen w ash system and headlight wash system 3 . z Inc rease ty re pressure to value sp ecified for full load – see page 299. 282 Tec hnic al data Technical data Vehicle docum ents, identification plate. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Vehicle identification d ata.... .... .... ..... . Coolant, b ra ke fluid, oils .. ..... .... .... ..... . Engine data. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Performance.... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Fuel consump tion, CO 2 emissions ..... . Weights, pay loa d and roof load .. ..... . Tyres ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Electrical system .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Ca pacities ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Dimensions.. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 282 283 283 284 286 288 293 299 307 308 310 Veh icle documents, identification plate The tec hnical d ata is determined in accordance with European C ommunity standards. We reserve the right to make modifications. S pecifications in the vehic le docum ents alwa ys have priority ov er those given in this manual. The identification plate is affix ed to the front right door frame. Information on identification plate: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Manufa cturer Type approval numb er Vehicle I dentification Number Gross Vehicle Weight rating Permissib le Gross Train Weig ht Maxim um perm issible front axle load Maxim um perm issible rear ax le load Vehicle-specific or country-specific data Technical data In other model variants, the id entifica tion plate may also be affix ed to the instrument panel. Engine code and engine number: stamp ed on left-ha nd side of engine on crankcase. Vehicle identification data The Vehicle Identification Numb er is stamped on the identification plate and beneath a cover on the floor of the vehicle between the front door and driver’s seat. 283 Coolant, brake flu id, oils O nly use app rov ed fluids. Use of unsuitab le fluids can cause serious dam age to the vehicle. Engine oils Information on engine oils is found in the S ervice Booklet. 284 Tec hnic al data Engine data Sales designation Eng ine identifier code 1.8 Z 18 XE 1. 8 Z 18 XER 2.0 Turb o Z 20 NET 2.2 Z 22 SE 2.2 DIREC T Z 22 YH 2.8 V6 Z 28 NEL Numb er of cylinders 4 4 4 4 4 6 1796 1796 1998 2198 2198 2792 Engine power (k W) at rpm 90 6000 103 6300 129 5500 108 5600 114 5600 169 5500 Torque (Nm ) at rpm 167 3800 175 3800 265 2500 to 3800 203 4000 220 3800 330 1800 to 4500 Petrol Petrol Petrol Petrol Petrol Petrol 95 98 91 95 98 91 95 98 91 95 98 2) 91 2) 4) 95 5 ) 98 2 ) –6 ) 95 98 91 Piston displacement (cm 3) Type of fuel O ctane requirement unleaded or unleaded or unleaded (RO N) 1 ) 2) 2)3 ) 2) 2 )3) 2) 2)4 ) 2) 2)3 ) Max . permissible engine speed, continuous opera tion (rpm) ap prox . 6500 6500 6200 6500 6500 6700 Engine oil consumption (l/1000 km ) 0. 6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 0.6 Stan da rd high-q uality fuels , e.g . unlea ded DIN EN 228; value p rinted in b old: reco mmend ed fuel. Kn ock contro l s ys tem a utoma tically a d jus ts ig nition tim ing a ccording to typ e o f fuel used (octa ne nu mber). Slight reduction in engine ou tp ut a nd to rq ue if 91 R ON is used . If no unlea ded P rem ium fuel is a vailab le, 91 RON ca n be used ta king ca re to avoid hig h engine loa d or full loa d a s well a s for driving in m ountaino us terra in with a caravan /trailer loa d o r hig h pa ylo ad . The use o f fuel tha t is a t leas t 95 R ON is p rescrib ed. 91 octa ne fu el m ust not be used . Technical data 285 Engine data Sales designation Eng ine identifier code 2.8 V6 Z 28 NET VXR Z 28 N ET 1.9 CDTI Z 19 DTL 1. 9 CDTI Z 19 DT 1. 9 CDTI Z 19 DTH 3. 0 C DTI Z 30 DT Numb er of cylinders 6 6 4 4 4 6 2792 2792 1910 1910 1910 2958 Engine power (k W) at rpm 184 5500 206 5500 74 3500 88 3500 to 4000 110 4000 135 4000 Torque (Nm ) at rpm 350 1800 to 4500 355 1800 to 4500 260 1700 to 2500 280 2000 to 2750 320 2000 to 2750 400 1900 to 2700 Petrol Petrol Diesel Diesel Diesel Diesel 95 98 91 – 95 4) 98 2 ) –5 ) – – – – 49 (D) 6) – – – 49 (D) 4 ) – – – 49 (D) 4 ) – – – 49 (D)4 ) Max . permissible engine speed, continuous op eration (rpm) approx. 6700 6700 5100 5100 5100 5000 Engine oil consumption (l/1000 km ) 0.6 0.6 0. 6 0. 6 0. 6 Piston displacement (cm 3) Type of fuel (RO N) 1 ) O ctane requirement unleaded or unleaded or unleaded Cetane requirement (CN) 1 ) 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 0.6 2) 2)3 ) Stan da rd high-q uality fuels , e.g . unlea ded DIN EN 228, Diesel DIN EN 590; D = Diesel; value p rinted in bo ld : recom mend ed fuel. Kn ock contro l s ys tem a utoma tically a d jus ts ig nition tim ing a ccording to typ e o f fuel used (octa ne nu mber). Slight reduction in engine ou tp ut a nd to rq ue if 91 R ON is used . Slight reduction in engine ou tp ut a nd to rq ue if 95 R ON is used . 91 octa ne fu el m ust not be used . A lo wer va lue is pos sib le with w inter fu els. 286 Tec hnic al data Performance (approx. mph / km/h), Sal oon / Ha tch Eng ine 1 ) Z 18 XE Z 18 XER Z 20 NET Z 22 SE Z 22 YH Z 28 N EL Max imum speed2) Manual tra nsmission Sports transmission Easytronic Automatic transmission 126/203 127/205 – – 130/210 130/210 129/207 – – 143/230 – – 134/216 – – 130/210 135/218 135/218 – 130/210 155/250 – – 155/250 Eng ine 1 ) Z 28 NET Z 28 NET VXR Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Z 30 DT 155/2503) – – 155/2503) 155/250 3) – – 155/250 3) 116/186 – – – 124/200 – – – 135/217 – – 130/210 143/230 – – 140/226 speed2) Max imum Manual tra nsmission Sports transmission Easytronic Automatic transmission 1) 2) 3) Sa les desig nation – see pa ges 284, 285. The ma xim um s peed ind ica ted is achieva ble a t kerb weig ht (with out driver) p lu s 200 kg p ayloa d. Optiona l eq uipm ent cou ld red uce th e s pecified maximu m sp eed of th e vehicle. The ma xim um s peed is limited electro nica lly. Technical data Performance (approx. mph / km/h), Esta te Eng ine 1 ) Z 18 XE Z 18 XER Z 20 N ET Z 22 YH Z 28 N EL Max imum speed2) Manual tra nsmission Sports transmission Easytronic Automatic transmission – 124/199 – – 126/203 130/209 128/207 – – 139/224 – – 130/210 130/210 – 129/208 152/245 – – 152/245 Z 28 N ET Z 28 N ET VXR Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Z 30 DT 155/2503 ) – – 155/2503 ) 155/2503 ) – – 155/2503 ) 113/182 – – – 121/195 – – – 130/210 – – 129/208 140/225 – – 137/221 Eng ine 1 ) speed2) Max imum Manual tra nsmission Sports transmission Easytronic Automatic transmission 1) 2) 3) Sa les desig nation – see pa ges 284, 285. The ma xim um s peed ind ica ted is achieva ble a t kerb weig ht (with out driver) p lu s 200 kg p ayloa d. Optiona l eq uipm ent cou ld red uce th e s pecified maximu m sp eed of th e vehicle. The ma xim um s peed is limited electro nica lly. 287 288 Tec hnic al data Fuel consumption, CO 2 emissions Directive 80/1268/EEC (last c hanged by 2004/3/EC ) has applied for the measurement of fuel consumption since 1996. The direc tiv e is oriented to actual driving practices: Urba n driving is rated at approx. 1/ 3 and ex tra-urb an driving with approx. 2/ 3 (urban and extra-urban consumption). C old sta rts a nd acceleration phases are also taken into considera tion. The specification of CO 2 emission is also a constituent of the directive. The figures given m ust not be taken as a guarantee for the actual fuel consumption of a p artic ular vehicle. All values are b ased on the EU base model with standard equipment. The calculation of fuel consumption as spec ified by directive 2004/3/EC takes acc ount of the v ehicle’ s kerbweight, ascertained in accordance with these regula tions. O ptional extras ma y result in slightly higher fuel consumption and CO 2 emission lev els than those quoted. To convert l/100 k m into mpg, divide 282 by num ber of litres/100 km. S aving fuel, p rotecting the environm ent – see page 186. Technical data Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km ) , Eng ine 1 ) Manual/sports/Ea sytronic/a utomatic transm ission urban extra-urban tota l CO 2 Eng ine 1 ) Manual/sports/Ea sytronic/a utomatic transm ission urban extra-urban tota l CO 2 Fuel consumption Manual/sports/Ea sytronic/a utomatic transm ission urban extra-urban tota l CO 2 Eng ine 1 ) Manual/sports/Ea sytronic/a utomatic transm ission urban extra-urban tota l CO 2 1) Sa les desig nation – see pa ges 284, 285. CO2 emissions (approx. g/k m) , Saloo n 4-doo r (tyre width up to 225 mm ) Z 18 XE Z 18 XER Z 20 NET Z 22 S E Z 22 YH Z 28 NEL 10.4/10. 7/–/– 5.5/ 5.8/– /– 7.3/ 7.6/– /– 175/ 182/–/– Z 28 NET 10.1/ 9. 9/ 9.7/– 5.5/ 5.6/ 5.4/– 7.2/ 7.2/ 7.0/– 173/173/168/– Z 19 DTL –/12.5/–/– –/ 6. 3/–/– –/ 8. 6/–/– –/ 206/–/– Z 19 DT – /11. 4/–/13.3 – / 6.2/–/ 6.5 – / 8.1/–/ 9.0 – / 194/–/ 216 Z 19 DTH 10. 3/10.3/–/11.3 6. 0/ 5.9/– / 6.1 7. 6/ 7.5/– / 8.0 182/ 180/–/ 192 Z 30 DT 15.4/–/–/17.1 7. 3/–/–/ 7. 3 10.3/–/–/10.9 247/–/–/ 262 15.4/–/–/17.1 7.3/–/–/ 7.3 10.3/–/–/10.9 247/–/–/ 262 7.4/–/–/– 4.7/–/–/– 5.7/–/–/– 154/–/–/– 7. 4/–/–/– 4. 7/–/–/– 5. 7/–/–/– 154/–/–/– 7.4/– /–/ 9.4 4.7/– /–/ 5.3 5.7/– /–/ 6.8 154/– /– /184 9.8/– /– /10. 2 5.2/– /– / 5.3 6.9/– /– / 7.1 186/–/– / 192 (approx. l/100 km ) , Eng ine 1 ) 289 CO2 emissions (approx. g/k m) , Saloo n 4-doo r (tyre width up to 235 mm ) Z 18 XE Z 18 XER Z 20 NET Z 22 S E Z 22 YH Z 28 NEL 10.5/10. 8/–/– 5.6/ 5.9/– /– 7.4/ 7.7/– /– 178/ 185/–/– Z 28 NET 10.2/10.0/ 9.8/– 5.6/ 5. 7/ 5.5/– 7.3/ 7. 3/ 7.1/– 175/ 175/170/– Z 19 DTL –/12.6/–/– –/ 6.4/–/– –/ 8.7/–/– –/209/–/– Z 19 DT – /11. 5/–/13.4 – / 6.3/–/ 6.6 – / 8.2/–/ 9.1 – / 197/–/ 218 Z 19 DTH 10. 4/10.4/–/11.4 6. 1/ 6.0/– / 6.2 7. 7/ 7.6/– / 8.1 185/ 182/–/194 Z 30 DT 15.5/–/–/17.2 7. 4/–/–/ 7. 4 10.4/–/–/11.0 250/–/–/264 15.5/–/–/17.2 7.4/–/–/ 7.4 10.4/–/–/11.0 250/–/–/264 7.5/–/–/– 4.8/–/–/– 5.8/–/–/– 157/–/–/– 7. 5/–/–/– 4. 8/–/–/– 5. 8/–/–/– 157/–/–/– 7.5/– /–/ 9.5 4.8/– /–/ 5.4 5.8/– /–/ 6.9 157/– /– /186 9.9/– /– /10. 3 5.3/– /– / 5.4 7.0/– /– / 7.2 189/–/– / 194 290 Tec hnic al data Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km ) , CO2 emissions (approx. g/k m) , Hatch 5-door (tyre width up to 225 mm) Eng ine 1 ) Z 18 XE Z 18 XER Z 20 N ET Z 22 SE Manual/sports/Ea sytronic/a utomatic tra nsmission urban extra-urban tota l CO 2 10.4/10.7/–/– 5.5/ 5.8/–/– 7.3/ 7.6/–/– 175/ 182/–/– 10.1/ 9.9/ 9.7/– 5.5/ 5.6/ 5.4/– 7.2/ 7.2/ 7.0/– 173/173/168/– –/12.5/– /– –/ 6.3/–/– –/ 8.6/–/– –/ 206/– /– – – – – Eng ine 1 ) Z 22 YH Z 28 NEL Z 28 N ET Z 28 NET VXR Manual/sports/Ea sytronic/a utomatic tra nsmission urban extra-urban tota l CO 2 10.3/10.3/–/11.3 6.0/ 5.9/–/ 6.1 7.6/ 7.5/–/ 8.0 182/ 180/–/ 192 15.4/–/–/17.1 7.3/–/–/ 7.3 10.3/–/–/10.9 247/–/–/ 262 15.4/–/– /17. 1 7.3/– /–/ 7.3 10.3/–/– /10. 9 247/–/– / 262 15.4/–/–/ 2) 7. 3/–/–/ 2 ) 10.3/–/–/ 2) 247/–/–/ 2) Eng ine 1 ) Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Z 30 DT Manual/sports/Ea sytronic/a utomatic tra nsmission urban extra-urban tota l CO 2 7.4/–/–/– 4.7/–/–/– 5.7/–/–/– 154/– /–/– 7.4/–/– /– 4.7/–/– /– 5.7/–/– /– 154/–/–/– 7.4/–/–/ 9.5 4.7/–/–/ 5.4 5.7/–/–/ 6.9 154/– /–/186 9.8/–/– /10. 2 5.2/–/– / 5. 3 6.9/–/– / 7. 1 186/–/–/ 192 1) 2) Sa les desig nation – see pa ges 284, 285. Va lues no t a va ila ble at tim e of p rinting. /11.4/–/13.3 / 6. 2/–/ 6.5 / 8. 1/–/ 9.0 / 194/–/ 216 Technical data Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km ) , 291 CO2 emissions (approx. g/k m) , Hatch 5-door (tyre width up to 235 mm) Eng ine 1 ) Z 18 XE Z 18 XER Z 20 NET Z 22 S E Manual/sports/Ea sytronic/a utomatic tra nsmission urban extra-urban tota l CO 2 10. 5/10.8/–/– 5. 6/ 5.9/–/– 7. 4/ 7.7/–/– 178/ 185/–/– 10. 2/10.0/ 9. 8/– 5.6/ 5.7/ 5.5/– 7.3/ 7.3/ 7.1/– 175/ 175/170/– –/12.6/–/– –/ 6.4/–/– –/ 8.7/–/– –/ 209/–/– – /11.5/–/13.4 – / 6.3/– / 6. 6 – / 8.2/– / 9. 1 – / 197/–/ 218 Eng ine 1 ) Z 22 YH Z 28 NEL Z 28 NET Z 28 N ET VXR Manual/sports/Ea sytronic/a utomatic tra nsmission urban extra-urban tota l CO 2 10. 4/10.4/–/11.4 15. 5/–/–/17.2 6. 1/ 6.0/–/ 6.2 7.4/–/– / 7. 4 7. 7/ 7.6/–/ 8.1 10. 4/–/–/11.0 185/ 182/–/ 194 250/–/–/ 264 15.5/– /–/17.2 7.4/–/–/ 7.4 10.4/– /–/11.0 250/– /–/ 264 15.4/–/– /2 ) 7.3/– /–/ 2) 10.3/–/– /2 ) 247/–/– /2 ) Eng ine 1 ) Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Z 30 DT Manual/sports/Ea sytronic/a utomatic tra nsmission urban extra-urban tota l CO 2 7.5/– /–/– 4.8/– /–/– 5.8/– /–/– 157/–/– /– 7.5/– /–/– 4.8/– /–/– 5.8/– /–/– 157/–/– /– 7.5/–/–/ 9. 6 4.8/–/–/ 5. 5 5.8/–/–/ 7. 0 157/–/–/189 9.9/–/–/10.3 5.3/–/–/ 5.4 7.0/–/–/ 7.2 189/– /–/ 194 1) 2) Sa les desig nation – see pa ges 284, 285. Va lues no t a va ila ble at tim e of p rinting. 292 Tec hnic al data Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km ) , Eng ine 1 ) Manual/sports/Ea sytronic/a utomatic transm ission urban extra-urban tota l CO 2 Eng ine 1 ) Manual/sports/Ea sytronic/a utomatic transm ission urban extra-urban tota l CO 2 Fuel consumption Z 18 XE Z 18 XER Z 20 NET Z 22 YH Z 28 N EL Z 28 NET – /11. 0/–/– – / 6.1/–/– – / 7.9/–/– – / 190/–/– Z 28 NET VXR 10. 3/10.4/10.0/– 5.9/ 6.1/ 5. 7/– 7.5/ 7.7/ 7. 3/– 180/ 185/ 175/– Z 19 DTL –/12.7/–/– –/ 6.5/–/– –/ 8.8/–/– –/ 211/–/– Z 19 DT 10.6/10.6/–/11.5 6. 3/ 6.2/– / 6. 3 7. 9/ 7.8/– / 8. 2 190/ 187/–/ 197 Z 19 DTH 15.5/–/– /17. 4 7.4/– /–/ 7.6 10.4/–/– /11. 2 250/–/– / 269 Z 30 DT 15.5/–/–/17.4 7. 4/–/–/ 7. 6 10.4/–/–/11.2 250/–/–/ 269 15.5/–/–/ 2 ) 7. 4/–/–/2 ) 10.4/–/–/ 2 ) 250/–/–/ 2) 7.5/– /–/– 4.8/– /–/– 5.8/– /–/– 157/–/– /– 7.5/–/–/– 4.8/–/–/– 5.8/–/–/– 157/–/–/– 7.5/–/– / 9.6 4.8/–/– / 5.5 5.8/–/– / 7.0 157/–/– /189 9.8/–/–/10.3 5.2/–/–/ 5.4 6.9/–/–/ 7.2 186/– /–/ 194 (approx. l/100 km ) , Eng ine 1 ) CO2 emissions (approx. g/k m) , Estate (tyre width up to 225 mm ) CO2 emissions (approx. g/k m) , Estate (tyre width up to 235 mm ) Manual/sports/Ea sytronic/a utomatic transm ission urban extra-urban tota l CO 2 Z 18 XE Z 18 XER Z 20 NET Z 22 YH Z 28 N EL – /11. 1/–/– – / 6.2/–/– – / 8.0/–/– – / 192/–/– 10. 4/10.5/10.1/– 6.0/ 6.2/ 5. 8/– 7.6/ 7.8/ 7. 4/– 182/ 187/ 178/– –/12.8/–/– –/ 6.6/–/– –/ 8.9/–/– –/ 214/–/– 10.7/10.7/–/11.6 6. 4/ 6.3/– / 6. 4 8. 0/ 7.9/– / 8. 3 192/ 190/–/ 199 15.6/–/– /17. 5 7.5/– /–/ 7.7 10.5/–/– /11. 3 252/–/– / 271 Eng ine 1 ) Z 28 NET Z 28 NET VXR Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Z 30 DT Manual/sports/Ea sytronic/a utomatic transm ission urban extra-urban tota l CO 2 15.6/–/–/17.5 7. 5/–/–/ 7. 7 10.5/–/–/11.3 252/–/–/ 271 15.5/–/–/ 2 ) 7. 4/–/–/2 ) 10.4/–/–/ 2 ) 250/–/–/ 2) 7.6/– /–/– 4.9/– /–/– 5.9/– /–/– 159/–/– /– 7.6/–/–/– 4.9/–/–/– 5.9/–/–/– 159/–/–/– 7.6/–/– / 9.7 4.9/–/– / 5.6 5.9/–/– / 7.1 159/–/– /192 9.9/–/–/10.4 5.3/–/–/ 5.5 7.0/–/–/ 7.3 189/– /–/ 197 1) 2) Sa les desig nation – see pa ges 284, 285. Va lues no t a va ila ble at tim e of p rinting. Technical data Weights, payload and roof load The p ayload is the difference between the permitted Gross Vehic le Weight (see identification plate on page 282) and the EC kerbweig ht. To ca lc ulate the kerbweight, enter the data for your vehicle below: z Kerb weight from Ta ble 1, p ages 294 to 296 + ... ..... .... .. kg z Ad ditional w eight of equipment versions from Ta ble 2, page 297 + ... ..... .... .. kg z Weight of heavy accessories from Ta ble 3, p age 298 + ... ..... .... .. kg Total = ... ..... .... .. kg is the EC k erbweight. O ptional equipment and accessories increase the kerbweight, w hich means that the p ayload will also change slig htly. Pay attention to weight ranges in v ehicle documents and on identifica tion plate. The combined total of front a nd rear ax le loa ds must not exceed the perm issible Gross Vehicle Weight. For exam ple, if the front ax le is bearing its m aximum permissib le load, the rear axle can only bear a load that is eq ua l to the Gross Vehicle Weight m inus the front axle load. When the carav an/trailer is coupled and the towing vehic le fully loaded (including all occupants), the perm issible rear ax le loa d (see identification plate or v ehicle docum ents) may be exceeded by 40 kg. I f the perm issible rear axle load is exceeded, a max imum speed of 60 mph (100 km /h) applies. I f na tional regulations specify a low er ma ximum speed for vehicles towing a carava n/trailer, this must be observed . See the identification plate or v ehicle docum ents for permissib le ax le loads. 293 Roof loa d The permissib le roof load is 90 kg, a nd 100 k g for Estate with roof railing 3 . The roof load is the c om bined weight of the roof rack a nd the load. Driving hints – see page 184. Roof rack – see page 218. 294 Tec hnic al data Weights (kg) : Table 1, Kerbweight1) , Saloon Model Vec tra w ith Elec tronic C limat e Cont rol 3 1) 2) Eng ine 2 ) 4-door Ma nual transmission Easytronic Automatic tra nsmission Z 18 XE 1395 – – Z 18 XER 1395 1395 – Z 20 NET 1505 – – Z 22 SE 1460 – 1490 Z 22 YH 1460 – 1490 Z 28 NEL 1565 – 1590 Z 28 NET 1565 – 1590 Z 19 DTL 1505 – – Z 19 DT 1505 – – Z 19 DTH 1503 – 1523 Z 30 DT 1635 – 1660 According to EC D irective, inclu ding ass umed weights for d river (68 kg), lugg ag e (7 kg ) a nd a ll flu id s (ta nk 9 0% fu ll). Sa les desig nation – see pa ges 284, 285. Technical data Weights (kg) : T able 1, Kerbweight1 ), Hatch M odel Vectra with Electronic Clim ate C ontrol 3 1) 2) Engine2) 5-d oor Manua l transmission Easytronic Automatic tra nsmission Z 18 XE 1393 – – Z 18 XER 1393 1393 – Z 20 NET 1503 – – Z 22 SE 1475 – 1505 Z 22 Y H 1475 – 1505 Z 28 NEL 1580 – 1605 Z 28 NET 1580 – 1605 Z 19 DTL 1503 – – Z 19 DT 1503 – – Z 19 DTH 1523 – 1548 Z 30 DT 1650 – 1675 Acco rd in g to EC Directive, in clud in g a ssum ed weig hts for driver (68 kg ), lug ga ge (7 kg ) a nd all fluids (ta nk 90% full). Sales d esig na tion – see p ag es 284, 285 . 295 296 Tec hnic al data Weights (kg) : Table 1, Kerbweight1) , Estate Model Engi ne2 ) Vectra w ith Elec tronic C limat e Cont rol 3 Z 18 XE 1475 – – Z 18 XER 1475 1475 – Z 20 N ET 1570 – – Z 22 Y H 1523 – 1553 Z 28 N EL 1613 – 1638 Z 28 N ET 1613 – 1638 Z 19 DTL 1585 – – Z 19 DT 1585 – – Z 19 DTH 1600 – 1613 Z 30 DT 1685 – 1710 1) 2) Estate M anual tra nsmission Easytronic According to EC D irective, inclu ding ass umed weights for d river (68 kg), lugg ag e (7 kg ) a nd a ll flu id s (ta nk 9 0% fu ll). Sa les desig nation – see pa ges 284, 285. Automatic transm ission Technical data 297 Weights (kg) : Table 2, Additional weight of equipment versions Sal oon / Ha tch Eng ine 1 ) Z 18 XE, Z 18 XER Z 20 NET Z 22 SE Z 22 YH Z 28 NEL Z 28 NET Life 16 16 16 16 16 16 Ex clusiv 32 32 32 32 32 32 Design/Elite 31 31 31 31 31 31 SRi 28 28 28 28 28 28 Eng ine 1 ) Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Z 30 DT Life 16 16 16 6 Ex clusiv 32 32 32 22 Design/Elite 31 31 31 21 SRi 28 28 28 26 Est ate Eng ine 1 ) Z 18 XE, Z 18 XER Z 20 N ET Z 22 YH Z 28 NEL Z 28 NET Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Z 30 DT Life 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 3 Ex clusiv 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 20 Design/Elite 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 25 SRi 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 26 1) Sa les desig nation – see pa ges 284, 285. 298 Tec hnic al data Weights (kg) , Table 3, Heavy accessories Sal oon / Ha tch Accessories Sunroof Towing equip ment Weight 17 23 Accessories Sunroof Towing equip ment Weight 18 33 Est ate Technical data Tyres Not a ll tyres ava ila ble on the market currently meet the structural requirem ents. We recommend that you consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer concerning suitab le tyre mak es. These ty res have und ergone special tests to establish their reliab ility , safety and specific suitability for Vaux hall vehicles. Despite continuous ma rk et monitoring, we are unab le to assess these attributes for other tyres, ev en if they hav e been g ra nted approva l by the relevant authorities or in som e other form. Further information – see pa ge 211. Winter tyres 3 Tyres of size 215/50 R 17, 225/45 R 18 and 235/35 R 19 are not to be used as winter tyres. O nly the winter tyres sp ecified on p age 306 may b e used on vehicles factory-fitted with 235/35 R 19 tyres. For Vectra VXR, tyres of size 225/45 R 17 on a Vauxhall-approved alloy wheel with designation 7x17, ET39 as well as ty res of size 235/40 R 18 are permissible as winter tyres. If winter tyres are in use, the spare wheel may still be fitted w ith a summ er ty re. Use of the spare w heel may a lter vehicle ha ndling. Obtain a replacement for the fa ulty tyre as soon as possible, and hav e the wheel balanced and fitted to the vehicle. Further inform ation – see page 216. Tyre ch ains 3 Ty re c hains may be used on the front wheels only. We rec om mend the use of fine-link tyre cha ins which am ount to max 10 mm on the tread a nd tyre inner wall with chain lock Ty re chains are not perm itted on tyre sizes 115/70 R 16, 215/50 R 17, 225/45 R 18, 235/40 R 18 a nd 235/35 R 19. Further inform ation – see page 217. Wheels Wheel bolt tightening torque: 110 N m. Spare wheel 3 On vehicles with alloy w heels 3 the spare wheel may ha ve a steel rim . 299 Depending on the model variant, the sp are wheel is designed to be an emergency wheel 3: Using a spare wheel may change the vehicle’s ha nd ling. Repla ce defective tyres a s quickly as possib le, bala nce wheel and fit to v ehicle. The spare wheel ma y be fitted w ith a smaller tyre1 ) and a sm aller rim than the wheels fitted to the vehicle: Using the spare wheel m ay change the v ehicle’ s handling. Tyre pressure in psi/bar 2) The specified ty re pressures are valid for cold ty res. The increased ty re pressure resulting from ex tensiv e d riv ing must not be reduced. The tyre pressures specified on the following pages ap ply to both summer and w inter tyres. Alway s inflate the spare wheel to the tyre pressure for full load - see tables on following pages. Temporary spare wheel tyre pressure 3 – see tables on the following p ages. In v ehicles with tyre pressure monitoring system 3 there is an adapter in the v alve cap key . S crew a dapter to valve before attaching tyre pressure gauge – see page 213. Further inform ation – see p ages 211 to 217. 1) 2) Co untry-specific version: Th e spa re w heel is only to be used as a tempo ra ry sp are wh eel. 1 ba r corresp on ds to 100 kPa / 14.5 p si. 300 (ctd.) Tec hnic al data Tyre pressure in psi/bar Saloon / Hat ch Tyre pressure for load of up to 3 people Tyre pressure Tyre pressure for ECO 1) loa ded with full loa d up to 3 people Engine2 ) Tyres Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear Z 18 XE, Z 18 XER 195/65 205/55 215/55 215/50 225/45 225/45 29/2. 0 32/2.2 35/2.4 38/2.6 35/2. 4 42/2.9 Z 20 N ET 205/55 R 16 3) 35/2. 4 35/2.4 – – 36/2. 5 44/3.0 215/55 215/50 225/45 225/45 16, 17, 17, 18 33/2. 3 33/2.3 38/2.6 38/2.6 35/2. 4 42/2.9 195/65 R 15, 205/55 R 16 33/2. 3 33/2.3 – – 35/2. 4 42/2.9 215/55 215/50 225/45 225/45 32/2. 2 32/2.2 36/2.5 36/2.5 33/2. 3 41/2.8 61/4. 2 61/4.2 – – 61/4. 2 61/4.2 Z 22 S E, Z 22 Y H all 1) 2) 3) 4) R R R R R R R R R R R R R R 15, 16, 16, 17, 17, 18 16, 17, 17, 18 T 115/70 R 16 4) To red uce fuel co nsum ption a s much a s po ssible. Sales d esigna tion – s ee p a ges 284, 28 5. Only permitted a s winter tyres. For notes on the temp orary spa re w heel – see p ag e 237. Technical data (ctd.) Tyre pressure in psi/bar Saloon / Hat ch 301 Ty re pressure for load of up to 3 p eople Tyre pressure for full load Engine1 ) Ty res Front Rear Front Rear Z 28 N EL, Z 28 N ET 215/55 R 16 2 ) 35/2.4 35/2.4 38/2.6 45/3.1 215/50 R 17 2 ), 225/45 R 17 2 ), 225/45 R 18 2 ) 38/2.6 35/2.4 41/2.8 48/3.3 215/55 R 16 3 ) 36/2.5 33/2.3 39/2.7 46/3.2 215/50 R 17 3 ), 225/45 R 17 3 ), 225/45 R 18 3 ) 39/2.7 35/2.4 42/2.9 49/3.4 235/35 R 19, 235/40 R 18 42/2.9 38/2.6 45/3.1 51/3.5 225/45 R 17 4 ) 41/2.8 36/2.5 44/3.0 51/3.5 61/4.2 61/4.2 61/4.2 61/4.2 Vectra VXR all 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) T 115/70 R 165 ) Sales d esigna tion – s ee p a ges 284, 28 5. Versio n with ma nua l tra nsm is sio n. Versio n with au tom atic tra nsm iss io n. Only permitted a s winter tyres o n Vau xh all-a pp ro ved alloy wheels. For notes on the temp orary spa re w heel - see p ag e 237. 302 (ctd.) Tec hnic al data Tyre pressure in psi/bar Saloon / Hat ch Tyre p ressure for loa d of up to 3 people Ty re pressure Tyre pressure for ECO 1) loaded w ith full load up to 3 p eople Engine2 ) Tyres Front Rear Front Rear Front Rea r Z 19 DTL, Z 19 DTH 195/65 R 15, 205/55 R 16 35/2.4 35/2.4 – – 36/2.5 44/3. 0 215/55 215/50 225/45 225/45 R 16, R 17, R 17, R 18 33/2.3 33/2.3 38/2.6 38/2.6 35/2.4 42/2. 9 195/65 R 15, 205/55 R 16 33/2.3 33/2.3 – – 35/2.4 42/2. 9 215/55 215/50 225/45 225/45 R 16, R 17, R 17, R 18 32/2.2 32/2.2 36/2.5 36/2.5 33/2.3 41/2. 8 215/55 R 16, 36/2.5 33/2.3 – – 39/2.7 46/3. 2 215/50 R 17, 225/45 R 18 38/2.6 35/2.4 – – 39/2.7 46/3. 2 39/2.7 35/2.4 – – 41/2.8 48/3. 3 61/4.2 61/4.2 – – 61/4.2 61/4. 2 Z 19 DT Z 30 DT 225/45 R 17 all T 115/70 R 16 3) 1) To red uce fuel co nsum ption a s much a s po ssible. 2) Sales d esigna tion – s ee p a ges 284, 28 5. 3) For notes on the temp orary spa re w heel - see p ag e 237. Technical data (ctd.) Tyre pressure in psi/bar Estat e 303 Tyre p ressure for loa d of up to 3 people Ty re pressure Tyre pressure for ECO 1) loaded w ith full load up to 3 p eople Front Rear Front Rear Front Rea r 29/2.0 32/2.2 35/2.4 38/2.6 35/2.4 42/2. 9 Engine2 ) Tyres Z 18 XE, Z 18 XER 195/65 205/55 215/55 215/50 225/45 225/45 Z 20 N ET 205/55 R 16 3 ) 35/2.4 35/2.4 – – 36/2.5 44/3. 0 215/55 215/50 225/45 225/45 33/2.3 33/2.3 38/2.6 38/2.6 35/2.4 42/2. 9 195/65 R 15 3 ), 205/55 R 16 33/2.3 33/2.3 – – 35/2.4 42/2. 9 215/55 215/50 225/45 225/45 32/2.2 32/2.2 36/2.5 36/2.5 33/2.3 41/2. 8 61/4.2 61/4.2 – – 61/4.2 61/4. 2 Z 22 Y H, Z 22 S E all 1) 2) 3) 4) R 15, R 16, R 16, R 17, R 17, R 18 R 16, R 17, R 17, R 18 R 16, R 17, R 17, R 18 T 115/70 R 16 4) To red uce fuel co nsum ption a s much a s po ssible. Sales d esigna tion – s ee p a ges 284, 28 5. Only permitted a s winter tyres. For notes on the temp orary spa re w heel – see p ag e 237. 304 (ctd.) Tec hnic al data Tyre pressure in psi/bar Estat e Ty re pressure for load of up to 3 p eople Tyre pressure for full load Engine1 ) Ty res Front Rear Front Rear Z 28 N EL, Z 28 N ET 215/55 R 16 2 ) 36/2.5 33/2.3 39/2.7 46/3.2 215/50 R 17 2 ), 225/45 R 17 2 ), 225/45 R 18 2 ) 39/2.7 35/2.4 42/2.9 49/3.4 215/55 R 16 3 ) 38/2.6 35/2.4 41/2.8 48/3.3 17 3 ), 215/50 R 225/45 R 18 3 ) 39/2.7 35/2.4 42/2.9 49/3.4 225/45 R 17 3 ) 41/2.8 36/2.5 44/3.0 51/3.5 235/35 R 19, 235/40 R 18 42/2.9 38/2.6 45/3.1 51/3.5 225/45 R 17 4 ) 41/2.8 36/2.5 44/3.0 51/3.5 61/4.2 61/4.2 61/4.2 61/4.2 Vectra VXR all 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) T 115/70 R 165 ) Sales d esigna tion - see p ag es 284, 285 . Versio n with ma nua l tra nsm is sio n. Versio n with au tom atic tra nsm iss io n. Only permitted a s winter tyres o n Vau xh all-a pp ro ved alloy wheels. For notes on the temp orary spa re w heel – see p ag e 237. Technical data (ctd.) Tyre pressure in psi/bar Estat e 305 Tyre p ressure for loa d of up to 3 people Ty re pressure Tyre pressure for ECO 1) loaded w ith full load up to 3 p eople Engine2 ) Tyres Front Front Rear Rear Front Rea r Z 19 DTL, Z 19 DTH 195/65 R 15, 205/55 R 16 35/2.4 35/2.4 – – 36/2.5 44/3. 0 215/55 215/50 225/45 225/45 R 16, R 17, R 17, R 18 33/2.3 33/2.3 38/2.6 38/2.6 35/2.4 42/2. 9 195/65 R 15, 205/55 R 16 33/2.3 33/2.3 – – 35/2.4 42/2. 9 215/55 215/50 225/45 225/45 R 16, R 17, R 17, R 18 32/2.2 32/2.2 36/2.5 36/2.5 33/2.3 41/2. 8 215/55 R 16 36/2.5 33/2.3 – – 39/2.7 46/3. 2 215/50 R 17, 225/45 R 18 38/2.6 35/2.4 – – 39/2.7 46/3. 2 39/2.7 35/2.4 – – 41/2.8 48/3. 3 61/4.2 61/4.2 61/4.2 61/4.2 61/4.2 61/4. 2 Z 19 DT Z 30 DT 225/45 R 17 all T 115/70 R 16 3) 1) To red uce fuel co nsum ption a s much a s po ssible. 2) Sales d esigna tion – s ee p a ges 284, 28 5. 3) For notes on the temp orary spa re w heel - see p ag e 237. 306 (ctd.) Tec hnic al data Tyre pressure in psi/bar Saloon / Hat ch, Esta te with 19-inch wheels Ty re pressure for load of up to 3 p eople Tyre pressure for full load Engine1 ) Ty res Front Rear Front Rear Z Z Z Z XE, XER, S E, YH 235/35 R 19 39/2.7 35/2.4 41/2.8 48/3.3 215/55 R 16 2 ), 225/45 R 17 2 ), 205/50 R 17 2 ) 33/2.3 33/2.3 36/2.5 44/3.0 Z 20 N ET, Z 19 DTL, Z 19 DTH 235/35 R 19 39/2.7 35/2.4 41/2.8 48/3.3 215/55 R 16 2 ), 225/45 R 17 2 ) 33/2.3 33/2.3 36/2.5 44/3.0 205/50 R 17 2 ) 39/2.7 35/2.4 41/2.8 48/3.3 235/35 R 19 42/2.9 38/2.6 45/3.1 51/3.5 215/55 R 16 2 ), 225/45 R 17 2 ) 41/2.8 36/2.5 44/3.0 51/3.5 2) 42/2.9 38/2.6 45/3.1 51/3.5 18 18 22 22 Z 28 N EL, Z 28 N ET 205/50 R 17 Z 30 DT all 235/35 R 19 42/2.9 38/2.6 45/3.1 51/3.5 16 2 ), 2) 215/55 R 225/45 R 17 39/2.7 36/2.5 42/2.9 49/3.4 205/50 R 17 2 ) 42/2.9 38/2.6 45/3.1 51/3.5 61/4.2 61/4.2 61/4.2 61/4.2 T 115/70 R 163 ) 1) Sales d esigna tion - see p ag es 284, 285 . 2) Only permitted a s winter tyres. 3) For notes on the temp orary spa re w heel - see p ag e 237. Technical data Electrical system Battery Voltage 12 Volt Amp hours 55 Ah / 60 Ah 3 / 66 Ah 3 / 70 Ah 3 / 72 Ah 3 / 85 Ah 3 Battery for remote control of central locking sy stem CR 20 32 Battery for remote control of auxiliary heater/ventilation AAA LR 06 307 308 Tec hnic al data Capacities (approx. litres) Eng ine 1 ) Z 18 XE Z 18 XER Z 20 NET Z 22 SE Z 22 YH Z 28 NEL, Z 28 NET Fuel tank (nominal content) Saloon / H atch Estate 61 60 61 60 61 60 61 60 61 60 61 60 Engine oil with filter change between MI N and M AX on dipstick 4.25 1.0 4.5 1.0 6.0 1.0 4.75 0.75 5.0 1.0 6.0 1.0 Wind screen wash reserv oir with headlight wash system 2.9 5.6 2.9 5.6 2.9 5.6 2.9 5.6 2.9 5.6 2.9 5.6 1) Sa les desig nation – see pa ges 284, 285. Technical data Capacities (approx. litres) Eng ine 1 ) Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Z 30 DT Fuel tank (nominal content) Saloon / H atch Estate 61 60 61 60 61 60 61 60 Engine oil with filter change between MI N and M AX on dipstick 4.3 1.0 4.3 1.0 4.3 1.0 7.5 1.0 Wind screen wash reserv oir with headlight wash system 2.9 5.6 2.9 5.6 2.9 5.6 2.9 5.6 1) Sa les desig nation – see pa ges 284, 285. 309 310 Tec hnic al data Dimensions (approx. mm) Sa loon / Hatch Est ate Sal oon / Ha tch VXR Estat e VXR O verall length 4611 4839 4642 4870 O verall w id th 1798 1798 1798 1798 Width with two ex terior mirrors 2036 2036 2036 2036 1460 1500 1460 1500 Length of luggage compartment floor 1047 1176 1047 1176 Lug gage compartment width maximum between the wheel arches 1396 972 1079 1060 1396 972 1079 1060 Height of lugg age compartment opening 614 2 ) 767 614 767 Wheelb ase 2700 2830 2700 2830 11. 50 11. 50 11. 50 11.50 O verall height 1 ) Turning c ircle 1) 2) 3) diam eter 3 ) At kerb weig ht w ith d river. 4-d oor Saloon 324 mm . In metres. Technical data Installatio n dimensions of caravan/trailer towing equipment with removable coupling ball bar 3 , Salo on / Hatch All dimensions refer to fac tory -fitted towing equipm ent. Dimension mm A 334 B 1061 C 492.5 D 486.5 E 218 F 495 G 492.5 H 201 9 Warning Only use towing eq uipm ent approved for your vehicle. We recommend entrusting retro-fitting of towing equipment to a work shop. 311 312 Tec hnic al data Installatio n dimensions of caravan/trailer towing equipment with pivotin g coupling ball bar 3 , Estate All dimensions refer to fac tory -fitted towing equipm ent. Dimension mm A 396.5 B 157.5 C 386 D 74 E 630 F 590 G 491 H 486 I 480 J 379.5 9 Warning Only use towing eq uipm ent approved for your vehicle. We recommend entrusting retro-fitting of towing equipment to a work shop. Technical data 313 314 In dex Index A Ac cessories. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .. 77, 234 Ac cessory socket ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 60, 93 Ad aptive brake light ... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 208 Ad aptive Forward Lighting (AFL) 132, 133 Bulb replacem ent .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 257 Driving abroad ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 136 Ad justing the incline Seats ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... . 51 Air conditioning system ... .... .... ..... .... .... 140 Air intak e.... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 166 Air outlet .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 166 Air qua lity sensor ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 157 Air recirculation system .... .... . 148, 153, 161 Air vents . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 142 Airba gs... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... . 81 Ala rm .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... . 40 Ala rm system .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... . 38 Alterna tor ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... . 99 Antenna . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 137 Anti-corrosion service.. ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 271 Anti-freeze . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 274 Anti-freeze protection. ..... .... .... ..... 274, 279 Anti-knock q ua lity of fuel .... .... ..... .... .... 188 O ctane number.... .... ..... .... .... ..... 284, 285 Anti-loc k Brake Sy stem (ABS).. .... ..... .... 210 Anti-theft alarm system .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 38 Anti-theft locking system .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 30 Anti-theft protection .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 16 Aquaplaning.. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 215 Armrest . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 57 Ashtray .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 94, 135 Automatic air recircula tion m od e.... .... 161 Automatic anti-dazz le interior mirror.. .. 44 Automatic level control system ... ..... .... 204 Automatic transm ission.. .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 14 Automatic mode .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 177 Driv ing programmes ... .... ..... .... ..... .... 178 Fault .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 182 Interruption of p ow er supply ... ..... .... 183 Kickd ow n.... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 180 Manual mode . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 178 Selector lev er... .... .... ..... .... .... 14, 177, 178 Selector lev er lock ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 177 Winter programme. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 180 Automatic wiping ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 12, 127 Auxiliary heating .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 163 Program ming.. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 164 Remote control ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 165 Index B C Battery ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... 185, 280, 307 Interrup tion of power supply .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 47, 175, 183 Battery discharge p rotection.... .... ..... ... 136 Before sta rting-off ... ..... .... ..... .... 15, 16, 126 Belt force limiters . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... . 73 Belt tensioners. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... . 73 Bleeding, d iesel fuel system.. .... .... ..... ... 228 Board Information Disp la y ... .... .... ..... ... 108 Bonnet ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 228 Boot, see Lug gage compartment .... 34, 65 Brake assist . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 208 Brake light ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 208 Brake system ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... . 99 Brakes ABS .. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 210 Bra ke assist . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 208 Bra ke fluid ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 276 Bra ke lig hts.. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 258 Bra ke servo unit ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 184 Footbrake .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 208 Handbrake .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 209 Bulb replacem ent .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 252 Bulbs ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 252 Capacities .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 308 Car Pass . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... . 26 Carava n/trailer towing ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 184 Care .... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 264 Catalytic conv erter .. .... ..... .... .... ..... 195, 229 CDC (C ontinuous Da mping Control).... 198 Central lock ing sy stem ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... . 30 Centre console lighting .... .... .... ..... .... .... 135 Changing the b attery Remote c ontrol .... .... ..... .... ... 29, 165, 307 Changing tyre/wheel typ e ... .... ..... .... .... 211 Changing wheels ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 238 Chassis num ber, see Vehic le Id entific ation N umber . .... 283 Check control .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .. 20, 124 Child restraint sy stem.. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... . 77 Child safety lock s..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 41, 46 Cigarette lighter . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .. 93, 135 Climate control ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 140 Climate control system .... .... .... ..... .... .... 156 Clutch operation. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 185 CO 2 emissions . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... 287, 288 Cold start ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 185 Colour Information Display . .... ..... .... .... 108 Continuous Damping C ontrol (CDC ).... 198 Contra st.. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 119 315 C ontrol indicators... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... 10, 98 Adaptive Forward Lighting . .... . 104, 133 Airb ag .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 86 Anti-lock Bra ke System (ABS ).. ..... .... 210 Belt tensioners .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 74 Brake sy stem... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 209 Engine elec tronics... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 192 Electronic S tability Programme .... .... 196 Exhaust... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 192 IDS+ .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 199 Immobiliser. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 27 Parking dista nce sensors ... 202 133, 203 Tyre pressure monitoring system . .... 207 C ool box ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 61 C oolant . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 274 C oolant level .. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 275 C oolant tempera ture display .. .... ..... .... 106 C ooled glove compartm ent .... .... ..... .... 143 C ooling .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 149, 154 C orrecting time... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 112, 118 C oupling socket load . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 224 C ourtesy light ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 134 C ourtesy lights Bulb replacement ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 262 C ruise control. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 200 C urtain airbag s .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 85 C urv e lighting (AFL) ... ..... .... ..... .... ... 22, 132 316 In dex D E Dashb oa rd, see Instrument panel ..... .... ... 6 Data .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .. 26, 282 Date .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... 110, 113 Daytime running lig hts . .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 128 Dec om missioning .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 281 Dem isting and defrosting Windows .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 147 With climate control sy stem.. .... ..... ... 159 With air conditioning sy stem .... 150, 155 Diesel fuel filter .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 274 Diesel fuel system .... ..... .... ..... .... .... 228, 274 Diesel particle filter.. ..... 102, 143, 185, 194 Dimensions.. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 310 Dipped beam .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ... 7 Bulb replacement. ..... .... ..... .... .... 253, 255 Display ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... 107, 108 Display mode .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 120 Door locks.... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .. 26, 266 Doors .. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 100 Door-to-door lighting ... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 133 Drink holders ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... . 97 Driver’ s seat with climate control . ..... ... 144 Driving abroad ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... 188, 269 Headlights ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 136 Toll system ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 138 Driving hints .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 184 Easytronic ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .. 14, 168 Driving programm es .... .... .... ..... .... .... 171 Interruption of power supply .... .... .... 175 K ic kdown ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 172 Selector lever... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... . 14 Starting-off.. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 170 Winter programm e.. ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 172 Economical driving .. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 186 Elec tric seat adjustment... .... .... ..... .... ..... . 52 Elec tric sunroof ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... . 47 Elec tric windows . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... . 45 Elec trica l sy stem . ..... .... ..... .... . 246, 280, 307 Elec tro-hydraulic p ow er-assisted steering. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 10, 103, 184 Elec tronic com ponents ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 280 Elec tronic imm obiliser . ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... . 27 Elec tronic S tability Programme .... .... .... 196 Engine c od e .... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 283, 284, 285 Engine c ontrol indicator... .... .... ..... .... .... 192 Engine oil .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 272 Engine oil c hange .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 273 Engine oil level and consump tion 103, 272 Engine oil filter .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 273 Engine oil p ressure .. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... . 98 Engine speed .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 185 Engine w ash .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 266 Env ironmental protection ... ..... .... . 264, ESP (Electronic Stability Programm e) .. Exhaust c ontrol indicator ... ..... .... ..... .... Exhaust g ases..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... Exhaust system ... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... Exterior mirrors ... .... .... ..... .... ..... ... 6, 43, 273 196 192 193 193 143 Index 317 F G H Fan.. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... 145, 152, 271 Filling station Capacities.... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... 308, 309 Engine oil level . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 272 Fuel . ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... 188, 284, 285 Opening the bonnet . .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 228 Ty re pressure.... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... 187, 299 Vehicle data ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 283 Windscreen wash sy stem .. .... .... ..... ... 279 First-aid k it, . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 234 Flat tyre ... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 242 FlexO rganizer . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... . 69 Fog tail light .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 131 Bulb replacement. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 258 Footbrak e.... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 208 Front fog lights .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 130 Bulb replacement. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 258 Front pa ssenger’s airbag. ..... .... .... ..... .... . 81 Fuel . .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... 188, 284, 285 Fuel consump tion .... ..... 186, 188, 287, 288 Fuel filter.. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 274 Fuel gauge .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 106 Fuel system, diesel ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 228 Fuses ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 246 Gears .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... . 14 Generator, see Alternator .... .... ..... .... ..... . 99 Genuine Vauxhall Parts and Accessories ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 271 Glov e com partment .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... . 95 C ooled .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 143 Glov e com partment lighting ... ..... .... .... 135 Bulb replacem ent .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 263 Gra phic al Inform ation Display ..... .... .... 108 Gross Vehicle Weight .. ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 293 Halogen headlight system . ..... .... ..... .... 253 Bulb replacement ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 253 Driv ing abroad ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 136 Handb ra ke. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 16, 209 Haz ard warning lights .... .... ..... .... ..... .... 131 Head restraints... .... .... ..... .... .... 5, 19, 55, 56 Headlight flash... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 129 Headlight range adjustment... .... . 131, 252 Headlight switch .... .... ..... .... ..... . 7, 128, 129 Headlight wash system .. .... .... 12, 127, 279 Headlights . .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... . 7 Daytime running lights.... ..... .... ..... .... 128 Driv ing abroad ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 136 Front fog lights ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 130 Reversing lig hts... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 131 Wa rning device... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 126 Heated ex terior mirrors .. .... ..... .... ... 13, 143 Heated front sea ts . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 144 Heated rear seats .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 144 Heated rear w indow .. ..... .... ..... .... ... 13, 143 Heating . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 140, 146, 154 Seats.. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 144 With clima te control sy stem .... ..... .... 158 With air c onditioning sy stem ... . 150, 155 Height adjustm ent Seat belts ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 76 Steering wheel .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... . 6 High-pressure cleaners ... .... .. 221, 266, 267 Horn... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 11 318 In dex I J K Identification plate .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 282 IDS+ (Interactive Driving Sy stem) . 196, 198 Ignition logic ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... 113, 120 Ignition sy stem ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... 271, 280 Imm ob iliser.. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... . 27 Information display . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 108 Infotainm ent system ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 137 Inspection system .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 268 Instrument display ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 105 Instrument illum ination .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 134 Bulb replacement. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 263 Instrument panel . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ... 6 Instruments . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .. 98, 105, 137 Interactiv e Driving S ystem (I DS+) . 196, 198 Interior mirror .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 5, 44 Univ ersal remote control ... .... .... ..... .... . 41 Interruption of power supply .. 47, 122, 125 Easytronic .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 175 Elec tric wind ow s... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... . 47 Selector lever lock ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 183 ISO FIX. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... . 79 Jack ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 238 Jump starting.. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 230 K eys Extending ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. Ignition lock ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 6, 15, Locking doors . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. Remov e .. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. Starting the engine. ..... .... ..... .... . 6, 15, 26 27 30 16 27 Index 319 L M N Langua ge selection. ..... .... ..... .... .... 113, 118 Lashing eyes ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... . 69 Leather trim .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 266 Level control sy stem ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 204 Light switch . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ... 7 Lighting ... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 7, 100, 128 Driv ing abroad . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 136 Loa ding ... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 223 Loc king doors . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 2, 30 Loc king from the inside.... ..... .... .... ..... .... . 31 Loc ks... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 266 Lub rica nts ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... 272, 283 Lug gage compartment Bulb replacement. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 263 Extension . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... . 65 FlexOrga nizer... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... . 69 Lashing ey es .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... . 69 Lighting ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 135 Loading ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... 223, 293 Locking .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... . 34 Safety net .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... . 67 Lug gage compartment cover .. .... ..... .... . 66 Lum bar sup port ... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .... 51, 53 Main bea m. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 7, 129 Bulb replacem ent .... ..... .... .... ..... 254, 256 C ontrol indicator.. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 101 Maintenance... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 268 Air conditioning system .... .... ..... .... .... 167 Anti-freeze protec tion .. .... .... ..... .... .... 274 Brake fluid ... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 276 Brakes. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 208 C atalytic converter .. ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 195 Engine oil ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... 272, 273 Fuel consum ption .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 187 Tyre pressure... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 213 Tyres ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 214 Windscreen wiper .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 277 Manua l transmission ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... . 14 Mirrors .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... 5, 43, 44 Misted windows .. ..... .... ..... .... ... 13, 147, 159 Mobile telephone..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 139 Motorwa y lighting (AFL).. .... .... ..... .. 22, 132 Muffler, see Ex haust system .... ..... .... .... 193 N um ber plate lights Bulb replacement ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 261 N um ber plate lighting .... .... ..... .... ..... .... 261 N um ber plates.... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 281 320 In dex O P Q O ctane numbers.. .... ..... .... .... 188, 284, 285 O dometer .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 105 O il chang e... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 273 O il filter change ... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 273 O il level and consum ption .... .... .... ..... ... 272 O il pressure . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... . 98 O ils .. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 272 O perating temperature.... ..... .... .... ..... ... 185 O utside temperature ga uge . .... .... ..... ... 109 O verrun.... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... 185, 187 Pa intwork damage.. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 265 Pa rk ing ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .. 16, 202 Pa rk ing distance sensors . .... .... ..... .... .... 202 Pa rk ing lights .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 7, 134 Bulb replacem ent .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 257 Pa rts ... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 271 Pedals . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 185 Perform ance ... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... 287, 288 Petrol .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 188, 284, 285 Pinking .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 188 Pollen filter . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 166 Position mem ory . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 43, 54 Power steering, see electro-hyd ra ulic power-assisted steering . .... .... ..... .... .... 184 Preheating.. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 102 Pushing, towing .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 229 Q uic kheat .. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 146, 154, 158 Index R S Radio .. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 137 Radio equipment (C B).. .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 139 Radio reception ... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 137 Rain sensor.. .... .... 12, 47, 48, 127, 264, 277 Reading lights. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 135 Rear light cluster.. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 128 Bulb replacement. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 258 Rear window wa sh system .. ..... .... ..... .. 12, 127, 264, 279 Refuelling . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 189 Fuel filler cap .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 188 Remote control Aux iliary heating.. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 165 Central locking system . ..... .... .... ..... .... . 28 Steering wheel.. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .. 21, 137 Univ ersal remote control ... .... .... ..... .... . 41 Replacem ent keys ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... . 26 Reversible carpet . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... . 69 Reversing lights Bulb replacement. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 258 Roof load . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .. 71, 184, 187 Roof rack . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... 187, 218 Running-in Bra kes .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 208 Safeguard against unauthorised use 6, 16 Safety accessories ... .... ..... .... .... ..... .. 77, 234 Safety net ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... . 67 Saving energy . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 186 Sea t adjustment . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... 3, 50, 52 Sea t belts ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... . 72, 76, 266 Sea t height adjustm ent ... .... .... ..... .... .. 3, 51 Sea t occupancy recognition .... ..... .... ..... . 87 Sea t position ... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 52, 53 Sea ts ... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... 3, 50, 51 Extending the lug gage compartment 65 Heated .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 144 With climate control ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 144 Selector lev er... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... 169, 177 Selector lev er lock .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .. 14, 177 Self-diagnosis . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 74, 86 Self-help . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 228 C entral locking system . .... .... ..... .... ..... . 33 Electric sunroof .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... . 49 Electric windows... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... . 47 Information disp la y . ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 110 Remote c ontrol .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... . 29 Serv ic e interv al display .... .... .... ..... .... .... 270 Serv ic e work .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 270 Side airbags .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... . 83 Spare fuses. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 247 Spare keys.. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... . 26 Spare wheel .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... 236, 238 321 S peed .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 186 Fuel consumption ... ..... .... ..... .... . 186, 187 S peedometer . ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 105 S port mode .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 101, 198 S ta rter switch. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 6, 15, 27 S ta rting the engine .... ..... .... .. 6, 15, 27, 229 Self-help . .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 229 S team-jet cleaners . .... ..... .... .. 221, 266, 267 S teering column lock .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .. 6, 16 S teering w heel a djustment . ..... .... ..... .... .... . 6 S teering w heel remote control .... ... 21, 137 S towa ge c om partments . .... ..... ... 57, 95, 96 S unblind ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 49 S unroof.. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 47 S unsha de ... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 49 S ystem settings... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 112, 117 322 In dex T Tables. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... . 62 Tachometer. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 105 Tail lights . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 128 Bulb replacement. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 258 Tailgate ... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... . 34 Tailgate wiper . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 127 Technical d ata ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 282 Telephone, see Mobile telephone ..... ... 139 Tem perature regulation... ..... .... .... 145, 158 Tem porary spare wheel ... ..... .... .... 217, 237 The first 600 miles.... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 184 Thigh support . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... . 53 Tightening torque.... ..... .... ..... .... .... 242, 299 Time .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... 110, 113 Toll sy stems. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 138 Tools ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 238 Towing ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 232 Towing eq uipm ent .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 219 Towing ey e.. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... 232, 233 Trailer/caravan towing . .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 184 Trailer S tability Assist (TSA).. .... .... ..... ... 225 Transm ission display .... .... ..... .... .... 168, 176 Tra nsmission, automatic . .... .... ..... .... ..... . 14 Automatic mode.. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 177 Driving programm es .... .... .... ..... .... .... 178 Fault.... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 182 Interruption of power supply .... .... .... 183 K ic kdown ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 180 Selector lever... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... 177, 178 Selector lever loc k .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 177 Winter programm e.. ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 180 Tra nsmission, Easytronic . .... .... ..... .... .... 168 Driving programm es .... .... .... ..... .... .... 171 Interruption of power supply .... .... .... 175 K ic kdown ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 172 Selector lever... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .. 14, 170 Winter programm e.. ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 172 Tra nsmission, m anual . ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... . 14 Tra vel Assistant .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 22, 58 Tread d epth .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 214 Trip computer . .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 20, 114, 120 Trip odometer . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 105 Triple Information Display ... .... ..... .... .... 108 TS A (Trailer S ta bility Assist) . .... ..... .... .... 225 Turn lighting (AFL) .. .... ..... .... .... ..... .. 22, 132 Turn signal lights ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... ... 7 Bulb replacem ent .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 258 Tw in Audio . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .. 21, 138 Ty re c hains. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... 217, 299 Ty re c ondition . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 214 Ty re p ressure .. .... ..... .... ..... .... . 204, 213, 299 Ty re p ressure monitoring system . .... .... 204 Ty re repair kit . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 242 U Units of mea sure .... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 113, 119 Unlea ded fuel ..... .... .... ... 188, 190, 284, 285 Used oil . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 273 V Valve cap k ey ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 213 Vauxhall alarm system ... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 38 Vauxhall Service . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 268 Vehicle care ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 264 Vehicle decom missioning ... ..... .... ..... .... 281 Vehicle Identification Number .... ..... .... 283 Vehicle key s, see Keys .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 26 Vehicle recomm issioning .... ..... .... ..... .... 281 Vehicle tools .. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 238 Ventilation . .... ..... .... .... ... 140, 146, 153, 160 Index W Warning buzzers.. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... Warning messages .. ..... .... ..... .... .... 111, Warning triangle, . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... Wash fluid reservoir, windscreen wash sy stem ..... .... .... ..... ... Wheels, ty res ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... Wind ow s Demisting and defrosting . ... 13, 147, 150, 155, Wind screen wash system . ..... .... .... .. 12, Anti-freeze protection .. ..... .... .... ..... ... Capacities.... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... 308, Wash fluid reservoir .. .... ..... .... .... ..... ... Wind screen wiper .... ..... .... ..... .. 11, 126, Winter mode Starting -off aid .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... Winter operation Battery . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... Coolant, anti-freeze.. .... ..... .... .... ..... ... Fuel consumption ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... Fuel for d iesel engines.. ..... .... .... ..... ... Heating .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... 140, 150, Locks .... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... Ty re chains .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... 217, Window demisting and defrosting ... Windscreen wash sy stem, anti-freeze protection... ..... .... .... ..... ... Winter programme .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... Winter tyres. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... 216, X 126 116 234 279 211 159 127 279 309 279 277 172 185 274 187 188 155 266 299 147 279 172 299 Xenon headlight system .. .... .... ..... .... .... 255 Bulb replacem ent .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 255 Driving abroad ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 136 323 324 In dex Owner’s Manual VECTRA Operation, Safety and Maintenance Reproduction or translation, in whole or in parts, is not permitted without prior written consent from Vauxhall Motors Ltd. All rights as understood under the copyright laws are explicitly reserved by Vauxhall Motors Ltd. All information, illustrations and specifications contained in this manual are based on the latest production information available at the time of publication. The right is reserved to make changes at any time without notice. Edition: July 2007. TS 1557-A-08 VECTRA ©Copyright by Vauxhall Motors Ltd., England.